gbss feature activation guide((v900r013c00_13)(pdf)-en

GBSSV900R013C00

Feature Activation Guide

Issue 13

Date 2012-09-17

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration.Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, theguidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network.

This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in GBSS.

NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R013C00

BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 BTS3900V100R013C00 and later versions

BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/BTS3006C/BTS3002E

BTS3000V200R0013C00 and later versions

BTS3900B/BTS3900E BTS3000V600R0013C00 and later versions

BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A V302R007 and later versions

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Technical support engineers

l Maintenance engineers

l Field engineers

l Network optimization engineers

GBSSFeature Activation Guide About This Document


ii

Organization1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide

GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the ConfigurationMethod column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this featuredoes not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional featurein the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.

3 Activating the GSM License

This describes how to activate the GSM license.

4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202Emergency Call Service (TS12).

6 Configuring IMSI Detach

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302IMSI Detach.

7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601HUAWEI I Handover.

8 Configuring Directed Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607Directed Retry.

9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502Assignment and Immediate Assignment.

10 Configuring Call Reestablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503Call Reestablishment.

11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501TCH Re-assignment.

12 Configuring Radio Link Management



iii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedureof the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature donot need to be configured.

13 Configuring BTS Software Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check functionintroduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functionsinvolved in the feature do not need to be configured.

14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.

15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621Connection Inter BSC over IP.

16 Configuring Link aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103Link aggregation.

17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.

18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003Call-Based Flow Control.

19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.

20 Configuring System Information Sending

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101System Information Sending.

21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight SavingTime (DST).

22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.

23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401Cell Frequency Scan.

24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)



iv

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806Signaling Transport Point (STP).

25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-11180214-Digit Signaling Point Code.

26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802Discontinuous Reception (DRX).

27 Configuring BTS Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601BTS Power Management.

28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.

29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525DTMF Downlink Message Filter.

30 Configuring High Speed Signaling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201High Speed Signaling.

31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521Guaranteed Emergency Call.

32 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001License Control for Urgency.

33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.

34 Configuring Connection with TMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.

36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Antenna Receive Diversity.



v

37 Configuring BTS Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501BTS Clock.

38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301Voice Fault Detection.

39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).

40 Configuring PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901Power Boost Technology (PBT).

41 Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902Transmit Diversity (TD).

42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1159034-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals tooptimize the quality of uplink signals.

43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101Dynamic Transmit Diversity.

44 Configuring Dynamic PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102Dynamic PBT.

45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage.

46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106Dynamic Power Sharing.

47 Configuring Extended Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001Extended Cell.

48 Configuring Concentric Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201Concentric Cell.

49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell



vi

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501Co-BCCH Cell.

50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402Enhanced Dual-Band Network.

51 Configuring Flex MAIO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).

52 Configuring ICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801ICC.

53 Configuring EICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821EICC.

54 Configuring VAMOS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830VAMOS.

55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831Mute SAIC MS Identification.

56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832VAMOS Call Drop Solution.

57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).

58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.

59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703Antenna Frequency Hopping.

60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.

61 Configuring IBCA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).



vii

62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network.

63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization.

64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202Synchronous Ethernet.

65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.

66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.

67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.

68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.

69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.

70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604Intelligent Combiner Bypass.

71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605Active Backup Power Control.

72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.

73 Configuring PSU Smart Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608PSU Smart Control.

74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization



viii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.

75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610Dynamic Cell Power Off.

76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111611TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.

77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligent Voltage Adjustment.

78 Configuring Flex Abis

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301Flex Abis.

79 Configuring BTS Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702BTS Local Switch.

80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401Abis Transmission Optimization.

81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.

82 Configuring Flex Ater

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901Flex Ater.

83 Configuring BSC Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701BSC Local Switch.

84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902Ater Compression Transmission.

85 Configuring Ring Topology

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801Ring Topology.

86 Configuring TRX Cooperation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801TRX Cooperation.



ix

87 Configuring MSC Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401MSC Pool.

88 Configuring the SGSN Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

89 Configuring Abis Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601Abis Bypass.

90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721Robust Air Interface Signalling.

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803Abis Transmission Backup.

92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725BSC Node Redundancy.

93 Configuring TC Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDMtransmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.

94 Configuring OML Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS isenabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OMLis disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.

95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.

96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

97 Configuring Fast Move Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102Fast Move Handover.

98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103Chain Cell Handover.



x

99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104Multi-Site Cell.

100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.

101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902Satellite Transmission over A Interface.

102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.

103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.

104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301Local Multiple Signaling Points.

105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701Semi-Permanent Connection.

106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.

107 Configuring Active Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602Active Power Control.

108 Configuring Ciphering

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.

109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.

110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).

111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)



xi

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 HalfRate Speech (HR).

112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.

113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast

Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messagesin the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells canreceive the short messages.

114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601Automatic Level Control (ALC).

115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).

116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).

117 Configuring TFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701TFO.

118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).

119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).

120 Configuring EVAD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115711EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.

121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801Voice Quality Index (VQI).

122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501Enhanced Measurement Report.

123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117101BTS power lift for handover.



xii

124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.

125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115708Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.

126 Configuring AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-115501AMR FR and GBFD-115502 AMR HR.

127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.

128 Configuring WB AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507WB AMR.

129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901Streaming QoS(GBR).

130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902QoS ARP&THP.

131 Configuring PS Active Package Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904PS Active Package Management.

132 Configuring PoC QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905PoC QoS.

133 Configuring NC2

This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional featureGBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).

134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI).

135 Configuring GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101GPRS.

136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I



xiii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001Network Operation Mode I.

137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118901CS-3/CS-4.

138 Configuring EGPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201EGPRS.

139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-11920111-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic featureGBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.

140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.

141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302Packet Channel Dispatching.

142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305BSS Paging Coordination.

143 Configuring PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502PS Handover.

144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119503Early TBF Establishment.

145 Configuring PS Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504PS Power Control.

146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.

147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119506Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.

148 Configuring EDA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).



xiv

149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119402MS High Multislot Classes.

150 Configuring DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151DTM.

151 Configuring Class11 DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403Class11 DTM.

152 Configuring HMC DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404HMC DTM.

153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/sCircuit Switched Data.

154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119406High Speed Circuit Switched Data.

155 Configuring Resource Reservation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001Resource Reservation.

156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).

157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.

158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115003Flow Control Based on User Priority.

159 Configuring PS Service in Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907PS Service in Priority.

160 Configuring Network Support SAIC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103Network Support SAIC.

161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)



xv

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA).

164 Configuring Lb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404Lb Interface.

165 Configuring Abis over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601Abis over IP.

166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611Abis IP over E1/T1.

167 Configuring Abis MUX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604Abis MUX.

168 Configuring Abis IPHC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118612Abis IPHC.

169 Configuring A over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602A over IP.

170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.

171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610UDP MUX for A Transmission.

172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.

173 Configuring Gb over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603Gb over IP.



xvi

174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118607IP Performance Monitor.

175 Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630Ethernet OAM.

176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning.

177 Configuring PICO Synchronization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602PICO Synchronization.

178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.

179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604PICO USB Encryption.

180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606PICO Sleeping Mode.

181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607PICO Automatic Optimization.

182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510608PICO Transceiver Redundancy.

183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.

184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.

185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705Compact BTS Timing Power Off.

186 Configuring Local User Management



xvii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706Local User Management.

187 Configuring VGCS and VBS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS)and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).

188 Configuring GSM-T Relay

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310GSM-T Relay.

189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501HUAWEI II Handover.

190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502Handover Re-establishment.

191 Configuring BSS Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701BSS Sharing.

192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702MOCN Shared Cell.

193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703IMSI-Based Handover.

194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118704Abis Independent Transmission.

195 Configuring MSRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).

196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).

197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.

198 Configuring Latency Reduction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805Latency Reduction.



xviii

199 Configuring Access Control Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002Access Control Class (ACC).

200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.

202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.

203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1143232G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.

204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-114325Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.

206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Basedon Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.

207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality



xix

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.

212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.

213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511306GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.

214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.

215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted CellChange.

216 Configuring SRVCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).

217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511310Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.

218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511312Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

219 Configuring CSFB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511313CSFB.

220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.

221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Basedon Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.

223 Configuring Extended BCCH



xx

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511403Extended BCCH.

224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501Multiple CCCHs.

225 Configuring Layered Paging

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511502Layered Paging.

226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-5112012G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching.

227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511701Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation.

228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).

229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211802GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrumresources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their trafficload, improving frequency utilization.

230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).

231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).

232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



xxi

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.



xxii


{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



xxiii

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................1

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................................7

3 Activating the GSM License......................................................................................................40

4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................41

5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)..........................................................................43

6 Configuring IMSI Detach..........................................................................................................45

7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover..........................................................................................47

8 Configuring Directed Retry.......................................................................................................56

9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment........................................................58

10 Configuring Call Reestablishment........................................................................................60

11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment..........................................................................................64

12 Configuring Radio Link Management..................................................................................66

13 Configuring BTS Software Management.............................................................................68

14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.....................................70

15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP.........................................................................75

16 Configuring Link aggregation................................................................................................78

17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure......................................81

18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control...................................................................................83

19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report........................................................85

20 Configuring System Information Sending...........................................................................87

21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.......................................................................................89

22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment........................................................................91

23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan..........................................................................................93

GBSSFeature Activation Guide Contents


xxiv

24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP).....................................................................95

25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code......................................................................100

26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)...................................................................102

27 Configuring BTS Power Management................................................................................104

28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm............................................................106

29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter..................................................................111

30 Configuring High Speed Signaling ....................................................................................113

31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call..........................................................................116

32 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................119

33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface............................................121

34 Configuring Connection with TMA....................................................................................123

35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................126

36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.........................................................................129

37 Configuring BTS Clock..........................................................................................................131

38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection......................................................................................133

39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).....................................137

40 Configuring PBT......................................................................................................................139

41 Configuring Transmit Diversity...........................................................................................142

42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity...............................................................................144

43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity.........................................................................146

44 Configuring Dynamic PBT....................................................................................................149

45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage.............................................................................151

46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing.................................................................................154

47 Configuring Extended Cell....................................................................................................157

48 Configuring Concentric Cell.................................................................................................159

49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell...................................................................................................162

50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network.....................................................................166

51 Configuring Flex MAIO.........................................................................................................170

52 Configuring ICC......................................................................................................................172

53 Configuring EICC....................................................................................................................174



xxv

54 Configuring VAMOS.............................................................................................................176

55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification.......................................................................186

56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution..........................................................................189

57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)...........................193

58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping..............................................................196

59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping........................................................................199

60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing........................................................201

61 Configuring IBCA...................................................................................................................203

62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network..........................................................................207

63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization.............................................................................211

64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet.....................................................................................213

65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.......................................................215

66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink........................................220

67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................222

68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.............................................224

69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level...........228

70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass.........................................................................230

71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control.......................................................................232

72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type............................................235

73 Configuring PSU Smart Control...........................................................................................238

74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization..............................240

75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off................................................................................243

76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment..............................................................246

77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment..........................................248

78 Configuring Flex Abis............................................................................................................250

79 Configuring BTS Local Switch.............................................................................................258

80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization.................................................................262

81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.................................................265

82 Configuring Flex Ater.............................................................................................................268

83 Configuring BSC Local Switch.............................................................................................270



xxvi

84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission..................................................................273

85 Configuring Ring Topology..................................................................................................277

86 Configuring TRX Cooperation..............................................................................................280

87 Configuring MSC Pool...........................................................................................................283

88 Configuring the SGSN Pool..................................................................................................28688.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)..........................................................................................................28788.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR).........................................................................................................288

89 Configuring Abis Bypass.......................................................................................................291

90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling....................................................................296

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup............................................................................29891.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)..........................................................................29991.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS).....................................................................301

92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy..................................................................................306

93 Configuring TC Pool...............................................................................................................31593.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM).......................................................................................................31693.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP).............................................................................................................320

94 Configuring OML Backup.....................................................................................................327

95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking........................................................330

96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)......................................................333

97 Configuring Fast Move Handover.......................................................................................335

98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover.......................................................................................337

99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell..................................................................................................339

100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...............................................342

101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface....................................................345

102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...............................................348

103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................350

104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.................................................................352

105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection.......................................................................355

106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.............................................................358

107 Configuring Active Power Control....................................................................................360

108 Configuring Ciphering.........................................................................................................362

109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization..........................................................364



xxvii

110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).............................................................................367

111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)..................................................................................369

112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..............................................371

113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast..........................................................................................374113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)......................................................................375113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast......................................................................................................377

114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..................................................................379

115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)..............................................................382

116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)..............................................................384

117 Configuring TFO...................................................................................................................386

118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)....................................................389

119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).....................................391

120 Configuring EVAD...............................................................................................................393

121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)...........................................................................395

122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report..................................................................398

123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover........................................................................400

124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation........................................................................402

125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing......................................................405

126 Configuring AMR.................................................................................................................407

127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.............................410

128 Configuring WB AMR..........................................................................................................413

129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)....................................................................................415

130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP..............................................................................................418

131 Configuring PS Active Package Management.................................................................421

132 Configuring PoC QoS...........................................................................................................423

133 Configuring NC2...................................................................................................................425

134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)...................................................427

135 Configuring GPRS................................................................................................................430

136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I.........................................................................433

137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4.........................................................................................................435

138 Configuring EGPRS..............................................................................................................437



xxviii

139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access.....................................................................................440

140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding...................................444

141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching.......................................................................446141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.................................................448141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.....................................................................................................449141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...........................................................450

142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination.............................................................................452

143 Configuring PS Handover...................................................................................................454

144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment..............................................................................458

145 Configuring PS Power Control...........................................................................................460

146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...............................462

147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User........................465

148 Configuring EDA...................................................................................................................467

149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes..........................................................................470

150 Configuring DTM.................................................................................................................472

151 Configuring Class11 DTM...................................................................................................474

152 Configuring HMC DTM......................................................................................................476

153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data................................................................478

154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data............................................................480

155 Configuring Resource Reservation....................................................................................483

156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)..............485

157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..........................................................488

158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority.........................................................490

159 Configuring PS Service in Priority....................................................................................492

160 Configuring Network Support SAIC................................................................................494

161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)....................................................................496

162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).....................................................................498

163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)...............................................................500

164 Configuring Lb Interface.....................................................................................................502

165 Configuring Abis over IP.....................................................................................................509

166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.........................................................................................512



xxix

167 Configuring Abis MUX........................................................................................................515

168 Configuring Abis IPHC........................................................................................................517

169 Configuring A over IP..........................................................................................................520

170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1...............................................................................................523

171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission...................................................................526

172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface..........................................528

173 Configuring Gb over IP........................................................................................................532

174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor...............................................................................535

175 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................537

176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning..............542

177 Configuring PICO Synchronization..................................................................................545

178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning................................................................547

179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption...................................................................................550

180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode....................................................................................552

181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...................................................................554

182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy...................................................................556

183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning............................................560

184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization..........................................................................................................................................................562

185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off................................................................565

186 Configuring Local User Management...............................................................................567

187 Configuring VGCS and VBS...............................................................................................569

188 Configuring GSM-T Relay..................................................................................................572

189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover...................................................................................575

190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment........................................................................584

191 Configuring BSS Sharing....................................................................................................586

192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.......................................................................................590

193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover..................................................................................594

194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission................................................................597

195 Configuring MSRD...............................................................................................................601

196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..........................................................................603



xxx

197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A.................................................................................................605

198 Configuring Latency Reduction.........................................................................................607

199 Configuring Access Control Class.....................................................................................609

200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.................................................................611

201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover..................................................614

202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover......................................................616

203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State..............................................618

204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release............................620

205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g..........................................622

206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Basedon Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA......................................................................................626

207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g..............................629

208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................633

209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..................................................636

210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage....................639

211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.......................643

212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...................647

213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover......................................................650

214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE.....................................................................653

215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE.................................................................655

216 Configuring SRVCC.............................................................................................................657

217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover..............................659

218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.............................................662

219 Configuring CSFB.................................................................................................................664

220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability...........................................................666

221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA......................................669

222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Basedon Iur-g...........................................................................................................................................672

223 Configuring Extended BCCH..............................................................................................674

224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs............................................................................................676

225 Configuring Layered Paging...............................................................................................678



xxxi

226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching...........................................680

227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation................................682

228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)..........................................687

229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)............................690

230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).................694230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side......................................695230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.........................................701

231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS)............................................................................................................................................706

232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)...............................712232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock........................................................................713232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock............................................................................720



xxxii

1 Changes in the GBSS Feature ActivationGuide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.

13 (2012-09-17)

This is the thirteenth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover

Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover The example is changed.

117 Configuring TFO The background information is changed.

175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The activation procedure is changed.

201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA ServiceBased Handover

The prerequisite is changed.

Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

12 (2012-06-25)

This is the twelfth commercial release of V900R013C00.


l 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide


1

Content Description

80 Configuring Abis TransmissionOptimization

The example is changed.

43 Configuring Dynamic TransmitDiversity

The feature deactivation procedure is added.The verification procedure is changed.

134 Configuring Network Assisted CellChange (NACC)

The descriptions about the operations thataffect services are added.

87 Configuring MSC Pool The activation procedure is changed.

109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption FlowOptimization

The activation procedure is changed.The description that this feature and VAMOSare mutually exclusive is added.

169 Configuring A over IP The dependencies on other features ischanged.

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The descriptions about the dual-logical BTSsolution are added.

62 Configuring Soft-SynchronizedNetwork

The descriptions about IP over E1 arechanged.

61 Configuring IBCA The dependencies on hardware is changed.

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The activation procedure is changed.

48 Configuring Concentric Cell The activation procedure is changed.

89 Configuring Abis Bypass The background information is changed.

168 Configuring Abis IPHC The constraints for the sequence of deployingIPHC on the routers and BTSs are added.

133 Configuring NC2 The dependencies on other features ischanged.

48 Configuring Concentric Cell The verification procedure is changed.

196 Configuring Dual Carriers inDownlink

The verification procedure is changed.

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The dependencies on other features ischanged.

175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The dependencies on hardware is changed.

46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing The dependencies on hardware is changed.

51 Configuring Flex MAIO The dependencies on other features ischanged.

99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell The dependencies on hardware is changed.



2


11 (2012-03-30)This is the eleventh commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 10 (2012-02-27), this issue does not include any new topics.


Content Description

159 Configuring PS Service in Priority The verification procedure is changed.


10 (2012-02-27)This is the tenth commercial release of V900R013C00.



Content Description

54 Configuring VAMOS The dependencies on other features ischanged.


08 (2012-01-05)This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00.



Content Description

89 Configuring Abis Bypass The description that feature cannot be usedtogether with the feature GBFD-118611 AbisIP over E1/T1 is deleted.


07 (2011-11-30)This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00.



3



Content Description

227 Configuring Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation

The activation procedure is changed.


06 (2011-10-10)

This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.



Content Description

92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure areoptimized.


05 (2011-08-31)

This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.



Content Description

153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s CircuitSwitched Data

The dependencies on other features ischanged.

87 Configuring MSC Pool The context is updated.

92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure areoptimized.

227 Configuring Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation

The activation procedure is updated. A noteis added when the VNP is the huawei device.




4

04 (2011-07-11)This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.



Content Description

104 Configuring Local Multiple SignalingPoints

The activation procedure is updated.


03 (2011-05-30)This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.


l 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not incorporate any changes.


02 (2011-04-25)This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.


l 168 Configuring Abis IPHC

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue excludes the following topics.

l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression

01 (2011-03-30)This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), editorial changes are applied.

Draft B (2011-03-21)This is the Draft B release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue includes the following new topics:

l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue excludes the following topics.



5

l Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMAl Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMAl Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMAl Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMAl Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handoverl Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handover

Draft A (2011-01-31)

This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following newtopics:

l 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Controll 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharingl 54 Configuring VAMOSl 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identificationl 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solutionl 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blockingl 120 Configuring EVADl 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairingl 147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS Userl 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priorityl 182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancyl 194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmissionl Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMAl Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMAl 217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handoverl 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Releasel 219 Configuring CSFBl 223 Configuring Extended BCCHl Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMAl Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMAl Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handoverl Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handoverl 225 Configuring Layered Pagingl 227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigationl 229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not incorporate anychanges.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.



6

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide

GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the ConfigurationMethod column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this featuredoes not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional featurein the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.

Table 2-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 2-2 lists the GBSS optional features.

Table 2-1 GBSS Basic Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 SystemImprovement

None


None

GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance None


None

GBFD-110101 Frequency Band None

GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing OneBSC

4 Configuring Multi-bandSharing One BSC

GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band

None

GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) None

GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service(TS12)

5 Configuring EmergencyCall Service (TS12)

GBFD-110203 Point To Point ShortMessage Service (TS21,TS22)

None

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide


7


GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) None

GBFD-110205 Bearer Service None

GBFD-110301 Location Updating None

GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach 6 Configuring IMSI Detach

GBFD-110303 CS Paging None

GBFD-110304 Authentication None

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover 7 Configuring HUAWEI IHandover

GBFD-110607 Direct Retry 8 Configuring DirectedRetry

GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover None

GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection None

GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection None

GBFD-110501 Call Control None

GBFD-110502 Assignment and ImmediateAssignment

9 Configuring Assignmentand Immediate Assignment

GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment 10 Configuring CallReestablishment

GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

GBFD-111001 TRX Management None

GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management 12 Configuring Radio LinkManagement

GBFD-111003 Radio Common ChannelManagement

None

GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated ChannelManagement

None

GBFD-111005 Enhanced ChannelAssignment Algorithm

None

MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None

MRFD-210302 Performance Management None

MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None

MRFD-210304 Faulty Management None

MRFD-210305 Security Management None



8


MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None

MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USBDownload

None

GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS None

GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC None

GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function None

GBFD-111210 Integrated NetworkManagement Interface

None

GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language(MML)

None

GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm None

GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM None

MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC SoftwareManagement

None

MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB SoftwareManagement

13 Configuring BTSSoftware Management

GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of theBSC&BTS Software

None

MRFD-210403 License Management None

GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function None

GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet 14 Configuring CombinedCabinets and CabinetGroups of BTSs

GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group 14 Configuring CombinedCabinets and CabinetGroups of BTSs

GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/SubrackSharing

None

MRFD-210204 Star Topology None

MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None

MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None

GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC overIP

15 Configuring ConnectionInter BSC over IP

GBFD-111701 Board Switchover None

GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control None



9


GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance None

GBFD-111214 Operation & MaintenanceSystem One-Key Recovery

None

GBFD-111211 Reporting the TemperatureList of the BTS EquipmentRoom

None

MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None

MRFD-210102 Operate System SecurityManagement

None

MRFD-210103 Link aggregation 16 Configuring Linkaggregation

MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None

GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRXDue to PSU Failure

17 Configuring IntelligentShutdown of TRX Due toPSU Failure

GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control 18 Configuring Call-BasedFlow Control

GBFD-110901 Adjustment of AdaptiveTiming Advance

None

GBFD-110801 Processing of MeasurementReport

None

GBFD-110802 Pre-processing ofMeasurement Report

19 Configuring Pre-Processing of MeasurementReport

GBFD-111101 System Information Sending 20 Configuring SystemInformation Sending

GBFD-111102 Forced System InformationSending by OMC

None

GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-DigitMNC

None

GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight SavingTime

21 Configuring DaylightSaving Time

GBFD-113001 SDCCH DynamicAdjustment

22 Configuring SDCCHDynamic Adjustment

GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan 23 Configuring CellFrequency Scan

GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling TransportPoint)

24 Configuring SignalingTransport Point (STP)



10


GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling PointCode

25 Configuring 14-DigitSignaling Point Code

MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing None

MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing None

GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing None

GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at AbisInterface


GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception(DRX)

26 ConfiguringDiscontinuous Reception(DRX)

GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management 27 Configuring BTS PowerManagement

GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power ControlAlgorithm

28 Configuring EnhancedPower Control Algorithm

GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink MessageFilter

29 Configuring DTMFDownlink Message Filter

GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling 30 Configuring High SpeedSignaling

GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call 31 ConfiguringGuaranteed EmergencyCall

GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency 32 Configuring LicenseControl for Urgency

GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1Multiplexing

None

GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function None

GBFD-111803 A Interface CircuitManagement

None

GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process None

GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation RateMonitoring

None

GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission overPb Interface

33 Configuring the satellitetransmission on the Pbinterface

GBFD-119101 Packet Channel CombinationType

None

GBFD-119102 Packet System Information None



11


GBFD-119103 MS Types None

GBFD-119104 MAC Mode None

GBFD-119105 RLC Mode None

GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme None

GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode None

GBFD-119108 Network Operation ModeSupport

None

GBFD-119109 QoS(Best Effort) None

GBFD-119110 Access None

GBFD-119111 Assignment None

GBFD-119112 PS Paging None

GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update None

GBFD-119115 Power Control None

GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control None

GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface None

MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

34 Configuring Connectionwith TMA

MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 35 Configuring RemoteElectrical Tilt

MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 36 Configuring 2-AntennaReceive Diversity

MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock 37 Configuring BTS Clock

MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock None

GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis 38 Configuring Voice FaultDetection

GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis None

GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan None

GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing None

MRFD-210701 Documentation None

MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS CommonCPRI Interface(GBTS)

39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRIInterface (GBTS)



12


MRFD-210002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFUstar-connection with separateCPRI interface(GBTS)

None

Table 2-2 GBSS Optional Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name LicenseControl Item

LicenseConfiguredon...

ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115901 PBT(PowerBoostTechnology)

Multi-transceiverssupporting PBTtransmitResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 40 ConfiguringPBT

GBFD-115902 TransmitDiversity

Multi-transceiverssupportingdiversitytransmitResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 41 ConfiguringTransmitDiversity

GBFD-115903 4-Way ReceiverDiversity

Multi-transceiverssupporting 4-way receivediversityResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 42 Configuring4-WayReceiverDiversity

GBFD-118101 DynamicTransmitDiversity

Dynamic PBTResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 43 ConfiguringDynamicTransmitDiversity

GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT(Power BoostTechnology)

Dynamic PBTResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 44 ConfiguringDynamic PBT

GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGECoverage

EnhancedEDGECoverage(perTRX)

BSC6900 45 ConfiguringEnhancedEDGECoverage

GBFD-118106 Dynamic PowerSharing

Dynamic PowerSharing (perTRX)

BSC6900 46 ConfiguringDynamicPower Sharing



13



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-114001 Extended Cell Extended cellResource (perCell)

BSC6900 47 ConfiguringExtended Cell

GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell Concentric CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 48 ConfiguringConcentricCell

GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 49 ConfiguringCo-BCCH Cell

GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network

Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 50 ConfiguringEnhancedDual-BandNetwork

GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO Flex MAIOFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 51 ConfiguringFlex MAIO

GBFD-115801 ICC ICC(InferenceCounteractCombine)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 52 ConfiguringICC

GBFD-115821 EICC the EICCFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 53 ConfiguringEICC

GBFD-115830 VAMOS VAMOS (perTRX)

BSC6900 54 ConfiguringVAMOS

GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MSIdentification

Mute SAIC MSIdentification(per TRX)

BSC6900 55 ConfiguringMute SAIC MSIdentification

GBFD-115832 VAMOS CallDrop Solution

VAMOS CallDrop Solution(per TRX)

BSC6900 56 ConfiguringVAMOS CallDrop Solution

GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping (RFhopping,basebandhopping)

FrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 57 ConfiguringFrequencyHopping (RFhopping,basebandhopping)



14



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113702 BCCH CarrierFrequencyHopping

BCCH CarrierFrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 58 ConfiguringBCCH CarrierFrequencyHopping

GBFD-113703 AntennaFrequencyHopping

AntennaFrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 59 ConfiguringAntennaFrequencyHopping

GBFD-118001 BCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexing

BCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 60 ConfiguringBCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexing

GBFD-117002 IBCA(InterferenceBased ChannelAllocation)

IBCA Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 61 ConfiguringIBCA

GBFD-118201 Soft-SynchronizedNetwork

SoftSynchronization Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 62 ConfiguringSoft-SynchronizedNetwork

GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization

BTS GPSSynchronization Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 63 ConfiguringBTS GPSSynchronization

GBFD-118606 Clock over IP Clock over IPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118620 Clock over IPsupport 1588v2

Clock over IPsupport 1588V2Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118202 SynchronousEthernet

SynchronousEthernet(perTRX)

BSC6900 64 ConfiguringSynchronousEthernet

GBFD-117601 HUAWEI IIIPower ControlAlgorithm

Huawei IIIPower ControlAlgorithm(perTRX)

BSC6900 65 ConfiguringHUAWEI IIIPower ControlAlgorithm



15



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-114801 DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Downlink

DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)DownlinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 66 ConfiguringDiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Downlink

GBFD-114803 DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Uplink

DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX) UplinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 67 ConfiguringDiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Uplink

GBFD-111602 TRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown

DynamicShutdown TrxPA Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 68 ConfiguringTRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown

GBFD-111603 TRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown onTimeslot Level

Time slotIntelligentPowerOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 69 ConfiguringTRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown onTimeslot Level

GBFD-111604 IntelligentCombinerBypass

IntelligentCombinerBypassFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 70 ConfiguringIntelligentCombinerBypass

GBFD-111605 Active BackupPower Control

Active BackupPower ControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 71 ConfiguringActive BackupPower Control

GBFD-111606 PowerOptimizationBased onChannel Type

PowerOptimizationBased onChannel TypeFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 72 ConfiguringPowerOptimizationBased onChannel Type

GBFD-111608 PSU SmartControl

PSU SmartControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 73 ConfiguringPSU SmartControl



16



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-111609 EnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimization

EnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 74 ConfiguringEnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimization

GBFD-111610 Dynamic CellPower Off

Dynamic CellPower OffFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 75 ConfiguringDynamic CellPower Off

GBFD-111611 TRX WorkingVoltageAdjustment

TRX WorkingVoltageAdjustmentFunction(perTRX)

BSC6900 76 ConfiguringTRX WorkingVoltageAdjustment

GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligentVoltageRegulation

Multi-CarrierIntelligentVoltageFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 77 ConfiguringMulti-CarrierIntelligentVoltageAdjustment

GBFD-111613 WeatherAdaptive PowerManagement

WeatherAdaptive PowerManagement(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL andOML on A-bisInterface

16K LAPDFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117301 Flex Abis Flex AbisResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 78 ConfiguringFlex Abis

GBFD-117702 BTS LocalSwitch

BTS localswitchingResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 79 ConfiguringBTS LocalSwitch

GBFD-118401 AbisTransmissionOptimization

Transmissionoptimization onthe AbisinterfaceResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 80 ConfiguringAbisTransmissionOptimization



17



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-112013 AbisCongestionTrigger HRDistribution

AbisCongestionTrigger HRDistributionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 81 ConfiguringAbisCongestionTrigger HRDistribution

GBFD-116901 Flex Ater Flex AterFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 82 ConfiguringFlex Ater

GBFD-117701 BSC LocalSwitch

BSC LocalSwitchingResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 83 ConfiguringBSC LocalSwitch

GBFD-116902 AterCompressionTransmission

AterCompressionTransmissionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 84 ConfiguringAterCompressionTransmission

GBFD-115702 TrFO TrFO Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117801 Ring Topology Ring topologyFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 85 ConfiguringRing Topology

GBFD-113801 TRXCooperation

TRXCooperationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 86 ConfiguringTRXCooperation

GBFD-117401 MSC Pool MSC POOLFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 87 ConfiguringMSC Pool

GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool Gb FlexFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 88 Configuringthe SGSN Pool

GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass Abis BypassFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 89 ConfiguringAbis Bypass

GBFD-113721 Robust AirInterfaceSignalling

Robust AirInterfaceSignallingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 90 ConfiguringRobust AirInterfaceSignalling



18



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-117803 AbisTransmissionBackup

AbisTransmissionBackupFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 91 ConfiguringAbisTransmissionBackup

GBFD-113725 BSC NodeRedundancy

BSC NodeRedundancyFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 92 ConfiguringBSC NodeRedundancy

GBFD-113726 TC Pool TC PoolFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 93 ConfiguringTC Pool

GBFD-113728 OML Backup OML BackupFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 94 ConfiguringOML Backup

GBFD-113729 AdaptiveTransmissionLink Blocking

AdaptiveTransmissionLink Blocking(per TRX)

BSC6900 95 ConfiguringAdaptiveTransmissionLink Blocking

GBFD-510101 AutomaticFrequencyCorrection(AFC)

AFC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 96 ConfiguringAutomaticFrequencyCorrection(AFC)

GBFD-510102 Fast MoveHandover

High SpeedPBGT Switch

BSC6900 97 ConfiguringFast MoveHandover

GBFD-510103 Chain CellHandover

Chain CellHandoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 98 ConfiguringChain CellHandover

GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell Multi-site CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 99 ConfiguringMulti-Site Cell

GBFD-113901 SatelliteTransmissionover AbisInterface

Site SupportingSatelliteTransmissionResource (perSite)

BSC6900 100ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AbisInterface



19



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113902 SatelliteTransmissionover A Interface

SatelliteTransmissionover A InterfaceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 101ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AInterface

GBFD-113903 SatelliteTransmissionover AterInterface

SatelliteTransmissionover AterInterfaceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 102ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AterInterface

GBFD-113905 SatelliteTransmissionover GbInterface

SatelliteTransmissionover GbInterfaceFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 103ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover GbInterface

GBFD-115301 Local MultipleSignaling Points

Local MultipleSignaling PointsFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 104ConfiguringLocal MultipleSignalingPoints

GBFD-114701 Semi-PermanentConnection

SemipermanentConnectionResource (perLINK)

BSC6900 105ConfiguringSemi-PermanentConnection

GBFD-116401 End-to-End MSSignalingTracing

End-to-End MSSignalingTracingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 106ConfiguringEnd-to-EndMS SignalingTracing

GBFD-117602 Active PowerControl

Active PowerControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 107ConfiguringActive PowerControl

GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2CipheringAlgorithm

Encryption(A5/1,A5/2)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 108ConfiguringCiphering



20



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113503 A5/3 CipheringAlgorithm

Encryption(A5/3) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 108ConfiguringCiphering

GBFD-113521 A5/1EncryptionFlowOptimization

EnhancedEncryptionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 109ConfiguringA5/1EncryptionFlowOptimization

GBFD-113522 EncryptedNetworkManagement

EncryptedNetworkManagementFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113301 Enhanced FullRate

Enhanced FullRate Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 110ConfiguringEnhanced FullRate (EFR)

GBFD-113401 Half RateSpeech

Half RateResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 111ConfiguringHalf RateSpeech (HR)

GBFD-113402 DynamicAdjustmentBetween FR andHR

DynamicAdjustmentBetween FR andHR Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 112ConfiguringDynamicAdjustmentBetween FRand HR

GBFD-113601 Short MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)

Short MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 113.1ConfiguringShort MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)

GBFD-113602 Simplified CellBroadcast

Simplified CellBroadcastFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 113.2ConfiguringSimplified CellBroadcast

GBFD-115601 AutomaticLevel Control(ALC)

AutomaticLevel ControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 114ConfiguringAutomaticLevel Control(ALC)



21



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115602 Acoustic EchoCancellation(AEC)

Acoustic EchoCancellationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 115ConfiguringAcoustic EchoCancellation(AEC)

GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR)

AutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 116ConfiguringAutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR)

GBFD-115701 TFO TFO Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 117ConfiguringTFO

GBFD-115703 AutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC)

AutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 118ConfiguringAutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC)

GBFD-115704 EnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)

EnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 119ConfiguringEnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)

GBFD-115711 EVAD EVAD (perTRX)

BSC6900 120ConfiguringEVAD

GBFD-116801 Voice QualityIndex (VQI)

Voice QualityIndex (VQI)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 121ConfiguringVoice QualityIndex (VQI)

GBFD-117501 EnhancedMeasurementReport(EMR)

EnhancedMeasurementReport(EMR)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 122ConfiguringEnhancedMeasurementReport

GBFD-117101 BTS power liftfor handover

BTS power liftfor handoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 123ConfiguringBTS power liftfor handover



22



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 124ConfiguringDynamic HR/FR Adaptation

GBFD-115708 Um InterfaceSpeech FrameRepairing

Um InterfaceSpeech FrameRepairing (perTRX)

BSC6900 125ConfiguringUm InterfaceSpeech FrameRepairing

GBFD-115501 AMR FR AMR Resource(per TRX)

BSC6900 126ConfiguringAMR

GBFD-115502 AMR HR AMR HRFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115503 AMR PowerControl

AMR PowerControlFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HRDynamicAdjustment

AMR FR/HRDynamicAdjustmentFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 189ConfiguringHUAWEI IIHandover

GBFD-115505 AMR RadioLink Timer

AMR WirelessLink TimerFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115506 AMR CodingRate ThresholdAdaptiveAdjustment

AMR CodingRate ThresholdAdaptiveAdjustmentFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 127ConfiguringAMR CodingRateThresholdAdaptiveAdjustment

GBFD-115507 WB AMR WB AMRResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 128ConfiguringWB AMR

GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)

GBR QosFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 129ConfiguringStreaming QoS(GBR)



23



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119902 QoSARP&THP

QoS Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 130ConfiguringQoSARP&THP

GBFD-119904 PS ActivePackageManagement

PS ActiveQueueManagementFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 131ConfiguringPS ActivePackageManagement

GBFD-119905 PoC QoS PoC QoSFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 132ConfiguringPoC QoS

GBFD-119906 ConversationalQoS

ConversationalQos Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled CellReselection(NC2)

NC2 Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 133ConfiguringNC2

GBFD-116301 NetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

NACC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 134ConfiguringNetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI)

Packet SI Status(PSI) Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 134ConfiguringNetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

GBFD-114101 GPRS GPRS SoftwareFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 135ConfiguringGPRS

GBFD-510001 NetworkOperation ModeI

Networkoperation modeI Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 136ConfiguringNetworkOperationMode I

GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4 CS3/CS4Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 137ConfiguringCS-3/CS-4



24



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-114201 EGPRS EDGEResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 138ConfiguringEGPRS

GBFD-113101 PDCH DynamicAdjustment

DynamicAllocation ofPDCH Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR GB Over FRResource (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRSAccess

11-Bit EGPRSAccessFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 139Configuring11-Bit EGPRSAccess

GBFD-119202 PacketAssignmentTaken Over bythe BTS

PacketAssignmentTaken Over bythe BTSFunction (per64Kbps)


GBFD-119203 ExtendedUplink TBF

ExtendedUplink TBFFunction (per64Kbps)


GBFD-119204 DynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCoding

DynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCodingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 140ConfiguringDynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCoding

GBFD-119205 DynamicallyAdjusting theRRBPFrequency

DynamicallyAdjusting theRRBPFrequencyFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119302 Packet ChannelDispatching

Packet ChannelDispatchingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 141ConfiguringPacketChannelDispatching



25



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119303 Load Sharing Load SharingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119501 AdaptiveAdjustment ofUplink andDownlinkChannels

AdaptiveAdjustment ofUplink andDownlinkChannelsFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119305 BSS PagingCoordination

BSS PagingCoordinationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 142ConfiguringBSS PagingCoordination

GBFD-119502 PS Handover PS HandoverFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 143ConfiguringPS Handover

GBFD-119503 Early TBFEstablishment

Early TBFEstablishmentFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 144ConfiguringEarly TBFEstablishment

GBFD-119504 PS PowerControl

PS PowerControl (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 145ConfiguringPS PowerControl

GBFD-119505 PDCH DynamicAdjustmentwith TwoThresholds

Two ThresholdsPDCH DynamicAdjustment (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 146ConfiguringPDCHDynamicAdjustmentwith TwoThresholds

GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRSTime slotmultiplexingpriority

GPRS/EGPRSTime slotmultiplexingpriority (perTRX)

BSC6900 147ConfiguringTimeslotMultiplexingPriority forGPRS/EGPRSUser

GBFD-119401 ExtendedDynamicAllocation(EDA)

EDA Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 148ConfiguringEDA



26



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119402 MS HighMultislotClasses

Terminalmultislot classesFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 149ConfiguringMS HighMultislotClasses

GBFD-114151 DTM DTM Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 150ConfiguringDTM

GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM DTM HighMulti-slot class11 Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 151ConfiguringClass11 DTM

GBFD-119404 HMC DTM HMC DTMFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 152ConfiguringHMC DTM

GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/sCircuitSwitched Data

14.4KbpsCircuitSwitched DataFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 153Configuring14.4 kbit/sCircuitSwitched Data

GBFD-119406 High SpeedCircuitSwitched Data

High SpeedCircuitSwitched Data(per TRX)

BSC6900 154ConfiguringHigh SpeedCircuitSwitched Data

GBFD-116001 ResourceReservation

ChannelReservedFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 155ConfiguringResourceReservation

GBFD-115001 Enhanced MultiLevelPrecedence andPreemption(EMLPP)

eMLPPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 156ConfiguringEnhancedMulti LevelPrecedenceandPreemption(eMLPP)

GBFD-115002 Flow ControlBased on CellPriority

Flow ControlBased on CellPriorityFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 157ConfiguringFlow ControlBased on CellPriority



27



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115003 Flow controlbased on Userpriority

Flow controlbased on Userpriority (perTRX)

BSC6900 158ConfiguringFlow ControlBased on UserPriority

GBFD-119907 PS Service inPriority

PS Service inPriority (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 159ConfiguringPS Service inPriority

GBFD-118103 NetworkSupport SAIC

SAIC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 160ConfiguringNetworkSupport SAIC

GBFD-115401 NSS-BasedLCS (Cell ID +TA)

NSS-based LCS(Cell ID + TA)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 161ConfiguringNSS-basedLCS (cell ID +TA)

GBFD-115402 BSS-BasedLCS (Cell ID +TA)

LCS(CELL ID+TA) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 162ConfiguringBSS-basedLCS (cell ID +TA)

GBFD-115403 Simple ModeLCS(Cell ID +TA)

Simple ModeLCS (Cell ID +TA) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 163ConfiguringSimple ModeLCS (Cell ID +TA)

GBFD-115404 Lb Interface Lb Interface BSC6900 164ConfiguringLb Interface

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP Abis Over IPResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 165ConfiguringAbis over IP

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

Abis IP OverE1/T1 Resource(per TRX)

BSC6900 166ConfiguringAbis IP overE1/T1

GBFD-118604 Abis MUX Abis MUXFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 167ConfiguringAbis MUX



28



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC Abis IPHC (perTRX)

BSC6900 168ConfiguringAbis IPHC

GBFD-118602 A over IP A Over IPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 169Configuring Aover IP

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 A IP over E1Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 170Configuring AIP over E1/T1

GBFD-118610 UDP MUX forA Transmission

UDP MUX forA TransmissionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 171ConfiguringUDP MUX forATransmission

GBFD-118623 TDM/IP DualTransmissionover A Interface

TDM/IP DualTransmissionover A Interface(per TRX)

BSC6900 172ConfiguringTDM/IP DualTransmissionover AInterface

GBFD-118603 Gb over IP GB Over IPResource (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 173ConfiguringGb over IP

GBFD-118605 IP QOS IP QoS Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118607 IP PerformanceMonitor

IP PerformanceMonitorFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 174Configuring IPPerformanceMonitor

GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAMFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 175ConfiguringEthernet OAM

GBFD-510601 PICOAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

PICO SolutionPacket Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 176ConfiguringPICO/Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning



29



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510602 PICOSynchronization

PICO SolutionPacket Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 177ConfiguringPICOSynchronization

GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

PICO Dual-band Auto-planning(perTRX)

BSC6900 178ConfiguringPICO Dual-band Auto-planning

GBFD-510604 PICO USBEncryption

PICO USBEncryption(perTRX)

BSC6900 179ConfiguringPICO USBEncryption

GBFD-510605 PICO AccessControl List(ACL)

PICO AccessControl List(ACL)(perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-510606 PICO SleepingMode

PICO SleepingMode(per TRX)

BSC6900 180ConfiguringPICO SleepingMode

GBFD-510607 PICOAutomaticOptimization

PICOAutomaticOptimization(per TRX)

BSC6900 181ConfiguringPICOAutomaticOptimization

GBFD-510608 PICOTranceiverredundancy

PICOTranceiverRedundancy(per TRX)

BSC6900 182ConfiguringPICOTransceiverRedundancy

GBFD-510701 Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

Easy GSMSolution PacketFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 176ConfiguringPICO/Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning



30



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510702 Compact BTSAutomaticCapacityPlanning

Easy GSMSolution PacketFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 183ConfiguringCompact BTSAutomaticCapacityPlanning

GBFD-510704 Compact BTSAutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization

AutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization(per TRX)

BSC6900 184ConfiguringCompact BTSAutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization

GBFD-510705 Compact BTSTiming PowerOff

Compact BTSTiming PowerOff(per TRX)

BSC6900 185ConfiguringCompact BTSTiming PowerOff

GBFD-510706 Local UserManagement

Local UserManagement(per TRX)

BSC6900 186ConfiguringLocal UserManagement

GBFD-510301 Public VoiceGroup CallService

Basic VoiceGroup CallService(VGCS)Resource (perTRX)

BSC6900 187ConfiguringVGCS andVBS

GBFD-510303 Late GroupChannelAssignment

Late Group CallChannelAssignmentFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510305 Single ChannelGroup CallOriginating

Single ChannelGroup CallOriginatingFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510306 TalkerIdentification

TalkerIdentificationfunction (perTRX)




31



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510307 Group CallEMLPP

Group CallEMLPPFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510308 Fast Group CallSetup

Fast Group CallSetup Function(per TRX)


GBFD-510309 Group CallReliabilityEnhancing

Group CallReliabilityEnhancingFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510302 Public VoiceBroadcastService

Basic VoiceBroadcastService(VBS)Resource (perTRX)


GBFD-510304 Late BroadcastChannelAssignment

Late BroadcastChannelAssignmentFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay GSM-T Relay(per TRX)

BSC6900 188ConfiguringGSM-T Relay

GBFD-510501 HUAWEI IIHandover

HUAWEI IIHandoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 189ConfiguringHUAWEI IIHandover

GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment

Handover Re-establishmentFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 190ConfiguringHandover Re-establishment

GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing RAN SharingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 191ConfiguringBSS Sharing

GBFD-118702 MOCN SharedCell

MOCNCommon Cell(per TRX)

BSC6900 192ConfiguringMOCN SharedCell



32



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-118703 IMSI-BasedHandover

IMSI BasedHandover(perTRX)

BSC6900 193ConfiguringIMSI-BasedHandover

GBFD-118704 AbisIndependentTransmission

AbisIndependentTransmission(per TRX)

BSC6900 194ConfiguringAbisIndependentTransmission

GBFD-510801 MSRD MSRDFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 195ConfiguringMSRD

GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers inDownlink

Dual Carriers inDownlinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 196ConfiguringDual Carriersin Downlink

GBFD-510803 UplinkEGPRS2-A

UplinkEGPRS2-AResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 197Configuringthe EGPRS2-A

GBFD-510804 DownlinkEGPRS2-A

DownlinkEGPRS2-AResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 197Configuringthe EGPRS2-A

GBFD-510805 LatencyReduction

LatencyReductionFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 198ConfiguringLatencyReduction

GBFD-510901 2G/3GNeighboringCell AutomaticOptimization

2G/3GNeighboringCell AutomaticOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-511002 Access ControlClass(ACC)

Access ControlClass(per TRX)

BSC6900 199ConfiguringAccess ControlClass



33



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMAInteroperability

IntersystemHandover &ReselectionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 200ConfiguringGSM/WCDMAInteroperability

GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMAService BasedHandover

IntersystemHandover due toServiceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 201ConfiguringGSM/WCDMAService BasedHandover

GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMALoad BasedHandover

IntersystemHandover due toLoad Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 202ConfiguringGSM/WCDMA LoadBasedHandover

GBFD-114323 2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState

2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 203Configuring2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState

GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMAReselection at2G CS CallRelease

Fast 3GReselection at2G Cs CallReleaseFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 204Configuringthe FastWCDMAReselection at2G CS CallRelease

GBFD-511101 Load BasedHandoverEnhancementon Iur-g

HandoverBased on Loadon Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 205ConfiguringLoad BasedHandoverEnhancementon Iur-g



34



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511102 NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gbetween GSMand WCDMA

NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 206ConfiguringNACC(NetworkAssisted CellChange)ProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gbetween GSMand WCDMA

GBFD-511103 GSM andWCDMA LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

BSC LoadBalancingBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 207ConfiguringGSM andWCDMA LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

GBFD-511104 GSM andWCDMATraffic SteeringBased on Iur-g

BSC ServiceDistributionBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 208ConfiguringGSM andWCDMATrafficSteering Basedon Iur-g

GBFD-511301 Cell ReselectionBetween GSMand LTE

Cell ReselectionBetween GSMand LTE(perTRX)

BSC6900 209ConfiguringCellReselectionBetween GSMand LTE

GBFD-511302 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage(per TRX)

BSC6900 210ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage

GBFD-511303 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality(perTRX)

BSC6900 211ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality



35



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511304 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load(per TRX)

BSC6900 212ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load

GBFD-511305 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon ModePriority

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon ModePriority (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-511306 GSM/LTEService BasedPS Handover

GSM/LTEService BasedPS Handover(per TRX)

BSC6900 213ConfiguringGSM/LTEService BasedPS Handover

GBFD-511307 eNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE

eNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE(per TRX)

BSC6900 214ConfiguringeNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE

GBFD-511308 eNACCBetween GSMand LTE

eNACCBetween GSMand LTE (perTRX)

BSC6900 215ConfiguringeNACCBetween GSMand LTE

GBFD-511309 SRVCC SRVCC (perTRX)

BSC6900 216ConfiguringSRVCC

GBFD-511310 MultiTechnologyNeighbour CellBasedHandover

MultiTechnologyNeighbour CellBasedHandover (perTRX)

BSC6900 217ConfiguringMultiTechnologyNeighbour CellBasedHandover

GBFD-511312 Fast LTEReselection at2G CS CallRelease

Fast LTEReselection atGSM CS CallRelease (perTRX)

BSC6900 218ConfiguringFast LTEReselection at2G CS CallRelease



36



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511313 CSFB CSFB (perTRX)

BSC6900 219ConfiguringCSFB

GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMAInteroperability

IntersystemHandover &ReselectionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 220ConfiguringGSM/TD-SCDMAInteroperability

GBFD-511401 Iur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA

Iur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA(perTRX)

BSC6900 221ConfiguringIur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA

GBFD-511402 Radio ResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g

Radio ResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g(per TRX)

BSC6900 222ConfiguringRadioResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g

GBFD-511403 ExtendedBCCH

ExtendedBCCH (perTRX)

BSC6900 223ConfiguringExtendedBCCH

GBFD-511501 MultipleCCCHs

Multiple CCCH(per TRX)

BSC6900 224ConfiguringMultipleCCCHs

GBFD-511502 Layered Paging Layered Paging(per TRX)

BSC6900 225ConfiguringLayeredPaging

GBFD-511201 2G/3G Co-Transmissionby TDMSwitching

2G/3G Co-Transmissionby TDMSwitchingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 226Configuring2G/3G Co-Transmissionby TDMSwitching



37



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurementData Interfacefor Navigation

RadioMeasurementData Interfacefor Navigation(per TRX)

BSC6900 227ConfiguringRadioMeasurementData Interfacefor Navigation

MRFD-211801 Multi-modeDynamic PowerSharing(GSM)

GSM andUMTSDynamic PowerSharing

BSC6900 228ConfiguringMulti-modeDynamicPower Sharing(GSM)

MRFD-211802 GSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing(GSM)

GSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing(PerSite)

BSC6900 229ConfiguringGSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing(GSM)

MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionon BS side(GBTS)

None None 230ConfiguringIP-BasedMulti-modeCo-Transmissionon BS side(GBTS)

MRFD-211504 TDM-BasedMulti-mode Co-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(GBTS)

None None 231ConfiguringTDM-BasedMulti-modeCo-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(GBTS)

MRFD-211505 Bandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmission(GBTS)

Bandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmission(per Site)

BSC6900 None



38



ConfigurationMethod

MRFD-211601 Multi-mode BSCommonReferenceClock(GBTS)

None None 232ConfiguringMulti-ModeBS CommonReferenceClock (GBTS)

MRFD-211703 2.0MHz CentralFrequency pointseparationbetween GSMand UMTSmode(GSM)

2.0MHz CentralFrequency pointseparationbetween GSMand UMTSmode(Per Site)

BSC6900 None



39

3 Activating the GSM License

This describes how to activate the GSM license.

Prerequisitesl The BSC6900 is in service.l The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900.l The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP

\License

Procedure

Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the fileinformation.

If... Then...

The file information comply with the information of thefile that you apply for,

Go to Step 2.

The file information does not comply with theinformation of the file that you apply for,

Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrackis offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online.

Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License.

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 3 Activating the GSM License


40

4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

Prerequisitesl Dependencies on Hardware

– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature does not depend on other features.l License

– This feature is not under license control.l Other Prerequisites

– The TRXs configured for the BTS supports the corresponding frequency bands.

Contextl Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks:

– GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band– GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band

l The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.l Huawei GSM BSS does not support the co-existence of a GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH

cell and a GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell.l Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850

band. Huawei GSM BSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.

The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is used as anexample.

Procedurel Activation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, setFreq. Band to GSM900.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC


41

3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network plan.

2. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform thedialing test. The call is normal.

3. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform thedialing test. The call is normal.

4. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell.Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the center ofthe 1800 MHz cell. Then, check the channel status in the monitoring window. TheMS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is kept alive.

NOTE

l On the LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specifiedcell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status.

l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor ChannelStatus window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the callhanded to the 1800 MHz cell.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Freq. Band to

GSM900.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value Active status.

Expected result: The value of Active status is DEACTIVATED.3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is DCS1800.

----End

Example//Activating Multi-band Sharing One BSC

//Adding a GSM cellADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="Cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=11, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;//Activating the GSM cellACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

//Adding a DCS cellADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=11, CI=12, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;//Activating the DCS cellACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;

//Verifying Multi-band Sharing One BSCSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;//Deactivating NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC


42

5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202Emergency Call Service (TS12).




– This feature is not under license control.

ContextThe emergency call service takes precedence over other services during network access even ifthe MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to enable the emergencycall service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to NO(No).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query whether the

emergency call service is enabled.Expected result: The value of Emergent Call Disable is No.

2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to theDPC of the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set CellID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.

3. Use the MS to make an emergency call. After the call is put through, you can hear avoice prompt.

4. Check the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface.Expected result: An EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the A interface.This indicates that the emergency call service is enabled.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)


43

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to disable the emergency

call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to YES(Yes).

----End

Example//Activating Emergency Call Service (TS12)SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=NO;

//Deactivating Emergency Call Service (TS12)SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=YES;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)


44

6 Configuring IMSI Detach

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302IMSI Detach.





Context

After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The networkdoes not send any paging message to this MS.

The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the systeminformation type 3 message.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, setAttach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of

Attach-detach Allowed.Expected result: The value of Attach-detach Allowed is YES(Yes).

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to TracingMessages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the DPC ofthe cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.

3. After the A interface message tracing window is displayed, power off the MS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach


45

Expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the Ainterface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set

Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating IMSI DetachSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=YES;

//Deactivating IMSI DetachSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach


46

7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601HUAWEI I Handover.


This feature does not depend on the hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features

This feature does not depend on other features.l License

This feature is not under license control.l Other Prerequisites

Neighboring 2G cells have been configured. For details, see Configuring the NeighboringCell Relations.

ContextHandover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimizethe network performance by balancing the traffic between cells.

Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover,enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergencyhandover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drophandover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normalhandover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentriccell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover


47

CAUTIONl After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is

applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to theold cell.

l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equalto the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.

l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cellhandover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specifiedduration.

l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the sameunderlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and LoadHO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handoverof a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell on the network.

l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered betweenthe enhanced dual-band network cells.

l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all theneighboring micro cells.

l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quicklevel drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edgehandover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-bandnetwork handover, load handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover,better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Current HOControl Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with Current HOControl Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN with Current HOControl Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO with Current HO ControlAlgorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MAXConsecutive HO Times as required.

6. Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCHparticipates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCCCH with PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLOTHEXT with Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw set toYES(Yes).

7. Activating the quick handover algorithm



48

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setNeighboring Cell Type as required, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes), andthen set Chain Neighbour Cell Type as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with QuickHandover Enable set to YES(Yes).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, setHandover Direction Forecast Enable to YES(Yes), and then set Quick MoveSpeed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick HandoverDown Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover PunishTime, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MRNumber, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore MeasurementReport Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift HandoverStatistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate values.

NOTE

If a neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, you need to run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick HandoverPunish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value.

d. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT aftersetting UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and ULFrequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reportedby the base station.

8. Activating the TA handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with TA HOAllowed set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting TAThreshold as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after settingPenalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.

9. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with BQ HOAllowed set to YES(Yes).

b. Optional: For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEMG after setting UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.Threshold as required.

c. Optional: For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLAMRQUL after setting UL Qual. Limit for AMRFR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DLQual. Limit for AMR HR as required.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after settingPenalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.

10. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC withRx_Level_Drop HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO UL RX_LEVThreshold set to an appropriate value.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting FilterParameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, Filter Parameter



49

A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter Parameter A7, FilterParameter A8, and Filter Parameter B as required.

11. Activating the interference handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with InterferenceHO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Intracell HO Allowed and Inter-layer HOThreshold to appropriate values.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL with Inter-layer HO Threshold set to anappropriate value.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after settingForbidden time after MAX Times as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting AdjacentCell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL after settingInterfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, andInterfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.

12. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with No Dl Mr.HOAllowed set to YES(Yes) and No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit, Cons.No DlMr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HOLast Time set to appropriate values.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after settingFilter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual as required.

13. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUOType to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/ExtraProperty and Same Group Cell Index Type to appropriate values, and set SameGroup Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of SameGroup Cell Index Type.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA after settingLoad HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner CellSerious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious OverloadThreshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN ofUL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL SubcellLower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, OutgoingOL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, StepLength of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.

14. Activating the load handover algorithm



50

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with LoadHandover Support set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold and EdgeHO DL RX_LEV Threshold set to appropriate values.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting SystemFlux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover LoadAccept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and LoadHO Step Level as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Load handover LoadAccept Threshold as required. If this cell is configured with external 3G neighboringcells, you need to run the MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL after setting Loadhandover Load Accept Threshold.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting AdjacentCell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

15. Activating the edge handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Edge HOAllowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HOUL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, andHandover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time set to appropriate values.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting AdjacentCell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

16. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after settingLayer of The Cell as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with MS FastMoving HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to anappropriate value.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MS Fast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-movingValid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS FastMoving HO as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell, Inter-layerHO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast MovingHO.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting AdjacentCell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

17. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Level HOAllowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an appropriatevalue.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after settingLayer of The Cell and Cell Priority.



51

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and CellPriority as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Layer HOWatch Time, Layer HO Valid Time, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HOHysteresis.

18. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with PBGT HOAllowed set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after settingLayer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Layer of The Cell andCell Priority.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setNeighboring Cell Type, set Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell toHOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I), and then set PBGT WatchTime, PBGT Valid Time, and PBGT HO Threshold as required.

19. Activating the AMR handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setIntracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2FHO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO LastTime as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate AdjustAllow set to YES(Yes).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion set to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag setto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD after setting AMRTCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold asrequired.

20. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setSDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HOThreshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time asrequired.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL after setting Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of

Current HO Control Algorithm.Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm isHOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).



52

2. Start the BSSAP message tracing task by referring to Tracing Messages on the AInterface.Expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handover Performed message with thehandover cause value of better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality,traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength.– In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.– In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or

downlink-quality.– In the case of the rapid level drop handover algorithm, the handover cause value

is uplink-strength.– In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-

quality or downlink-quality.– In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause

value is uplink-quality.– In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value

is better-cell or traffic.– In the case of the load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.– In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or

downlink-strength.– In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is

better-cell.– In the case of the inter-layer handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of the PBGT handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of the AMR handover, the handover cause value is downlink-

quality.– In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,

distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, ordownlink-strength.

l Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating HUAWEI I handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;//Activating the quick handover algorithmMOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES, CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QUICKHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1,



53

TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=36671;//Activating the TA handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TAHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TALIMIT=125;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;//Activating the bad quality handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, BQHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;//Activating rapid level drop handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FLTPARAA1=10, FLTPARAA2=10, FLTPARAA3=10, FLTPARAA4=10, FLTPARAA5=10, FLTPARAA6=10, FLTPARAA7=10, FLTPARAA8=10, FLTPARAB=0;//Activating the interference handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=2;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0 ,RXQUAL1=35;//Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithmSET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8, NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithmMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;//Activating the load handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES, DLEDGETHRES=20, HOTHRES=25;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90, LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;//Activating the edge handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithmSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2, QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;



54

//Activating the inter-layer handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4;//Activating the PBGT handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTHOEN=YES;SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTMARGIN=68, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;//Activating the AMR handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25, INHOH2FTH=12;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-0&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25, INHOH2FTH=12;SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;



55

8 Configuring Directed Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607Directed Retry.





ContextDirected retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSCinitiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is availableor the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.

This feature helps reduce call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, therebyincreasing the access success rate. It can also balance the traffic load between different cells.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setDirected Retry to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCBASIC. Set Directed RetryLoad Access Threshold based on the actual load of candidate neighboring cells.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set CurrentHO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900MML commandSET GCELLHOCTRL if Current HO CTRL Algorithm inSource Cell is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). In this step, setMin Power Level For Directed Retry based on the actual receive level ofneighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD G2GNCELL if CurrentHO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cellis set to HOALGORITHM2(Handoveralgorithm II). In this step, set cells 0 and 1 to neighboring cells, and set Inter-cell

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry


56

HO Hysteresis and Directed Retry Handover Level Range for cell 1 to appropriatevalues.

4. Optional: Set the number of cells for directed retry and the priorities of these cells.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT with DRD HOTarget Cell Selection Optimized set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD with Max. Num. ofHO Attempts set to an appropriate value.

l Verification Procedure1. Block the TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCHs in cell 0 are available

for use.2. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis

interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface andTracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3. Make a call in cell 0.4. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the

Abis interface in cells 0 and 1.Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. TheHandover Detection message is traced on the Abis interface in cell 1. The AssignmentComplete message is traced on the A interface in cell 1.

5. Open the Single User CS Trace page. You can see that the value of the ucHoCauseinformation element (IE) in the Handover Triggered Indication message is directed-retry.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA with Directed

Retry set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating directed retrySET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES;SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;

//Deactivating directed retrySET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry


57

9 Configuring Assignment and ImmediateAssignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502Assignment and Immediate Assignment.


– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature does not depend on other features.

l License


Context

Assignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normalimmediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter.Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following sectiondescribes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCHImmediate Assignment to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure

1. When an MS camps on a cell and no MS is processing services in the cell, block theSDCCHs and disable the SDCCH dynamic adjustment function.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block anSDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH andAdministrative State to Lock(Lock). To block more SDCCHs, run the SETGTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to block.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment


58

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to disableSDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic AllocationAllowed to NO(No).

2. Use the MS to initiate a call.3. Check the messages traced over the Abis interface.

On the Abis interface message tracing window, the CHANNEL ACTIVATIONmessage is traced. The field Channel Mode and Type indicates that a TCH, instead ofan SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, themessages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced.

4. After the verification, unblock the SDCCH and enable SDCCH dynamic adjustmentimmediately.– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to unblock

an SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH andAdministrative State to Unlock(Unlock). To unblock more SDCCHs, run theSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to unblock.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to enableSDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic AllocationAllowed to YES(Yes).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH

Immediate Assignment to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Assignment and Immediate AssignmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES;

//Deactivating Assignment and Immediate AssignmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment


59

10 Configuring Call Reestablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503Call Reestablishment.





– The MSC supports this feature.

ContextWhen an MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedurecan be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CallReestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, setTREESTABLISH to an appropriate value. If this parameter is set to a great value,the radio resources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results innetwork congestion.

l Verification Procedure1. Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs, where, TRX1 is the BCCH

TRX and TRX2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX2 requires an independent variableattenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals ofTRX2.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment


60

2. Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX1 so that theMS uses a TCH on TRX2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX1. For details abouthow to block and unblock TCHs, see SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT

3. Attenuate the signals of TRX2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or otherdevices, check the signaling traced on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor thechannel status of the test cell.Expected result:– As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call

on TRX1 of the test cell.– The signaling messages shown in Figure 10-1 are traced.



61

Figure 10-1 Signaling messages




62

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CallReestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes).

----End

Example//Activating Call ReestablishmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO;SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000;

//Deactivating Call ReestablishmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=YES;



63

11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501TCH Re-assignment.





l License


ContextTCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MSreturns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assigned to the MS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set AllowReassign to YES(Yes).


1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, setFrequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band).

NOTE

This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If theparameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band asthe originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.

2. Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX.Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block a TCH.In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the TCH to be blocked andAdministrative State to Lock(Lock).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment


64

3. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCHTRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example,remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX.Expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on the non-BCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX,because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow

Reassign to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating TCH Re-assignmentSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES;

//Verifying TCH Re-assignmentSET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSFREQBAND=Same_Band;

//Deactivating TCH Re-assignmentSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment


65

12 Configuring Radio Link Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedureof the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature donot need to be configured.





ContextThe procedures involved in radio link management are as follows:

l Link establishment indicationl Link establishment requestl Link release indicationl Link release requestl Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged model Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged model Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged model Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged model Link error indication

The link error indication procedure enables the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occuron the radio link layer.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set parameters for aspecified cell. In this step, set T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/Full Rate, T200

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management


66

FACCH/Half Rate, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish,N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/HalfRate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query call control timer

parameters for the corresponding cell.Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding commandare the same as the values set in the activation procedure.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace and display the Abis Interface CS Trace dialogbox. On the Basic tab page, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page,select RLM under Message Type, select TRX from the Filter Flag drop-down list,and then specify the TRX ID.

3. Use an MS to make a call and query the channel occupied by the call. Remove thebattery of the MS during the call.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for theMS. Set Handover Scope to FREE(Free).

5. Check messages traced in step 2. Then, check whether the interval between the DATAREQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with the values ofN200 and T200 set in the activation procedure. The DATA REQ message containsthe Handover command message, which is transmitted over the Um interface.Expected result: The interval of the messages for the full-rate channel is basically thesame as the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/FullRate. The interval of the messages for the half-rate channel is basically the same asthe product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/Half Rate.



----End

Example//Activating the link error indication procedure of Radio Link ManagementSET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1, T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1;//Verifying the link error indication procedure of Radio Link ManagementLST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management


67

13 Configuring BTS Software Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check functionintroduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functionsinvolved in the feature do not need to be configured.


– Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



– The M2000 supports this feature.

ContextWhen software and a configuration file are transmitted between the M2000 and the BSC, thesoftware and file may be damaged because of unstable transmission links or malicious attacks.The integrity check function can check the correctness and integrity of software andconfiguration files.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn on the BTS softwareintegrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature VerificationSwitch to ON(On).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSDIGSIGN to check whether the BTS

software integrity protection switch has been turned on.Expected result: Software Digital Signature Verification Switch is set to ON(On).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management


68

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn off the BTS softwareintegrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature VerificationSwitch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=ON;//Verification procedure DSP BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;//Deactivation procedure SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management


69

14 Configuring Combined Cabinets andCabinet Groups of BTSs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.


– The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode areinstalled.

– The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set.

NOTEFor details about how to install cabinets, connect cables, and set DIP switches, see the relevantProduct Description and Installation Guide contained in customer documents.

– The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinetinstallation mode.

– The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, andBTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode.



l License


Contextl Combined cabinets

– Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. Inthis case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged.

– The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet notconfigured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares theDTMU with the main cabinet.

– Figure 14-1 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide

14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups ofBTSs


70

Figure 14-1 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

l Cabinet groups

– Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve asone BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet ofeach cabinet group is the main cabinet.

– A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet groupthat provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinetgroups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet groupcan be configured with one or two DTMUs.

– Figure 14-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.

Figure 14-2 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

l The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups.

Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groupssupport 72 TRXs.

l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinetgroup mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The maincabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised ofcabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. Thecorresponding cabinet numbers are as follows:– Main cabinet group: 0 and 1– Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4– Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7




71

Procedurel Activation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.

NOTE

In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are asfollows:

l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1.

l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards.

NOTE

If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling

point relation.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic

GPRS attributes of 2G cells.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical

TRXs to the channels on TRX boards11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device

attributes.12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle

timeslots.

NOTE

During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 11, and step 12.

13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antennaboard.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT toconfigure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS.

15. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify thefrequency band attributes of BTS antennas.

16. Repeat Step 2 through Step 15 to add and configure the extension cabinet andinformation about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinetnumbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.

NOTE

If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is notrequired. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.

17. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection.– If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 18.– If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 19.




72

18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection linksfrom the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition,set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..

19. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and add theconnection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or theBSC.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection

links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type toBSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connectionlinks from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or the BSC– If the extension cabinet groups connect to the main cabinet group, set Dest

Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to theBTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTSIndex, and Dest Parent BTS Port No..

– If the extension cabinet groups connect to the BSC, set Dest Node Type toBSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..

20. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.l Verification procedure

1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page isdisplayed.

2. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. Thecorresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel.

3. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, checkthe board status on BTS Device Panel.– If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinet-

group mode.– If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions

provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Add a BTSADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3012_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, BTSDESC="3012", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM;//Add a cabinetADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012;//Add TRX boardsADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0;//Add GSM cellsADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell;//Add cell frequenciesADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2;




73

//Add cell signaling point relationADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=153;//Bind cells to the BTSADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9;//Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cellsSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;//Add TRXs for a cellADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=1,ISMAINBCCH=YES;//Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boardsADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;//Set TRX device attributesSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8;//Add the extension cabinet of the main cabinet groupADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=1, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012;//Add the main cabinet of the extension cabinet groupADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=3, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012;//Configure idle timeslotsSET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20;//Add the antenna boardADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A;//Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTSSET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=1,AORB=B;//Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSCADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=1;//Add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet groupADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=9, FPN=1;//activate a BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;//Deactivation procedure//Deactivate a BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Delete a BTSRMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;




74

15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC overIP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621Connection Inter BSC over IP.


– If the Abis or A interface uses IP transmission, switches can be used to interconnect theIP interface boards of two BSCs. If the Abis or A interface does not use IP transmission,a pair of IP interface boards need to be configured for each BSC.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature does not depend on other features.

l License– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate

the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2Overview of Feature Activation Guide.

ContextIP-based inter-BSC interconnection enables operators to use IP networks to interconnect theBSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. Inter-BSC interconnection isused for exchanging information between BSCs in scenarios such as an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network or interference-based channel allocation (IBCA). Only signaling can beexchanged over inter-BSC interconnection.


1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD at the current BSC to adda pair of IP interface boards.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP at the current BSC to add a deviceIP address.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP at the current BSC to add a port IPaddress.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP


75

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT at the current BSC to add an IP route.In this step, set Destination IP address to the port IP address of the peer board (thatis, the port IP address of the IP interface board at the peer BSC).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC at the current BSC to add an OSP.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC at the current BSC to add a DSP.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE at the current BSC to add an M3UA

local entity.8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE at the current BSC to add an M3UA

destination entity.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS at the current BSC to add an M3UA

link set.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT at the current BSC to add an M3UA

route.11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK at the current BSC to add an

SCTP link.12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK at the current BSC to add an M3UA

link. After this command is executed, the configuration of links at the current BSC iscomplete.

13. Repeat Step 1 through Step 12 to configure the links at the peer BSC.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC, and verify that the value of SCCPDSP state is Accessible.

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP

//(Optional) Adding a pair of IP interface boardsADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=0;ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=1;

//Adding a device IP address for the current BSC ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.10.10.216";

//Adding a port IP address for the current BSCADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=1, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="2.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Adding an IP route for the current BSCADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="10.10.10.217", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="2.2.2.1", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="IPRT";

//Adding an OSP for the current BSCADD OPC: NAME="BSC216", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'A1;

//Adding a DSP for the current BSCADD N7DPC: NAME="BSC217", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'B1, DPCT=IUR_G, BEARTYPE=M3UA;



76

//Adding an M3UA local entityADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC216";

//Adding an M3UA destination entityADD M3DE: DENO=98, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC217";

//Adding an M3UA link setADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=98, NAME="T0217";

//Adding an M3UA routeADD M3RT: DENO=98, SIGLKSX=1, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217";

//Adding an SCTP linkADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, DSCP=48, LOCPN=60000, LOCIP1="10.10.10.216", PEERIP1="10.10.10.217", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;

//Adding an M3UA linkADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217";



77

16 Configuring Link aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103Link aggregation.


– This feature is only supported on BSC6900.– This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E.


l License– This feature is not under license control.

l Requirements for Transmission Networking– In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration can't support IP PM.– This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3)

networking.l Requirements for Other NEs and Transmission Devices from Other Vendors

– This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches andbase stations.

ContextThis feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provideshigh bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports,and improves the transmission reliability.


– Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to aboard.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet linkaggregation group. In this step, set the Trunk group work mode to

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Link aggregation


78

LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode toSTATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set theAggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does notsupport the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a specifiedphysical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group.

NOTEIf the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this stepuntil all the required physical ports are configured.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP to add an IP address to anEthernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network(VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want toadd.

– Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to anEthernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet linkaggregation group.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a member port toan Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added,run this command for each port you want to add.


– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernetlink aggregation group is available.

NOTE

Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernetlink aggregation group is available.

2. Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IPaddress for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP addressof the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communicationbetween the local and peer ends.

NOTE

Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packetloss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.

– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

1. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet linkaggregation group is available.

2. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a memberport of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.


– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.



79

1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP to remove an IP addressfrom an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operationsas prompted.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet linkaggregation group.

– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

1. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP to remove a device IP address.2. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet link

aggregation group.

----End

Example//Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123";ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101;ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102;ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";

/Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB//Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet portADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation groupADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0, PRI=255, FLAG=YES;//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900//Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groupsRMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0;RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2;

//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB

//Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet portRMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24";

//Removing an Ethernet link aggregation groupRMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;



80

17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown ofTRX Due to PSU Failure

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.


– The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, andBTS3900A



ContextIf a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiersof some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normaloperation of the BTS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the parameters related toTRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step.– Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).– Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements.– Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR.– GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related

to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site.Expected result:


17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSUFailure


81

– The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 isYES.

– The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that setin step 1.

– The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.2. Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot

supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of

all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE.Expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others isDisabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient powersupply.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).Expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSUfaults occur.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG, SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR;//Verification procedureLST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;


17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSUFailure


82

18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003Call-Based Flow Control.





ContextIn cases of emergencies or disasters, a large number of fixed telephones or cell phones fromexternal networks request to reach the emergency or disaster center. This causes considerableincrease in the mobile terminated services and also causes heavy traffic in the system. Thisfeature identifies mobile originated call (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) bydifferent flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs from the effects of flow control. It also allowstelecom operators to decide whether to discard signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control,thereby keeping the system load within a normal level.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MTC AccessCPU Rate to be greater than SHARE IN CPU RATE but less than MOC AccessCPU Rate.

NOTE

When the value of MOC Access CPU Rate is greater than that of MTC Access CPU Rate,the call-based flow control is triggered, and flow control is preferentially implemented onMTCs.

l Verification Procedure1. Retrieve the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests (MOC) and the counter

L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests (MTC) on the M2000.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control


83

Expected result: The value of the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests(MOC) is smaller than that of the counter L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests(MTC).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MOC Access

CPU Rate to a value that is smaller than or equal to the value of MTC Access CPURate.

----End

Example//Activating Call-Based Flow ControlSET BSCFCPARA: SHAREINCPURATE=50, MOCACCESSCPURATE=51, MTCACCESSCPURATE=52;//Deactivating Call-Based Flow ControlSET BSCFCPARA: MOCACCESSCPURATE=52, MTCACCESSCPURATE=51;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control


84

19 Configuring Pre-Processing ofMeasurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.


– The BTS must support this function.



l License


ContextThe function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filtermeasurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. In thismanner, the BSC does not need to process the MRs, reducing the load of the BSC. The CPUload of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced, and the signalingon the Abis interface is decreased, therefore minimizing the risks of Abis transmissioncongestion.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to setMR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing and set Transfer Original MR,Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing CS

Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.2. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.3. Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report


85

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set

MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing.

----End

Example//Activating Pre-Processing of Measurement ReportSET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, PRIMMESPPT=NO, BSMSPWRLEV=YES, MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;

//Deactivating Pre-Processing of Measurement ReportSET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BSC_Preprocessing;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report


86

20 Configuring System InformationSending

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101System Information Sending.





l License


ContextSystem information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, includingnetwork identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and networkfunction parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select andaccess a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the networkand well cooperate with the network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure neighboring 3Gcells based on the network plan.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable outgoing inter-RAT handovers and incoming inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT OutBSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending


87

1. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messageson the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages onthe Abis interface.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send systeminformation. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) and the cell index to anappropriate value.

3. Check the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface.Expected result: The value of si2-quarter-ind in the System Information Type 3message is 1. This indicates that the feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support

Sent 2QUATER to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating System Information SendingSET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=2047, NBR3GNCELLID=5100;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;

//Deactivating System Information SendingSET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending


88

21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight SavingTime (DST).





Context

With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybridconfiguration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in acertain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain dayof a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from orends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.


1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES(Yes), set StartType, StartTime, EndType, EndTime, and AdjustMethod asrequired.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES.2. As it was daylight saving time, the time with sign DST in MML, Alarms, and log

reports shows the feature has been active, such as 2011-07-01 15:50:25 DST.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time


89

Example//Activating Daylight Saving TimeSET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST, SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN, ET=03&00&00, TO=60;//Deactivating Daylight Saving TimeSET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time


90

22 Configuring SDCCH DynamicAdjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.





l License


l Others

– This feature does not need to be configured when PCU is inner.

– This feature needs to be configured when PCU is outer.

Context

When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to accessthe network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, some TCHs need to be convertedto SDCCHs. When TCHs are not sufficient enough to meet requirements of channel conversion,dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network.

When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are convertedback to TCHs to increase system capacity.

When SDCCHs are insufficient, channels are converted to SDCCHs in the following sequence:TCHs on the BCCH frequency band, TCHs not on the BCCH frequency band, and dynamicPDCHs.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment


91

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set bothSDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion toSDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setIdle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, TCH MinimumRecovery Time, and Num of TSs Convertible to SDCCHs per TRX to appropriatevalues.

NOTE

When TCHs on the BCCH frequency band are insufficient, set Dynamically Adjust Inter-Freq Band SDCCH to YES(Yes) as required.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MaximumRate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of DynamicChannel Conversion to appropriate values.


NOTE

Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.

As all the channels are occlusive except BCCH.

1. The value of Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 is not smaller than the number of configuredSDCCH channel, and make a CS call in the cell.Expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MaximumRate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of DynamicChannel Conversion to 0.

3. Perform PS services in the cell.Expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs.

4. Make another CS call in the cell.Expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH.

5. Enable the cell to remain in the idle state for two minutes. The minimum time ofSDCCHs convert back to TCHs is 120 seconds.Expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set bothSDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion toSDCCH Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating SDCCH Dynamic AdjustmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=60;SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2;//Deactivating SDCCH Dynamic AdjustmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment


92

23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401Cell Frequency Scan.





Context

CAUTIONCell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features:l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH.l Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed.l The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLFREQSCAN command toconfigure cell frequency scan.

NOTENo restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when thecommands are processed in batches. In addition, 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds insequence. Therefore, Duration minute cannot be set to a very small value. Otherwise, the executionof the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan


93

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLFREQSCAN command to query

the information of cell frequency scan.l Deactivation Procedure

1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Configure cell frequency scanSET GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STRTM=17&06&07, TIME=5, FREQBAND=E-GSM900, FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023;

//Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0LST GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan


94

24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point(STP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806Signaling Transport Point (STP).


– The XPUa board is configured.l Dependencies on Other Features


– This feature is not under license control.l Others

– The OPC is configured.

– The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured.

– The CN supports this feature.

Context

According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directlyor through STP.

To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.


– TDM transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating SignalingPoint (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)


95

signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 link set. Inthis step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 link to thelink set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link setindex set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 3.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to MTP3, andAdjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 3.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.

– IP transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,DSP index to the DSP index set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA signaling linkset. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in4.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In thisstep, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and setSubrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., andSCTP link No. set in 2.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 5.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to M3UA, andAdjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.



96

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 5.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state is

set to Accessible.l Deactivation Procedure


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.

In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link setindex to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.

In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link setindex to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 linkfrom the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling linkset index set in 3.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS to remove the MTP3 linkset. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index setin 3.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of theMGW.

– IP transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. Inthis step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set indexto the Signalling link set index set in 5.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in9.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In

this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set indexto the Signalling link set index set in 5.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK to remove the M3UA link fromthe link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link setindex set in 5.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS to remove the M3UA signalinglink set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. setin 4.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in4.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of theMGW.



97

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK to remove the SCTP link.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE to remove the M3UA local entity.

----End

Example//Activating Signaling Transport Point (STP)//TDM transmissionADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=YES;ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS";ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, SRN=1, SN=0, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1";ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT";ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=NO;ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT";ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;

//IP transmissionADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC";ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=YES;ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW";ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS";ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, NAME="MGWLNK";ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT";ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=NO;ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE";ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT";//Verifying Signaling Transport Point (STP)DSP N7DPC:;//Deactivating Signaling Transport Point (STP)//TDM transmissionRMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1;RMV MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1;RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;RMV MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1;RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1;RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;

//IP transmissionRMV M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1;RMV M3DE: DENO=2;RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;RMV M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1;RMV M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1;RMV M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;RMV M3DE: DENO=1;RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;



98

RMV SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100;RMV M3LE: LENO=1;



99

25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling PointCode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-11180214-Digit Signaling Point Code.





l License


l Others

– The CN supports this feature.

ContextHuawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consistsof three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network islocated; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone;sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.


1. At a newly deployed site, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add anOriginating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2. If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand RMV OPC to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code


100

NOTE

A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit

format.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all configured OSPs.

----End

Example//Activating 14-Digit Signaling Point CodeADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'2cc7;//Verifying 14-Digit Signaling Point CodeLST OPC:;//Deactivating 14-Digit Signaling Point CodeRMV OPC: SPX=1;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code


101

26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception(DRX)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802Discontinuous Reception (DRX).


– This feature does not depend on the hardware.



l License


l Other Prerequisites

– The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.

Context

DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS.

Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channelin the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the systemonly on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by poweringoff certain hardware. This also saves power.

The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, setCCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on thePaging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)


102

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send thesystem message to the test cell.

2. Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell.3. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for

the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE control-channel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reservedfor AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is0, the system message is correct.

4. Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is"M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully.

5. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IEpaging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained inthe paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case,the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.

NOTE"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimalformat.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2, BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD;//Verification procedureSND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)


103

27 Configuring BTS Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601BTS Power Management.





ContextBTS power management enables the BTS to allocate load dynamically based on the actual powersituation, thereby prolonging the working time of the BTS.

Power management is applicable to the following scenarios:

l No mains supply– Soft shutdown: The BTS automatically blocks all TCH TRXs except the BCCH TRX.– Hard shutdown: When the battery capacity drops to a predefined threshold value, the

BTS automatically shuts down all TRXs.l Unfavorable operating environment

– When the temperature inside a BTS cabinet exceeds a predefined threshold value, theBTS shuts down PAs for some TRXs.

– When critical faults occur on a TRX, for example, the VSWR value far exceeds thelimit, the BTS shuts down the TRX.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set BoardParameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and power managementparameters to appropriate values.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management


104

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled.Expected result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is set to YES(YES), andpower management parameters are set based on configurations.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activating BTS Power ManagementSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE;//Verifying BTS Power ManagementLST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0;//Deactivating BTS Power ManagementSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management


105

28 Configuring Enhanced Power ControlAlgorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.





l License



– The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-levelcounters can be retrieved on the M2000.

Context

Enhanced power control algorithm refers to HUAWEI II power control algorithm.

Power control is a process in which the BSS controls MS or BTS transmit power. Withoutaffecting the speech quality, power control reduces the interference in the entire network anddecreases power consumption. Power control mainly applies to the network with tight frequencyreuse, high traffic volume, or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can beseparately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm


106

to YES(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei II power control parameters or set them totheir default values.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH to improve theeffect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in basebandfrequency hopping. In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Control and HandoverCMP CON Sw to YES(Yes).


1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of theBCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies whilethe frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channelfrequencies.

2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.

Table 28-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI II power control

Measurement Unit Counter Name

Measurement of PowerControl Messages in MRper Cell

Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)

Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)

Mean Strength of Downlink Signals

Mean Strength of Uplink Signals

Mean Quality of Downlink Signals

Mean Quality of Uplink Signals

Interference BandMeasurement per TRX

Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1





Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1





Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1




107





Receive QualityMeasurement per TRX

Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)



108









Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL

PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to NO(No).4. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.5. Check the counters for one hour and save them.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL

PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to YES(Yes).7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).



109

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowedto YES(Yes) for cell 0 and cell 1.

9. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.10. Check the counters for one hour and save them.11. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 10 and Step 5.

Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained inStep 10 is smaller than that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to interferenceband, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger thanthat obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of acounter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than that obtained inStep 5.


----End

Example//Activating HUAWEI II Power Control AlgorithmSET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR2;SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MRCOMPREG=YES, AMRMRCOMPREG=YES;



110

29 Configuring DTMF Downlink MessageFilter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525DTMF Downlink Message Filter.





– A over TDM transmission is used.

Context

CAUTIONAfter this feature is configured, the processing capability of DSPs is decreased by about 10%.

This feature shields the downlink DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the Ainterface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF signals.By shielding downlink DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMFSignaling Processing Allowed set to OPEN(Open).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter


111

1. Use an MS to make a call to another MS. During the call, press a key on either MS.Expected result: The peer end cannot hear clear DTMF tones but silence.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMFSignaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).

3. Repeat Step 1.Expected result: The peer end hears clear DTMF tones.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMF

Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example//Activating DTMF downlink message filterSET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=OPEN;

//Deactivating DTMF downlink message filterSET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=CLOSE;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter


112

30 Configuring High Speed Signaling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201High Speed Signaling.



– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP orGBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l Dependency on License

– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activatethe license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2Overview of Feature Activation Guide.

l Other prerequisites

– The MSC supports high-speed signaling.

– TDM transmission is applied over the A interface.

– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.

– The OPC and DPC are configured.

Context

This feature is characterized by:

l High capacityThe BSC is not limited by the capacity of a single signaling point when narrowbandsignaling is used. This feature not only meets the requirements for signaling link bandwidthof large capacity processing capability but also saves operators' signaling resources andsimplifies network topology.

l Flexible bandwidth configurationThe high-speed signaling link bandwidth is N x 64 kbit/s. Where, N ranges from 1 to 31.Operators can flexibly configure the high-speed signaling link bandwidth based on thetraffic volume to reduce the transmission cost.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 30 Configuring High Speed Signaling


113

l Short delayHigh-speed signaling links carry signaling data using multiple timeslots. This reduces thetransmission delay of signaling data over the A interface especially in off-peak hours,reducing the call setup duration.

Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmissiondoes not use high-speed signaling links.

WARNINGReconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900.Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning.The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link

set.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK. In this step, set Link Bear

Type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).NOTE

In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set AterMask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information aboutthe MTP3 signaling link.

Expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK. In this step, set Signallinglink set index and Signalling link code.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT. In this step, set DSP index andSignalling link set index.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS. In this step, set Signalling linkset index.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 to remove an E1/T1 on the Ainterface.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Configuring an E1/T1 over the A InterfaceADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,



114

BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0;//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link setADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="123";//Configuring an MTP3 signaling linkADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, MTP2LNKN=1, LKTATE=2M, NAME="123";//Adding an MTP3 signaling routeADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="111";

/*Deactivation procedure*///Removing an MTP3 signaling linkRMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1;//Removing an MTP3 signaling routeRMV MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0;//Removing an MTP3 signaling link setRMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0;//Removing an E1/T1 over the A interfaceRMV AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1;



115

31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521Guaranteed Emergency Call.





l License


l Others Prerequisites

– The MSC is enabled with the eMLPP function.

Context

The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to increase the setup success rate ofemergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disasterrelief activities.

This feature has the following characteristics:

l Emergency calls are preferentially assigned full-rate TCHs (TCHFs) in the immediateassignment phase.

l The system reserves TCHFs for the MSs making emergency calls.

l The MSs making emergency calls preempt the channels occupied by low-priority calls.

Without this feature, the TCHs occupied by emergency calls can be preempted by high-prioritycalls. After this feature is enabled, emergency calls can preempt the TCHs occupied by othercalls when there is no idle TCH. Emergency calls, however, cannot preempt the TCHs occupiedby other emergency calls.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call


116


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value ofPriority of Emergency Call. If the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, thisfeature is not activated.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority ofEmergency Call to an appropriate value, for example, 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setMax Channel Num Reserved for EC to an appropriate value, for example, 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set EmergencyCall Preemption Permitted to ON(On).

5. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, setTimer of Reserved TCH for EMC to an appropriate value, for example, 15.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of

Priority of Emergency Call.

Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value

of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC.

Expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of

Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.

Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON(On).4. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to query the value

of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC.

Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is 15.5. Use an MS to make an emergency call.

All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle TCHs.There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call andthe channel resources of the call can be preempted.

Expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted.6. The MS makes the emergency call successfully. An SDCCH is assigned in the

immediate assignment phase and a TCHF is assigned in the assignment phase.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority ofEmergency Call to 15.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value ofPriority of Emergency Call.

Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency

Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of

Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.



117

Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating Guaranteed Emergency CallLST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=1;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RSVCHMFORECNUM=2;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=ON;SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=15;//Deactivating Guaranteed Emergency CallSET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=15;LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=OFF;LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;



118

32 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001License Control for Urgency.





Context

CAUTIONThis feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, forexample, in a disaster.This function can be performed only three times for each R version and it is valid only in sevendays since it is enabled.After this feature is enabled, the network capacity can reach the maximum supported by thehardware.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set GraceProtection Period Switch to ON(ON).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to check the resource items of

the license.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency


119

The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of

Grace Protection Period Switch State.Expected result: In the returned result, there are the settings of Remaining GraceProtection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days, and Grace ProtectionPeriod Switch State is set to ON.

3. On the next day (later than 1 a.m.) after this feature is enabled, check whether theevent EVT-22812 Operation of Maximum License Capacity is reported by the alarmconsole of BSC6900.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace

Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*/SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=ON;/*Deactivation procedure*/SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency


120

33 Configuring the satellite transmission onthe Pb interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.





l License


Contextl If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the

installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on thePb interface.

l The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer thanthat over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmittedby these two types of cell, it takes longer time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for aresponse message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellite-capable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the averagedownlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number ofdownlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time required for the RLC sending windowto overflow is prolonged.


1. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1. In this step, set TransmissionMode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface


121

NOTE

The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128.

After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link automaticallyswitches to the satellite transmission mode accordingly.

2. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.– Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell.– Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite

transmission for the cell.– Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 15.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.2. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission

for the cell.3. Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell.4. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to verify that the state of the cell is

UNBLOCK.5. Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally performed.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Disable satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

2. Configure terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.– Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.– Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrial

transmission for the cell.– Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set T3168 to 500ms(500ms), T3192 to 500ms(500ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 10.

----End

Example/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/ADD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, PCUNO=0, SPCIC=0, TNMODE=SATEL;/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/MOD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, TNMODE=SATEL, OPMODE=MODRANGETS, STARTTS=4, ENDTS=32, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface


122

34 Configuring Connection with TMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

Prerequisitesl Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA

– The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA.

– The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA.

– The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA.

– The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board.l Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA

– The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA.

– A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support theconfiguration of the smart TMA.

– A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support theconfiguration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode.

– An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device numberof a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site.




Context

Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optionalcomponent of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a longfeeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage islimited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius,reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments.

If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters basedon the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Connection with TMA


123

Procedurel Activation Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data aftersetting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, AntennaTributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

l Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches

for antenna ports.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA.4. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML

command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT.5. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML

command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA.l Verification Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-relatedparameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor,Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigateto Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of thedisplayed dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, selectDCM(Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag,and then specify the TRX ID.

3. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform adialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by theBTS.Expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message isnormal.

l Verification Procedure for a Smart TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the

antenna devices are functioning.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart

TMA.l Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. Inthis step:– Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO).– Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).

l Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.

----End

Example//Activating a common TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3,



124

RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10;//Activating a smart TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON, THRESHOLDTYPERET=UER_SELF_DEFINE, OverCurAlmThdRET=600, OverCurClrThdRET=300, UnderCurAlmThdRET=50, UnderCurClrThdRET=100;STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang", PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2;//Verifying a common TMALST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3;SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;//Verifying a smart TMASTR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;//Deactivating a common TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO;//Deactivating a smart TMA RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;



125

35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.


– The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly.– The power switch for an RET antenna is turned on. The overcurrent and undercurrent

thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas installedon a board.



Context

With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimizenetwork performance.

Procedurel The following operations are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:

Activation Procedure

1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, setRET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALDOver Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, andRET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antennascanning task.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.

NOTEFor vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt


126

4. Optional: To modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit, run theBSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT.

5. Optional: To modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, run theBSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA.

6. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD BTSRETTILT.

Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RETantenna scanning task has been started.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the dynamic informationon an RET antenna.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT to query thedynamic information on an RET antenna subunit.

Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.l The following operations are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier:

Activation Procedure

1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, setRET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALDOver Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, andRET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antennascanning task.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.

NOTEFor vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET BTSRETANTTILT.

Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RETantenna scanning task has been started.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt rangeof the RET antenna and it's current tilt angle.

Deactivation Procedure


----End

Examplel The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:

//Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,



127

CTRLPORTSN=0;ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, TILT=50;MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, BEARING=50, MODELNO="1";MOD BTSRETTILT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;//Verification procedureSTR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0;DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;

l The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier://Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0;ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";SET BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=DEVICENO, BTSIDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;//Verification procedureSTR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0;DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;



128

36 Configuring 2-Antenna ReceiveDiversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Antenna Receive Diversity.


– The BTS3006C or BTS3002E is configured with the DATM board.– The BTS3012 or BTS3012AE is configured with the DATU board.– The BTS3900, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L that uses the DRFU is configured with the

GATM board.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextTwo-antenna receive diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by usingtwo antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combinedafter processing.

The following procedures assume that two-antenna receive diversity is configured for a DRFUof a BTS3900.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity


129

NOTE

Based on the type and number of TRX boards, the receiving and sending mode can be set toSGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Single Feeder[1TX + 2RX]), DOUBLE_ANTENNA(DoubleFeeder[2TX + 2RX]), or DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[1TX + 2RX])to meet site requirements.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the receiving and

sending mode of the TRX board.Expected result: DRFU Sending Receiving Mode is set to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX + 2RX]).


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLE_ANTENNA;//Verifying 2-Antenna Receive DiversityLST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity


130

37 Configuring BTS Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501BTS Clock.


– When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.

– When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.



Contextl The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization.

The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internalframe synchronization.

l The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock,synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition,the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable referenceclock source for the BTS.


Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock

Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).Synchronization with the GPS clock1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to

TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).Synchronization with the BITS clock

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock


131

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type toEXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration

of the system clock.Expected result:

If... Then...

The clock information corresponds tothe clock type configured

The configuration is successful.

The clock information is inconsistentwith the configuration

The configuration is unsuccessful.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the

BTS. Here,– Set List Object to SITE(By Site).– Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box.Expected result: Clock attribute is Available.


----End

Example//Activation procedure//Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock.SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;//Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clockSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;//Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clockSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;//Verification procedureLST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock


132

38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301Voice Fault Detection.



– The crosstalk detection function cannot be used together with the featuresGBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-115701TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118601Abis over IP.

– The one-way audio detection function cannot be used together with the featuresGBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.


l Other Prerequisites– The crosstalk detection function can be enabled only in A over TDM transmission mode.

ContextThis feature provides alarm mechanisms for crosstalk and one-way audio. The BSC records thenumber of times of crosstalk and one-way audio occurrences periodically. If the number exceedsa specified threshold, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.

Procedurel Activation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection

– Ater or Abis over TDM

1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way MuteAlarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, One-Way Audio LogType to LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC, and Force HO Upon SpeechProblem to an appropriate value.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection


133

2. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute DetectClass1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, Mute Detect Class2Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class2 TRAU Frameto 2, and Period of Mute Detect Class2 to 4.

NOTE

If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified inExceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified inPeriod of Mute Detect Class1, one-way audio may have occurred. Then the one-way audiodetection class 2 starts. If no test speech frame is received in the measurement period specifiedin Period of Mute Detect Class2, the one-way audio is confirmed, and the BSC records a one-way audio occurrence. If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the thresholdspecified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified inSpeech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If ForceHO Upon Speech Problem is set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell toavoid voice faults when detecting one-way audio class 2.

– A, Ater, or Abis over IP

1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way MuteAlarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, and One-Way Audio LogType to IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC.

2. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute DetectClass1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, and SpeechChannel Alarm Threshold to an appropriate value.

NOTE

If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified inExceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified inPeriod of Mute Detect Class1, the BSC records a one-way audio occurrence. If the number oftimes of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel AlarmThreshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number of times of one-way audiooccurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm ClearanceThreshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared.

l Activation procedure for Crosstalk Detection

1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way MuteAlarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10, SpeechChannel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, Force HO Upon Speech Problem toan appropriate value, and do not set Cross Call Detect Time Threshold to 255.



134

NOTE

The Cross Call Detect Time Threshold specifies the tolerance duration for crosstalk. If the durationof crosstalk exceeds the threshold specified in Cross Call Detect Time Threshold, the BSC recordsa crosstalk occurrence. If the number of times of crosstalk occurrences exceeds the threshold specifiedin Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way MuteAlarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the numberof times of crosstalk occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel AlarmClearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm ReportingPeriod, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force HO Upon Speech Problem isset to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to avoid voice faults when detectingcrosstalk.

l Verification Procedure1. When crosstalk or one-way audio occurs, view Dynamic Alarms.

Expected result: The BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm exists with FailureType being Crosstalk or One-way Audio.

NOTE

If the number of times of actual crosstalk or one-way audio occurrences exceeds the thresholdspecified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold, the LMT reports the BSS Internal VoiceChannel Alarm.

l Deactivation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection– Ater or Abis over TDM

1. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute DetectClass1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE) and Mute Detect Class2 Switch toDISABLE(DISABLE).

– A, Ater, or Abis over IP

1. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute DetectClass1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE).

l Deactivation procedure for Crosstalk Detection1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Cross Call Detect

Time Threshold to 255.

----End

Example//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM transmission mode by running the following commands:1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6, MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-1&IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE, MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25, MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=ENABLE, DETECTFRAMEPERIOD=2, MUTECHECKPEIROD=4;//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP transmission mode by running the following commands:1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6, MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0EV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-1&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE, MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25;//Activating Crosstalk Detection by running the following commands:1. SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=64, SpeechAlmPeriod=12,



135

SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;2. SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA: CROCALCHKSW=ON;//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM transmission mode by running the following command:SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE, MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=DISABLE;//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP transmission mode by running the following command:SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE;//Deactivating Crosstalk Detection by running the following command:SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=255;



136

39 Configuring Multi-mode BS CommonCPRI Interface (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).


– As Figure 39-1 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed.

Figure 39-1 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE

As Figure 39-1 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connectedto one CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.



l License



39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(GBTS)


137

ContextIn the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use thesame site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and therefore separateoptical cables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system,which increases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cablesis reduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables andreduce the expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBUand RF modules.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE to configure the switchingrelation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on theGTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU.

NOTEThe switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations

of the SFP ports.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE to remove the SFP portswitching relation.

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0, SWITCHPORTNO=3;//Verification procedureLST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;//Deactivation procedureRMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;


39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(GBTS)


138

40 Configuring PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901Power Boost Technology (PBT).


– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E donot support PBT currently.

– When a double-transceiver TRX board uses PBT, only channel 0 is configured with onecarrier.




ContextPBT aims to increase the downlink transmit power to extend network coverage. In PBT mode,only one carrier is configured for a double-transceiver TRX board. A signal transmitted fromthe carrier is modulated and then converted into a radio frequency (RF) signal, known as DAconversion. Then, the RF signal is transmitted to two power amplifiers (PAs). After beingamplified, the two signals are combined and output. The transmit power is increased becausethe two signals are aligned accurately. This increases downlink signal strength. PBT is applicableto wide coverage areas.

The following procedure illustrates how to configure PBT for the DTRU on a BTS3012.

Figure 40-1 shows connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 40 Configuring PBT


139

Figure 40-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toPBT(PBT).

NOTE

In PBT mode, the single carrier must be configured on channel 0.



140

l Verification Procedure1. Optional: Use an MS to make a call.

NOTEThis operation is required if the test TRX does not carry a BCCH carrier. This operation can beskipped if the test TRX carries a BCCH carrier.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toNONE(None). Then, use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test basestation, and record the measurement result.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toPBT(PBT).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to check the value of SendMode.Expected result: Send Mode is set to PBT(PBT).

5. Use the optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and recordthe measurement result.

6. Compare the measurement result obtained in step 2 with that obtained in step 5.Expected result: The power measured in step 5 is greater than that measured in step2. This indicates that PBT has taken effect.


----End

Example//Activation procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;//Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0;



141

41 Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902Transmit Diversity (TD).


– BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU),BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support TD currently.

– When a double-transceiver TRX board uses TD, only channel 0 is configured with onecarrier.

– The cell where TD is applied has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.




Context

In TD mode, one baseband signal is transmitted through two radio frequency (RF) channels.This prevents signal levels from changing dramatically and also prevents signal quality fromdropping since there is no correlation between two antennas. As an effect of this, service qualityfor users that move at a low speed is improved and the downlink network coverage is expanded.To sum up, TD improves the downlink signal quality and meets the requirements of high signalquality in some special areas.

The following procedure illustrates how to configure TD for the DRRU on a GSM DBS3900.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity


142

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to

NONE(None).2. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record

the measurement result.Expected result: The power is 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).

5. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of channel B, and record themeasurement result.Expected result: The power is not 0, which indicates that TD has taken effect.


----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;//Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity


143

42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1159034-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals tooptimize the quality of uplink signals.


– The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900 (RRU3004/RRU3008),BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L(GRFU), and BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not supportthis feature.

– A DTRU board that adopts the 4-way receive diversity technique can be configuredwith only one carrier.

– The cell has two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas.



l License


Context

The 4-way receive diversity enables signals from four directions to be transmitted to a singlecarrier simultaneously. The carrier then combines these 4-way receive signals to improve uplinkreceive sensitivity. In this way, this technique optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet thedemanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplinkperformance in wide network coverage scenarios.

The following procedures assume that the 4-way receive diversity is configured for twoassociated DRFUs of a BTS3900.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity


144

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+4RX]).

NOTE

The two associated DRFUs must be configured simultaneously.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set ReceiveMode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).

NOTE

l If the carrier of a double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 0, Send Mode can beset to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(TransmitDiversity), DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT).

l If the carrier of the double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 1, Send Mode mustbe set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the

TRX board.Expected result: Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four DiversityReceiver).


----End

Example//Activating 4-Way Receiver DiversitySET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY;//Verifying 4-Way Receiver DiversityLST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity


145

43 Configuring Dynamic TransmitDiversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101Dynamic Transmit Diversity.


– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), DBS3900,BTS3900(DRFU/MRFUe), BTS3900A(DRFU/MRFUe) and BTS3900L(DRFU/MRFUe) support the feature dynamic transmit diversity currently.

– The test cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.


– The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

– This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hoppingand GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

– This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when multi-carrier RRUdynamic TX diversity is used: GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA powersharing)

l License


Context

In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the transmit diversity technique is applied to two carriers'same timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After thesetimeslots are released, they stop using the transmit diversity technique to transmit signals. Thedynamic transmit diversity technique makes full use of idle timeslots, improves signal qualityin rural areas, and strikes a balance between system capacity and network coverage bydynamically adjusting network coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation inthe live network.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity


146

The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic transmit diversity techniquefor the DTRU on a BTS3012.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setDynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity) for the TRXs in the overlaid subcell.

NOTE

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes ofTRXs in the overlaid subcell.

l If the dynamic transmit diversity technique is to be applied to a DTRU, two carriers mustbe configured and the technique must not be applied to the BCCH carrier.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set AssignOptimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and thosecarriers whose send mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).

CAUTIONSetting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion inthe cell where the TRX is located.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.

CAUTIONSetting Administrative State for the TCH or TCHF of main BCCH carrier to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion in the cell where the TRX is located.

4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,and use an MS to make an emergency call.

NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of theSDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-levelthreshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplinkreceive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-levelthreshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channelto the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.

Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same



147

timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in theSubordinate Channel state.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV, in this step, set Send Mode for

TRXs in the overlaid subcell to other send modes supported by the TRXs.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC, in this step, set

Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY;SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY;//Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;//Deactivation procedure SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=NOCOMB;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=NOTSUPPORT;



148

44 Configuring Dynamic PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102Dynamic PBT.


– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E donot support the feature Dynamic PBT currently.


– The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

l License


Context

In dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) mode, the PBT is applied to two carriers' sametimeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these timeslotsare released, they stop using the PBT to transmit signals. The dynamic PBT makes full use ofidle timeslots, improves signal quality for some areas with poor signal quality, and strikes abalance between system capacity and network coverage by dynamically adjusting networkcoverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in the live network.

Moreover, the dynamic PBT increases the handover success rate for MSs located at the edge ofa cell, and therefore improves the performance of a concentric cell where the Co-BCCH functionis enabled.

The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic PBT for the DTRU on aBTS3012.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT


149

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setDynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDPBT(DPBT) for TRXs in the overlaid subcell.

NOTE

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes ofTRXs in the overlaid subcell.

l If the dynamic PBT is to be applied to a radio frequency (RF) module, two carriers mustbe configured for the module and the dynamic PBT must not be applied to the BCCHcarrier.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign

Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set

Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and thosecarriers whose send mode is not DPBT(DPBT).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.

4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,and use an MS to make an emergency call.

NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of theSDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-levelthreshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplinkreceive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-levelthreshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channelto the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.

Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' sametimeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in theSubordinate Channel state.


----End

Example//Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT;//Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT


150

45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage.


Enhanced EDGE coverage is supported by the following BTSs and TRXs.– Double-transceiver series base stations

DTRUs and DTRMs of BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, andBTS3002E.

– 3900 series base stationsDBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900E.

NOTE

Neither QTRUs nor BTS3900B supports enhanced EDGE coverage.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

– If the DTRU is used, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-118102Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology) and GBFD-118101 Dynamic TransmitDiversity.



Contextl The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK

modulation mode.l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through

the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring thatdata services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature isapplicable to both the DTRU and QTRU.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage


151

l After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK PowerAttenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically.

l Table 45-1 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature forthe BTS3012 series.

Table 45-1 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature(BTS3012 series)

Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE CoverageIs Supported

The TRX module is DTRU (type B). Supported.

The power of two carriers configured onthe DTRU is 60 W, and the static powerlevels of both carriers are equal to 0.

Supported.

The TRX module is DTRU (type A) orQTRU.

Not supported.

A single DTRU module is configured withone carrier.

Not supported.

When a single DTRU module is configuredwith two carriers, the intelligent shutdownfunction is performed on one of thecarriers.

Not supported.

The two carriers configured on the DTRUmodule belong to two cells.

Not supported.

When one of the carriers is configured asthe BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier ofthe DTRU module is supported or not.

Not supported.

The transmit mode of the DTRU isconfigured as PBT (excluding dynamicPBT) or transmit diversity (excludingdynamic transmit diversity).

Not supported.

A channel of the DTRU is faulty. Not supported.

l Table 45-2 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for theBTS3900E.

Table 45-2 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature(BTS3900E)

Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE CoverageIs Supported

Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH Supported.

RanSharing Supported.



152


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED(Allowed), set EnableEnhanced EDGE Coverage to ALLOWED(Allowed).

NOTE

l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH isdetermined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowedparameter.

l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude of themaximum power in 8PSK modulation mode.

l Verification procedure1. Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order

Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and thendetermine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature. For details, see theM2000 product documentation.

NOTE

The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRXcontain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme andNumber of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of ncan be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-

Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED(NotAllowed).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED, EDGEPWREN=ALLOWED;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;



153

46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106Dynamic Power Sharing.

Prerequisitesl Dependency on Hardware

– Only multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.

– Only multi-carrier RF modules in dual-transmit mode support dual-PA power sharing.

l Dependency on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.

– The single-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the followingfeatures: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation),GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001Extended Cell.

– For the radio frequency unit (RFU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be usedtogether with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power AmplifierIntelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,baseband hopping), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, andGBFD-114001 Extended Cell.

– For the remote radio unit (RRU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be usedtogether with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power AmplifierIntelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity,GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, andGBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

– If the Dynamic Power Sharing feature has been enabled in a cell, you do not need toenable the GBFD-117602 Active Power Control feature because the Dynamic PowerSharing feature contains all of its functions.

– If power control parameters are not properly set, there will be a high percentage of highsignal levels. When this occurs, network performance will not be improved even ifDynamic Power Sharing is enabled and the number of peak clipping attempts isminimized. Therefore, set downlink power control parameters to appropriate values and

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing


154

enable the GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink functionbefore enabling Dynamic Power Sharing.



l Other Prerequisites– Dependency on frequency bands and cells: All activated TRXs of a multi-transceiver

unit must work on the same frequency band and must be configured in the same cell.In the case of a concentric cell, all activated TRXs must be configured in the underlaidor overlaid subcell.

– Restriction on PS channel allocation: If the remaining power of the timeslot of a PSchannel is lower than the maximum transmit power of the TRX, the channel cannot beconverted into a packet data channel (PDCH).

– Restriction on cell configuration: To avoid cell congestion and enhance networkperformance after this feature is enabled, the Channel Assign Allow for InsuffPower parameter must be set to YES(Yes) and the recommended value of the C/IEstimate Value parameter is 10 dB.

– Restriction on TRX configuration: The percentage of stand-alone dedicated controlchannels (SDCCHs) and PDCHs must be less than or equal to 30% the total number ofchannels in a cell. It is recommended that static PDCHs be configured on BCCH carriersand only one SDCCH be configured on each timeslot.

ContextWith this feature, the transmit power of a TRX can be improved if the transmit power of theTRX cannot meet the actual requirements. In addition, if the total transmit power of TRXs in aTRX group exceeds the transmit power threshold of the TRX group, calls with different powerrequirements are grouped into different timeslots to ensure that the total power of the sametimeslot on the TRX group does not exceed the transmit power threshold. Therefore, this featuredecreases the number of peak clippings and improves the network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Multi-Density TRX Power Sharing to DYNAMIC(Dynamic power sharing).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to improve the transmit powerof the TRX. In this step, set Power Type based on the network plan.

l Verification Procedure1. Log in to the M2000 client, choose Performance > Query Result. Click New

Query in the display window. Then, the New Query dialog box is displayed. ChooseBSC6900 GSM > BTSM Measurement > TRX State Measurement per TRX tocheck the values of counters such as The total BURST count cut 0.5dB power, Thetotal BURST count cut 1.0dB power, The total BURST count cut 1.5dB power,and The total BURST count cut 2.0dB power before and after this feature isactivated.

The expected result: After this feature is activated, the probability of peak clippingfor timeslots is decreased.



155

NOTEWhen the transmit power of all the calls on a timeslot of a TRX group is greater than themaximum transmit power of the BTS, the BTS decreases the power of all the calls to ensureits normal operation. Number of Timeslots with Power Decreased provides the number oftimeslots whose transmit power is decreased.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set Multi-Density

TRX Power Sharing to NONE(None).

----End

Example//Activating dynamic power sharingSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=DYNAMIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWT=50W;//Deactivating dynamic power sharingSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=NONE;



156

47 Configuring Extended Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001Extended Cell.


This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.


The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

l License

The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate thelicense, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overviewof Feature Activation Guide.

Context

The Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS forwide coverage.

This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts,seashores, islands, and water areas.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set toDualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell).


1. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.Expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is notdisplayed, as shown in Figure 47-1.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell


157

Figure 47-1 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set to

Normal_cell(Normal cell).2. Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. For

details, see Monitoring Channel Status.Expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number aredisplayed, as shown in Figure 47-2.

Figure 47-2 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell

----End

Example//Activating Extended CellMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=DualTS_ExtCell;//Deactivating Extended CellMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=Normal_cell;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell


158

48 Configuring Concentric Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201Concentric Cell.



– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The cell is configured.

Contextl When tight frequency reuse is adopted, the concentric cell technology can be used to avoid

or reduce radio interference and therefore to ensure voice quality.l The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid

(OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcellis configured with more channels and therefore it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer.The OL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aimsto provide services for areas that are not covered by the OL subcell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Typeto Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and Enhanced Concentric Allowed to anappropriate value.

NOTEAfter enhanced concentric cell is enabled, the BSC automatically configures the OL subcelland the UL subcell as neighboring cells. The neighboring cell relationship cannot be removed.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Concentric Cell


159

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXIUO. In this step, set ConcentricAttribute to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(UnderlaidSubcell) based on the network plan.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setConcentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

NOTEIt is recommended that Concentric Attribute on the BCCH TRX be set to UNDERLAID(Underlaid Subcell).

4. Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in theconcentric cell based on the current network status.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign

Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

NOTETo facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theunderlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block thechannel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock).

Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRXin the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

CAUTIONSetting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion inthe cell where the TRX is located.

4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.

Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRXin the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set AssignOptimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHson the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock).

7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theoverlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.




160

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Typeto Normal_cell(Normal Cell).

----End

Example//Activating Concentric CellMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON, FLEXMAIO=OFF;SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=UNDERLAIDOVERLAID; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES, OLTOULHOALLOW=YES;//Verifying Concentric Cell//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assignedSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, OPTILAYER=USubcell;//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the underlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of TRX 2047 is occupied)SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcellSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcellSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assignedSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Deactivating Concentric CellMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;



161

49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501Co-BCCH Cell.




– The feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License



– The BTS supports the configured frequency band.

Context

Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, andsupports continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots.

A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency bandconfiguration is as follows:

l If the overlaid subcell is configured to be work at DCS1800M, then the underlaid subcellmust be configured to be work at GSM900M or GSM850M.

l If the overlaid subcell is configured to work at PCS1900M, then the underlaid subcell mustbe configured to work at GSM850M.

NOTE

The signal loss of DCS1800M changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, thesignal power of DCS1800M is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of GSM900M.

The configuration of the co-BCCH cell must comply with the following principles:

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell


162

l Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, an incominginter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyondthe coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not assigned to the overlaid subcell.

l The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned toimplement traffic balance between the subcells.

l Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expandthe coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaidcell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. Thepriorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM.

l The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX.

l The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. Frequencyhopping within the same frequency band is allowed.

l Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of theTRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs,such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.


1. Optional: When the frequency band of a cell is GSM850_1900, run the BSC6900MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support High FrequencyBand to PCS1900.

NOTE

If the frequency band of the cell to be added is GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800, performthe following steps:

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell and set the parametersFreq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to configure the concentric cellattributes of the cell.

NOTEAfter performing this step, run the MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set the handoverparameters for the concentric cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set AssignOptimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).

2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

NOTETo facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theunderlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block thechannel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock).



163

Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRXin the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

CAUTIONSetting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion inthe cell where the TRX is located.

4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.

Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRXin the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set AssignOptimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHson the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock).

7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theoverlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL to remove the co-BCCH cell to

be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating Co-BCCH Cell//Assuming that the cell ID is 2047//Setting Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900SET BSCBASIC: HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900;//Adding a co-BCCH cell with the frequency band set to GSM850_1900 and the cell type set to concentric cellADD GCELL: CELLID=2047, CELLNAME="PCS1900", TYPE=GSM850_1900, MCC="460", MNC="08", LAC=0808, CI=0001, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO= OFF, DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra, FLEXMAIO=OFF;//Modifying concentric cell attributesMOD GCELL MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=OFF;//Setting the concentric cell handover algorithm to handover algorithm I and allowing handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcellSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES; //Verifying Co-BCCH Cell//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assignedSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, OPTILAYER=USubcell;//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the underlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of



164

TRX 2047 is occupied)SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcellSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcellSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assignedSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcellDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;//Deactivating Co-BCCH Cell//Removing the configured co-BCCH cellRMV GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;



165

50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-BandNetwork

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402Enhanced Dual-Band Network.





l License


Context

The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. Inthe enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with differentcoverage areas logically form a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is anoverlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band networkalgorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load can be balanced between the two cellsin a cell group.

NOTE

l If the two cells belong to different operators, an enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured.

l Before changing the relationships between the cells and the operator, check whether an enhanced dual-band network is configured. If an enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the parametersfor the enhanced dual-band network.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network


166

1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the BSS. Run the BSC6900MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure the GSM900 cell as a unidirectionalneighboring 2G cell of the DCS1800 cell.

2. Repeat Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as a unidirectional neighboring 2G cellof the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboringcells of each other.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for theGSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced DoubleFrequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), Same Group CellIndex Type to BYID(By Index), and Same Group Cell Index to the index of theDCS1800 cell.


– Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network by performing thefollowing operations:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, setECSC to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setDirected Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set theparameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, ULSubcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and both Distance BetweenBoundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. SetLoad HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No).

4. Make MS1 and MS2 (both supporting the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequencybands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS1 to make a call to a fixed-linephone. MS1 is assigned a channel in the GSM900 cell.

5. Maintain the call of MS1 and use MS2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in theGSM900 cell. MS2 is assigned a channel in the DCS1800 cell because the load ofthe underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold.This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned a channel inthe overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signalsin the overlaid subcell are strong enough.

6. Terminate the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step,set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and ULSubcell General Overload Threshold to 80.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parametersfor the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to0.

8. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call. MS1 is assigned a channelin the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is nothigher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the callin the overlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in the underlaid subcell when thetraffic in the underlaid subcell is light.

– Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the followingoperations:



167

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set theparameters for enabling each type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DLRX_LEV Threshold to 4.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set theparameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No),UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General OverloadThreshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell toUL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, andOutgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

3. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS1is assigned a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS1 is handed over to theGSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL SubcellGeneral Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORMmessage is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

4. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step.set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL SubcellGeneral Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HOof OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO LevelTH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell becausethe load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General OverloadThreshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is tracedand the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

6. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step.set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL SubcellGeneral Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to NO(No), Load HO ofOL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HOEnable to YES(Yes).

7. MS1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS1 is lowerthan Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVERPERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message isbetter cell.

NOTEThis type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the targetcell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell andunderlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaidsubcell.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the

GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the

DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the DCS1800 cell

from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.



168

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the GSM900 cellfrom the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell.

----End

Example//Activating Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Extra, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=2;//Deactivating Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell;MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell;



169

51 Configuring Flex MAIO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).


– BTS3900B does not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,baseband hopping).

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-118106Dynamic Power Sharing and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.



l Other Prerequisites– Frame offset is not configured for the BTS.– A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs list used by the same timeslot

have the same length.

ContextUnder the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely tooccur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuseis adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted accordingto the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned tothe channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and therefore improves the systemcapacity.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO


170

CAUTIONl PS services provided by an external PCU do not support dynamic MAIO.l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex

MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells.l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled

simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switchand HSN Modification Switch set to ON(On).

l Verification Procedure1. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a

Single Subscriber.2. Make a call in the cell that is enabled with Flex MAIO.3. View the hopping channel Information Element (IE) of the Channel Activation

message.Expected result: The hopping channel IE carries a valid MAIO (not 255) and HSNinformation.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switch

set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating Flex MAIOMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=ON, HSNSW=ON;//Deactivating Flex MAIOMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO


171

52 Configuring ICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801ICC.


– Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C,BTS3002E, BTS3900E GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM andDBS3900 GSM.




ContextInterference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multipleantennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas isgenerated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interferencesignals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals toeliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability ofequipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value ofsoftware parameter No. 53.

2. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise,run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICCfunction. In this step,– Set Item Index to 53.– Set Item Value to its current value plus one.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC


172

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of

software parameter No. 53.Expected result: If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function isenabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled.

2. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If theICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled,the upload rate is decreased.

l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC


173

53 Configuring EICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821EICC.


– The BTS3012 that uses the QTRU, BTS3012AE that uses the QTRU, BTS3900E, andBTS3900B do not support the feature.

– The RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 do not support the feature when they are configuredwith more than four carriers.


– It is recommended that this feature be used together with the features GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network and GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-510101 AutomaticFrequency Correction (AFC).

l License


Contextl The interference between signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation

and temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and intersymbol interference (ISI).ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considersthe correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensionalcombining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC achieves better uplink signals.

l EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the trainingsequence of desired signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel modelbased on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the desired signal, and subtractsthe desired signal from the receive signal to obtain the interference signal. By doing so, thenetwork estimates the matrix of each interference signal and analyzes the statisticaldependency of these interference signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC


174

interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximizecombination gains.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for a cell. Inthis step, set EICC Allowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICC

Allowed.2. Perform an FTP upload in a live network with interference. Then, check the upload

rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC functionis disabled, the upload rate decreases.

3. Make a call in a live network with interference. Then, check the counters related touplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: Choose Performance >Query Result from the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. TheQuery Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MRMeasurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value ofthe counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) andcalculate the proportion of this counter to the sum of Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) through Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(MeanReceive Quality Rank 7). If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high,indicating that the speech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, theproportion is low, indicating that the speech quality is poor.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for a cell.

In this step, set EICC Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating EICCSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES;//Verifying EICCLST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Deactivating EICCSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC


175

54 Configuring VAMOS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830VAMOS.


– Only the MRRU/GRRU and MRFU/GRFU of 3900 series base stations supportVAMOS.

– The VAMOS-capable MS is classified into Non-SAIC, SAIC, VAMOS level I, andVAMOS level II. At present, VAMOS level I and VAMOS level II MSs are not availablefor commercial use.


– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117501 EnhancedMeasurement Report(EMR), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-117002 IBCA,GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, GBFD-113521 A5/1Encryption Flow Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSCLocal Switch or GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

– In A over IP mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends arecomplete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring HUAWEIIII Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR / GBFD-113401 ConfiguringHalf Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and GBFD-117301Flex Abis.

– In A over TDM mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature dependsare complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 ConfiguringHUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113401Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, andGBFD-118601 Configuring Abis over IP / GBFD-118611 Configuring Abis IP overE1/T1.

l License



GBSSFeature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS


176

– VAMOS supports the following transmission modes over the Abis interface: TDM inFlex Abis mode, Ethernet IP, IP over E1, and high level data link control (HDLC).

Context

CAUTIONIf VAMOS is enabled only in some cells controlled by the BSC, and Mute SAIC TerminalProcessing Switch or Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch is set to ON(On),multiplexing may not be performed when a call is handed over from a cell not enabled withVAMOS to a cell enabled with VAMOS because the IMEI of the MS is not obtained. This affectsthe VAMOS traffic volume. Therefore, it is recommended that the BSS identification functionbe enabled to obtain the IMEI of an MS. To enable this function, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET IDRQTEST. In this steps, set BSS Identity Request Initiation to ON(SwitchOn) , Time for BSS Identity Request to 65535 , Single-User Tracing Mode toSNDONEIDRQ(Send An IDENTITY REQUEST Message) , and MS Identity Type forSingle-User Tracing to IMEI(IMEI).

Voice service over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One Slot (VAMOS) aims to expand thecapacity of a GSM network without adding TRXs or frequencies. Without adding anyconfigurations, VAMOS increases the traffic volume.

Although VAMOS expands the network capacity and reduces the network congestion rate, itaffects the voice quality and deteriorates some other KPIs. Therefore, it is recommended thatthe Half-Rate Service feature be enabled preferentially to expand network capacity and VAMOSbe enabled only when network capacity needs to be further expanded. VAMOS is notrecommended for users sensitive to voice quality.

VAMOS is applicable to scenarios with loose frequency reuse.

VAMOS deteriorates voice quality and causes interference to the entire network. Therefore, itis recommended that VAMOS multiplexing be enabled to increase network capacity whenchannels are congested in a cell and VAMOS demultiplexing be enabled to improve voice qualitywhen the cell load is low.

Call drops may occur if users dynamically add a carrier in a network where the VAMOS featurehas been enabled. Therefore, it is recommended that users perform this operation in low traffichours.

VAMOS multiplexing is classified into:l VAMOS multiplexing during assignmentl VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover

VAMOS demultiplexing is classified into:l VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell loadl VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality


– Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment



177

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set IIIPower Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment toON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS toappropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waitingfor MR on SDCCH Switch to ON(On).

– Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO toON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS toappropriate values.

– Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load toON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS toappropriate values.

– Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS toappropriate values.

l Verification Procedure– Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment

Assume that there are idle half-rate traffic channels (TCHHs) in cell 0, both MS1 andMS2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supportsVAMOS.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, setTCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF(Off),set Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setboth Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCHRate Modify to YES(Yes).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, Channel Multiplex ATCB Thres.Offset in Asgmt. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, ChannelMultiplex Rx Qual. Thres. Offset in Asgmt. to 0, UL Rx Qual. Thres. ofEstablished Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and



178

Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63, Load Thres. in OverlaidSubcell to 0, and set ATCB Offset in Overlaid Subcell to 128.

5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-1 shows the TCHH status incell 0.

Figure 54-1 TCHH status 1

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.

Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. MS1and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 54-2 shows the possible TCHHstatus in cell 0.


– Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover

Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abisinterface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, setTCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF(Off).



4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, ATCBThres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of EstablishedCalls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and Path Loss OffsetThres. of VAMOS Call to 63.





179

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.

7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.

Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good.MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure54-4 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.


8. Several seconds later, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure54-5 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.


– Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load

Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abisinterface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.




4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set bothVAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to ON(On) andset Load Thres. of Channel Demultiplex to 100.





180




8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing

handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-8 shows the possibleTCHH status in cell 0.


9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-9 shows the

possible TCHH status in cell 0.


Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performedsuccessfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several secondslater, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy theirrespective TCHHs.

– Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice qualityAssume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abisinterface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.





181


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set bothVAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On) and setboth UL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. and DL RX Bad Qual. DemultiplexThres. to 0.






8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing

handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-12 shows thepossible TCHH status in cell 0.


9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-13 shows the

possible TCHH status in cell 0.




182

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performedsuccessfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several secondslater, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy theirrespective TCHHs.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment toOFF(Off).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waitingfor MR on SDCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

– Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO toOFF(Off).


– Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load toOFF(Off).


– Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, setVAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to OFF(Off).


----End

Example//Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignmentSET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=ON;

//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignmentSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON,



183

VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosAssMultAtcbOffset=0, VamosAssUlQualThdOffset=0, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;

//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignmentSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=OFF;

//Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handoverSET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;

//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handoverSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;

//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handoverSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;

//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell loadSET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;

//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell loadSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseLoadThd=100;

//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell loadSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;

//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice qualitySET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;

//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice qualitySET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseDownLinkQualThd=0, VamosQualReuseUpLinkQualThd=0;



184

//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice qualitySET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;



185

55 Configuring Mute SAIC MSIdentification

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831Mute SAIC MS Identification.



– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on GBFD-115830 VAMOS.



ContextVAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. MuteSAIC MSs are the MSs that support SAIC but report Non-SAIC in CLASSMARK3. A non-SAIC MS can only be multiplexed with a VAMOS Level II MS. However, VAMOS level IIMSs are not available for commercial use at present. To improve VAMOS multiplexing rate,Huawei BSC provides an effective detection mechanism to identify the Mute SAIC MSs.

A database is created at the BSC to record whether an MS is a Mute SAIC MS. The BSCdifferentiates Mute SAIC MSs from Non-SAIC MSs upon channel allocation.

The Mute VAMOS MS Identification is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse andlimited network capacity. The MS may drop off when the BSC When the Mute SAIC MSidentification is enabled, call drops may occur during detection of SAIC-capable MSs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set MuteSAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Abnormal Average RX

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification


186

Qual Times Threshold to an appropriate value. Note that the value of AbnormalAverage RX Qual Times Threshold must be smaller than or equal to the value ofPeriods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify.

NOTE

When the value of Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify is fixed, an MS is easier to bedetermined as a Mute SAIC MS when the value of Abnormal Average RX Qual TimesThreshold is greater. It is recommended that Abnormal Average RX Qual TimesThreshold be set to 1 when Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify uses the default value 3.


Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, theBTS supports VAMOS, and MS 1 and MS 2 are Mute SAIC MSs.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with the followingparameter settings: VAMOS Switch set to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex viaIn-Cell HO set to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. set to 0, ATCB Thres.of Established SAIC Calls set to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls setto 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls set to 70, and Path Loss OffsetThres. of VAMOS Call set to 63.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic BusyThreshold set to 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate AdjustAllow set to YES(Yes).

4. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS orinput *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model and origincomprise the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 1 as a Mute SAICMS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).

NOTEIf you are not sure whether an MS is a problem SAIC MS, set Problem SAIC Flag toUNCERTAIN(Uncertain).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 2 as a Mute SAICMS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).

7. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 55-1 shows the TCHH status in cell0.


8. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to call each other in cell 0.

9. Observe the TCHH status in cell 0. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs.Figure 55-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.



187


10. Check whether two MSs are multiplexed a few seconds later. Figure 55-3 shows the

possible TCHH status in cell 0 after multiplexing.


11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set

to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).12. Run Step 8 through Step 10 again. The two MSs cannot be multiplexed.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set

to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating Mute SAIC MS identificationSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=ON;

//Verifying Mute SAIC MS identificationSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=YES, ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=YES, ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;

//Deactivating Mute SAIC MS identificationSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=OFF;



188

56 Configuring VAMOS Call DropSolution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832VAMOS Call Drop Solution.



– The feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License


Context

VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Testresults, however, indicate that call drops are likely to occur after SAIC-capable MSs aremultiplexed with other MSs. To obtain the desired capacity gain through VAMOS, the BSCprovides a mechanism to identify defective SAIC-capable MSs so that these MSs can bemultiplexed with other suitable MSs based on support capability. In addition, the BSC uses apower control policy specific to defective SAIC-capable MSs to ensure speech quality.

A database is created at the BSC to record whether the MSs under the BSC have defects in SAIC.All the MSs under the BSC are classified into three types: defective SAIC-capable MSs thatcannot use VAMOS, defective SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alphahopping modulation, and normal SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha-QPSK modulation. Before allocating a channel to an MS, the BSC determines the MS type andthe required modulation scheme by checking the records in the database.

The VAMOS call drop solution is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and limitednetwork capacity.When the VAMOS call drop solution is enabled, call drops may occur duringdetection of SAIC-capable MSs with AFC defects.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution


189


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set ProblemSAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Faulty SAIC MS Mean RXQual Abnor Thres to an appropriate value. Note that the value of Faulty SAIC MSMean RX Qual Abnor Thres must be smaller than or equal to the value of AutoIdentify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS.

NOTE

When the value of Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS is fixed, an MS is easier to bedetermined as a defective SAIC-capable MS that can use VAMOS but require alpha hoppingmodulation when the value of Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres is greater. Itis recommended that Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres be set to 1 when AutoIdentify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS uses the default value 3.


Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, IP transmission is used over the Abis interface,the BTS supports VAMOS, and MS1 and MS2 are SAIC-capable but MS2 has defects inSAIC.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOSSwitch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCHTraffic Busy Threshold to 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH RateAdjust Allow to YES(Yes).

4. Initiate channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 56-1 shows the TCHH status incell 0.


5. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.6. Check the TCHH status in cell 0. MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs.

Figure 56-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.


7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over an MS for VAMOS

multiplexing. MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 56-3 showsthe possible TCHH status in cell 0.



190


8. A call drop occurs on defective SAIC-capable MS2 a few seconds later.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both

VAMOS Switch and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On).10. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or

input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model comprisesthe initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS1 as a normalSAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS1,Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag toNO(No).

12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS2 as a defectiveSAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS2,Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag toYES(Yes).

13. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to multiplex MS1 and MS2 on the same TCHH. MS2does not experience a call drop.

Expected result: When Problem SAIC Flag is set to NO(No), a call drop occurs inMS2 after being multiplexed with normal SAIC-capable MS1. When Problem SAICFlag is set to YES(Yes), MS2 does not experience a call drop after being multiplexedwith normal SAIC-capable MS1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS

Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating VAMOS Call Drop SolutionSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=ON;

//Verifying VAMOS Call Drop SolutionSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CHN, TRXID=0, CHNO=1, HOMOD=VAMOSREUSE, SUBCHNO=0, DESTTRXID=1, DESTCHNO=7, DESTSUBCHNO=0;SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=ON;ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=NO, ProSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED;ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED, ProSAICFlag=JUMP_ALPHA;



191

//Deactivating VAMOS Call Drop SolutionSET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;



192

57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RFhopping, baseband hopping)

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).


– The BTS3900B does not support this feature.


– Baseband hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features:

– GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass

– GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

– GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity

– GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

l License



– In baseband FH mode, all carriers in a baseband FH group in a cell must be in transmitdiversity mode, or none of the carriers can be in transmit diversity mode.

Context

FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increasesystem capacity.

When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 throughMCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enablingFH is not recommended.

When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.


57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, basebandhopping)


193


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In

this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index,Hop Mode, and Frequency.

NOTE

Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required.If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FHgroups.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of thecell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index andFrequency Hopping Mode.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. Inthis step, set TRX ID and Hop Type.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, setChannel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.

NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXsmust be different.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.l Procedure for Quick Activation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly setthe frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index),and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set FrequencyHopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,

set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency HoppingMode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency HoppingMode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).

2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfullyand the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the AssignmentCommand message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1.


----End

Example//Activation procedureDEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11;SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=0, TRXMAIO=1;ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;




194

//Verification procedureSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";




195

58 Configuring BCCH Carrier FrequencyHopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.


– The BTS3900B does not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping(RF hopping).



ContextFrequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voicequality, and increase system capacity.

When PS services use higher order coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 throughMCS-9, the application of FH has a negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enablingFH is not recommended.

When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.2. To configure more FH groups and include the BCCH frequencies to the FH groups,

run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP for each FH group you

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping


196

want to add. In this step, set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH) and CellIndex, Hop Index, and Frequency to appropriate values.

NOTE

To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configuredwith one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cellto baseband FH. In this step, set Cell Index and Hop Mode to appropriate values.

4. To configure more frequencies and set the FH type of the TRXs participating in FH(including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGTRXHOP for each frequency you want to set. In this step, set TRX ID and HopType to appropriate values.

5. To configure more channels and set the FH index and mobile allocation index offset(MAIO) of the channels, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGTRXCHANHOP for each channel you want to set. In this step, set Channel HopIndex and Channel MAIO to appropriate values.

NOTE

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXsmust be different.

l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and therefore its FH index shouldbe set to 255.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.NOTE

In addition to the preceding activation procedure, you can quickly activate this feature by performingthe following step:Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell.In this step, set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCHTRX, and TRXID LST (which contains the BCCH TRX ID) to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,

set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode toBaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode ofBCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).

2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfullyand the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the AssignmentCommand message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1.


----End

Example//Activating BCCH Carrier Frequency HoppingDEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Configuring FH groups and setting FREQ2 to the BCCH frequencyADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12;ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=1, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12;SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;



197

//Running the follow command for all TRXs participating in FHSET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;//Running the follow command to set the channels of all TRXs participating in FHSET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=1;ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Verifying BCCH Carrier Frequency HoppingSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";



198

59 Configuring Antenna FrequencyHopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703Antenna Frequency Hopping.


– The base station is a double-transceiver base station or a 3900 series base station.

– There are at lease two antennas in a cell participating in antenna frequency hopping.



l License


Context

Antenna frequency hopping enables downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted onother TRXs. This improves receive quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and transmit qualityof the BCCH TRX, thereby improving network performance.

If a cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRXinvolved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping.

When the cell is active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set CellAntenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping


199

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configureantenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX GroupIndex to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.l Quick Configuration Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP toquickly configure antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and CellAntenna Hopping to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOPANT to query Cell Antenna

Hopping.Expected result: Cell Antenna Hopping is set to YES_HPANT(Yes).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell

Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).NOTE

When the cell is active, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).

----End

Example//Activating Antenna Frequency HoppingDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT;ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1, TRXID2=2;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Verifying Antenna Frequency HoppingLST GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Deactivating Antenna Frequency HoppingSET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=NO_HPANT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping


200

60 Configuring BCCH Dense FrequencyMultiplexing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.




– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell orGBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.

l License


Context

The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequencyresources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so thatmore frequencies can be used as TCHs, increasing the system capacity.

NOTE

If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from anon-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the entirenetwork.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setTIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing


201

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set LevelThresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCHUdr TBCCH based on the site requirements.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set LoadThreshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to an appropriate value.

l Verification Procedure1. Make a call in the cell configured with this feature.

Expected result: The call is successfully set up and the voice quality is good.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Type

to CELL(Cell) and Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified.Expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Working.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set

TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating BCCH Dense Frequency MultiplexingSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=ON;//Deactivating BCCH Dense Frequency MultiplexingSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing


202

61 Configuring IBCA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).


– A built-in PCH and a pair of service processing boards are required. An IP interfaceboard is required to support inter-BSC IBCA.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:

GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RFhopping, baseband hopping), GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization,GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature depends on the following features:GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP (when inter-BSC IBCA is supported).

– This feature and the following features and functions are mutually exclusive:GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, the very early assignment function in GBFD-110502Assignment and Immediate Assignment, GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell,GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-118001 BCCHDense Frequency Multiplexing, MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic SpectrumSharing(GSM), and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature and the feature GBFD-118601Abis over IP are mutually exclusive.



l Other Prerequisites– Two cells are configured: cell1 and cell2. Cell1 has at least two TRXs; cell2 has at least

three TRXs.

ContextWhen the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the newcall is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA


203

minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the networkand therefore enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. In addition, this increases the networkcapacity while ensuring the voice quality in the entire network.

NOTE

l In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only onemobile allocation (MA) group; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for eachfrequency band).

l A maximum of three MA groups can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell; a maximum of 24 MAgroups can be configured for all the IBCA neighboring cells.

l The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell cannot exceed 64.

l A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells and 24 IBCA mobile allocation index offsets (MAIOs) canbe configured for an IBCA-enabled cell.

l The value calculated from Number of MAs for the Serving Cell x Number of MAIOs for the ServingCell x Number of MAs for All IBCA Neighboring Cells x Maximum Number of MAIOs for IBCANeighboring Cells cannot exceed 8192.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an XPUa or XPUb board to theMPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.

NOTE

A maximum of four MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load andimprove the system reliability.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD twice to enable IBCAfor cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IBCAInfo Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Info Report Period Between BSC toappropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN twice to configureMAIOs for cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name, andset Hop Index and the relevant MAIO parameters for cell1 and cell2 based on thenetwork plan.

NOTE

Each cell needs to be configured with more than two MAIOs, and MAIOs for cell1 should beconsistent with those for cell2.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1 andcell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set Neighboring CellType to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn MeasureNeighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).

NOTE

To configure the handover-supporting IBCA function, set Neighboring Cell Type toHANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell).


– Verifying the IBCA algorithm

1. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS DomainMessages of a Single Subscriber.



204

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice forcell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs onthe same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and setAdministrative State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).

3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1 and keep the call alive. Ten seconds later, useMS2 to make a call in cell2 and keep the call alive.

4. In the Single User CS Trace tracing window, check the two calls. Record theMAIO information element in the Channel Activation messages on TCHs.

5. Compare the MAIO for the call made by MS1 with that for the call made by MS2.

Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicatesthat the IBCA algorithm has been enabled.

– Verifying the IBCA handover

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1and cell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set NeighboringCell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCANeighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice forcell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs onthe same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and AdministrativeState of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).

3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHOto hand over the call to cell2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell),Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index Type toBYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).

4. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS DomainMessages of a Single Subscriber. Record the MAIO information element in theChannel Activation message on the TCH for MS1 in cell2.

5. Keep the call of MS1 alive and use MS2 to make a call in cell1. Run theBSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the call in cell1 to cell2. In thisstep, set Object Type to CELL(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoingcell), and Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).

6. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Single User CS Trace.Record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on theTCH for MS2 in cell2.

7. Compare the MAIOs in the two records in 4 and 6.

Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicatesthat an IBCA handover has been performed.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the neighbor cellrelations between cell1 and cell2. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By index)and set Source Cell Index and Neighbor 2G Cell Index to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Typeto BYID(By Index), Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA NeighboringCells), and Source Cell Index to an appropriate value.

Expected result: No queried items have desired results.



205

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IBCAAllowed to NO(No).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index) and Cell Index to an appropriate value.Expected result: The value of IBCA Allowed is No.

----End

Example//Activating IBCAADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=MCP, SN=0;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=YES;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=YES;SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=2000, IBCAOUTBSCINFORPTPRD=4000;//Deactivating IBCARMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=NO;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=NO;



206

62 Configuring Soft-SynchronizedNetwork

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network.


– The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured.– The BTS supports the feature Soft-Synchronized Network.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP has been configured before

this feature is activated.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two

BTSs.– Each BTS is configured with at least two cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and

antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.

ContextThe soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires thecooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve theperformance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature canconvert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with otherassociated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference andtherefore increases the system capacity.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network


207

NOTE

l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.

l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequencyutilization and increase the network capacity.

l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS,that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1. In a scenario where an IP network is used between the BSC andBTS, including Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-Synchronized Networkfeature is not supported.


Configuring an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS. In this step, specify BTS Indexor BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. Toconfigure more BTSs, run this command for each BTS you want to add. Site SyncZone of each BTS must be set to the same value.

NOTE

BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs andis set as required.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTSIndex to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition,set both Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time AdjustmentSwitch to ON(ON) and Support BSC AISS to NO(NO).

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL to add a pair ofneighboring cells in the BSC. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of thesoft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1. Then, set First Cell Index andSecond Cell Index to appropriate values.

NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated based on certain rules. Ifthe neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboringcells as required.

Configuring an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network

The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is used asan example. Each BSC has only one BTS. IP-based inter-BSC interconnection isconfigured.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS at BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. Site Sync Zone of each BTS must be set to the samevalue.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC1. In this step, setReference BTS Index to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronizednetwork. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset TimeAdjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES(YES).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC2. In this step, setReference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronizednetwork. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time



208

Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), Support BSC AISS to YES, Base BSC to NO, andControl BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC1.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL at BSC1 to configure acell under BSC2 as an external cell of BSC1.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL at BSC1 to configure theexternal cell added in Step 4 as a neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL at BSC1 to add a pair ofneighboring cells between BSCs.

NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. Ifthe neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cellsas required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.


Verifying the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information aboutthe soft-synchronized network.

NOTE

If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information about all the soft-synchronized networktasks is queried.

Expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC soft-synchronized network exists. If the index exists, the intra-BSC soft-synchronizednetwork is added successfully.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP NCELLTBL to query information aboutneighboring cell pairs within a BSC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTSsynchronization information.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offsetin the synchronization between BTSs.

Verifying the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information aboutthe soft-synchronized network.Expected result: The value of Support BSC AISS for BSC1 is YES and the value ofControl BSC DPC for BSC2 is the signaling point of the control BSC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the informationabout the synchronization between BSCs.

NOTE

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC1 to query the state of the local BSC.

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC2 to query the state of thecollaborative BSC.

Expected result: The value of BSC Sync State for BSC1 and BSC2 is Adjusted.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset

in the synchronization between BTSs.Expected result: The value of BTS status for the BTS is Synchronized.




209

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronizednetwork task. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved inthe intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.

----End

Example//Activating Soft-Synchronized NetworkSET BTSAISS: IDTYPE=BYIDX, BTSID=0, SYMOFFSET=12, SITESYNCZONE=1;ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0, GATHON=ON, ADTON=ON, BASEBTSID=0, REINITTBL=NO, ISSPTBSCAISS=NO, ISBASICBSC=YES, GATHST=00&10, GATHET=08&50, BSCGATHST=10&00, BSCGATHET=12&00;//Deactivating Soft-Synchronized NetworkRMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0;



210

63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization.


– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature.

– In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added.

– In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added.



l License


Context

Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce theinterference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related tothe radio network.

The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSMas an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step,set Board Type to USCU(USCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS orGlonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power SupplySwitch to NOPOWER(No Power).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization


211

NOTE

GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna PowerSupply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPSAntenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

l Verification ProcedureNone.


----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, BT=USCU;SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization


212

64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202Synchronous Ethernet.


– Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface.

– Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.

l License


Context

This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of asynchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC orBTS hardware.

The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer ofthe Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow ofthe Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting thehighly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the dataflow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that itdoes not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the clock type of a BTS. Inthis step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet


213

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source

configuration of the system.Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0;//Verification procedureDSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet


214

65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power ControlAlgorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.




– This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-110802 Pre-processing ofMeasurement Report.

l License



– The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-levelcounters can be retrieved on the M2000.

Context

Power control is a process in which the MS or BTS uses certain rules to adjust and control thetransmit power as required, without affecting the speech quality. It reduces the interference inthe entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control is mainly applicable to thenetwork with tight frequency reuse as well as high traffic volume or strong interference. In theGSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It canalso be performed on each MS.

HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 EnhancedPower Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of themeasurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of thresholdconfiguration.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm


215


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow IIIPower Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), set Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON(Allowed), and set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei III power control parameters or set them to theirdefault values.

NOTE

l Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed) by default.

l By default, PC Step Calculation Optimization is set to NO (No). It can be set to YES(Yes) as required to optimize the results of power control.


l Verification Procedure1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the

BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies whilethe frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channelfrequencies.

2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.

Table 65-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control


Measurement of PowerControl Messages in MRper Cell

Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)

Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)

Mean Strength of Downlink Signals

Mean Strength of Uplink Signals

Mean Quality of Downlink Signals

Mean Quality of Uplink Signals

Interference BandMeasurement per TRX







216













Receive QualityMeasurement per TRX















217























218



3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control II.

5. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.6. Check the counters for one hour and save them.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III).8. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control III.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow IIIPower Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control ForNon-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings ofAllow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR for cell 0 and cell 1.Expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III PowerControl For Non-AMR are set to Allowed.

11. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.12. Check the counters for one hour and save them.13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6.

Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained inStep 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to interferenceband, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger thanthat obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of acounter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained inStep 6.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Control Switch.Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).

----End



219

66 Configuring DiscontinuousTransmission (DTX)-Downlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.





l Other Prerequisites– Idle channels are available in the test cell.

ContextDTX reduces data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thereby reducing systeminterference and saving system resources. DTX also reduces BTS power consumption andfrequency interference on the radio interface.

CAUTIONDTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FRUse Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).




220

NOTE

If half-rate calls are in progress, set HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set DL DTXStrategy to BSC_STRATEGY(BSC Strategy).

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.2. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the message tracing results.Expected result: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In theinformation element (IE) channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1, indicatingthat the BSC supports downlink DTX.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR

Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-DownlinkSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY;//Deactivating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-DownlinkSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO;




221

67 Configuring DiscontinuousTransmission (DTX)-Uplink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.


– This feature does not depend on the hardware.l Dependencies on other features



l Other Prerequisites– Idle channels are available in the test cell.

ContextLicense is required to activate DTX.

DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the systeminterference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TXmodule of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.

CAUTIONDTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink


222

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FRUplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).

NOTEIf the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).

l Verification Procedure1. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system messages

to the test cell.3. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.

Expected results: A message of the BCCH Information type is traced. system-info-type is system-information-3 and the value of dtx is 1. The system message is sentcorrectly.

4. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.5. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.

Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In theinformation element channel-number, the value of channel-type is bm-acch. In theinformation element channel-mode, the value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates thatthe BSC supports uplink DTX.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set the basic

parameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall notUse).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_Use;//Verification procedureSND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink


223

68 Configuring TRX Power AmplifierIntelligent Shutdown

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.



This feature cannot be used with the following features:– GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when one frequency hopping

group is involved in baseband hopping.– GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is

applied.– GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.– GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping(in GBSS12.0, the GBFD-111602 TRX

Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown can be used together with the GBFD-113703Antenna Frequency Hopping feature when DRRUs or DRFUs are used.).

– GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing.l License


ContextThe TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specificperiod. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumptionwhen estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they areavailable for use when estimated traffic load is heavy.

Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels onthe BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRXchannels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown


224

BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with highpriorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels intoa few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.

When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus,the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used.

When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding theBCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. If one or more TRXs (excludingthe BCCH TRX) are not idle, the TRXs cannot be shut down.

Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRXmeets the following conditions:l The TRX is not on the BCCH.l The PDCH is not available on the TRX.l The antenna hopping is disabled for the TRX.

After confirming that all target TRXs are shutdown, wait for one minute, and then check whetherthe power decreases.

Data Preparation

ParameterName Parameter ID Remarks

DataSource

Allow DynamicShutdown of TRXby BSC

BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow

This parameter specifies whether toenable the TRX Intelligent Shutdownfeature. This parameter takes effect onall BTSs under a BSC.

Networkplanning

Time When theFunction IsEnabled

StartTimeTAClo-seTrxPA

Set this parameter based on the celltraffic volume. You are advised to usethis feature during off-peak hours.

Networkplanning

Time When theFunction IsDisabled

EndTimeTAClo-seTrxPA

Set this parameter based on the celltraffic volume. You are advised to usethis feature during off-peak hours.

Networkplanning

Allow DynamicShutdown of TRX

DYNOpenTrxPower

You are advised to set this parameter toYES(Yes) for all cells.

Networkplanning

Allow DynamicShutdown of TRX

CPS This parameter specifies whether toallow the BSC to enable or disable theTRX power amplifier based on thetraffic volume.

Networkplanning



225


DataSource

TRX Power-onProtection Time

ProtectTimeTrx-PowerOn

This parameter is set to prevent the BSCfrom frequently enabling or disablingthe TRX. After a TRX is powered on,the BSC is not allowed to disable theTRX within the period of time specifiedby this parameter.

Networkplanning

Reserve IdleChannel Number

RsvIdleChanNum

This parameter specifies the number ofreserved idle channels. If this parameteris set too small, the TRX will befrequently enabled or disabled. If thisparameter is set too large, idle TRXs willnot be disabled in a timely manner.

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the FunctionIs Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actualcondition.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAllow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes) to enable theTRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set AllowShutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes), therefore allowing the BSC6900to shut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCDSTPADATE. In this step,set the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function isdisabled. In the period of heavy traffic, this function needs to be disabled.

NOTE

l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPADATE can be used to query the value ofProhibit DynShutdown TRX DateRangeldx.

l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE can be used to remove the period inwhich the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.

l Verification Procedure1. Wait for about five minutes. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP

GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power.

Expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAllow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No).



226

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow DynamicShutdown TRX to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the BSCSET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES, StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=19&00, EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=24&00;//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a cellSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=YES;//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a TRXSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=YES;//Setting the period during which the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function is prohibitedADD BSCDSTPADATE: DateRangeIndex=1, StartMonthDSTPA=JAN, StartDayDSTPA=10, EndMonthDSTPA=FEB, EndDayDSTPA=10;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the BSCSET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=NO;//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a cellSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=NO;//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a TRXSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=NO;



227

69 Configuring TRX Power AmplifierIntelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.


– DRFU, RRU3004, and DTRU (type B) support this feature.

– BTSs configured with multi-transceivers do not support this feature.

– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature whenthey use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit.



l License


Context

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which thePA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumptionof the PA is reduced.

TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA powerconsumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operationexperiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of theTRX when there is no data to be transmitted in certain timeslots, thus reducing the cost on powergreatly.

Data Preparation


69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdownon Timeslot Level


228

ParameterName Parameter ID Remarks Data Source

Allow TurningOff Time Slot

TsTurningOffEna-ble

This parameter does notdepend on other parameters.

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow TurningOff Time Slot to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time Slot

Turning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES;//Verification procedure LST BSCDSTPA:;//Deactivation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;


69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdownon Timeslot Level


229

70 Configuring Intelligent CombinerBypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604Intelligent Combiner Bypass.


– Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXsand must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the DTRU(type B), , RRU3004, and DRFU.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping

(baseband hopping), GBFD-113701, Antenna Frequency Hoppingare or GBFD-510104Multi-site Cell.



l Other Prerequisites– Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment in the MML command SET

GCELLBASICPARA is set to Yes.

ContextThe ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channelson the BCCH carrier in the cell.

The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neithercan the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs.

The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when theoutput power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of theTRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W andthe static power level is 1.

Data Preparation

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass


230

ParameterName

ParameterID Remarks Data Source

ICB Allowed ICBALLOW You can set this parameter to YES(YES) only when the SNDMD for anRF module is set to WBANDCOMB(Wideband Combination).

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, changeICB Allowed to YES(YES).



----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass


231

71 Configuring Active Backup PowerControl

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605Active Backup Power Control.


– The BTS must be configured with the battery and PMU.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– Huawei power backup device is needed, such as APM30.

ContextWhen the BTS external power supply fails, storage batteries are started to supply power. TheBTS shuts down some TRXs automatically under the control of a timer to save the backup power.Meanwhile, the BTS gradually decreases the TRX transmit power with a certain step until theentire BTS is powered off. When the BTS external power supply recovers, start the TRXs. Then,the transmit power of all the TRXs recovers.

Considering the cell coverage, cell capacity, and backup power, this feature gradually decreasescell coverage and hands over MSs at the cell edge to neighboring cells. This does not degradenetwork performance.

NOTE

Using this feature decreases the system capacity.

Operators can choose any of the following modes:

l Coverage preferred

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control


232

Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit power of the remainingTRXs.

l Capacity preferredGradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down some of the TRXs.

l Backup power preferredShut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the transmit power of the remainingTRXs.


1. Coverage preferredRun the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related tohierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power SavingMethod to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy toBYCOVER(Cover Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRXStart Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max DropPower Threshold to appropriate values.

2. Capacity preferredRun the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related tohierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power SavingMethod to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy toBYCAP(Capability Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], ShutdownTRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and MaxDrop Power Threshold to appropriate values.

3. Backup power preferredRun the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related tohierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power SavingMethod to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy toBYSAVING(Saving Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], ShutdownTRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and MaxDrop Power Threshold to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Before the feature is activated:

a. Shut down the mains power supply of the BTS locally. The BTS reportsALM-25622 Mains Input Out of Range, and the battery starts to supply power

b. When the BTS reports ALM-21807 OML Fault, the entire BTS is powered off.c. Measure the difference between the time the BTS reporting ALM-25622 Mains

Input Out of Range and the time the BTS reporting ALM-21807 OMLFault. That is, measure the lasting duration.

2. After the feature is activated, perform the same operations as that are performed beforethe feature is activated at the same time of a different day.

3. Compare the lasting duration before and after the feature is activated. If the lastingduration after feature activation is greater than that before feature activation, thisfeature takes effect.

l Deactivation ProcedureNOTE

The methods of deactivating this feature in GUL modes are the same.



233

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set BackupPower Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).

----End

Example//Enabling Active Backup Power ControlSET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR;

//Disabling Active Backup Power ControlSET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYTRX;



234

72 Configuring Power Optimization Basedon Channel Type

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.


– Currently, only double-transceiver TRXs support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping(baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping, or GBFD-510104Multi-site Cell.

l Dependency on License– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate


ContextThe power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltageadjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustmentfunction, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according tothe applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRXworks in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSKmode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. TheBTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, reducing the power consumption.

Data Preparation


GPRS GPRS Set this parameter based on thecurrent network status.

Networkplanning

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type


235


EDGE EDGE Set this parameter based on thecurrent network status.

Networkplanning

PDCH PowerSaving Enable

PDCHPWRSAVEN

Set this parameter to YES(Yes)only for carriers with dynamicPDCHs.

Networkplanning

Adjust Voltage BTSadjust The recommended value is YES(Yes).

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCHPower Saving Enable to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAdjust Voltage to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH

Power Saving Enable.

Expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value

of Adjust Voltage.

Expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCHPower Saving Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set AdjustVoltage to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Enabling GPRS and EDGESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;//Enabling the PDCH power optimization functionSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES;//Enabling the dynamic voltage adjustment functionSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=YES;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling the PDCH power optimization functionSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=NO;



236

//Disabling the dynamic voltage adjustment functionSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=NO;



237

73 Configuring PSU Smart Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608PSU Smart Control.


– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900Edo not support this feature.

– The BTS is configured with storage batteries, and no alarm about broken battery loop,AC overvoltage, or AC undervoltage is generated.

– The BTS must be configured with the PSU.l Dependencies on Other Features




1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSUTurning Off Enable to YES(YES).

l Verification ProcedureThis feature does not need to be verified.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSU

Turning Off Enable to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activating PSU Smart ControlSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control


238

//Deactivating PSU Smart ControlSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control


239

74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH PowerConsumption Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.


– BTS3900B does not support this feature.





Context

The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmitpower of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, reducing the power consumption of theBTS.

NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cells may be affected.Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic is light, for example, at night.

Data Preparation


Power DeratingEnabled

MAINBCCHPWRDTEN

To use the BCCH PowerConsumption Optimizationfunction, set this parameter toYES(Yes).

Networkplanning


74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power ConsumptionOptimization


240


Power DeratingStart Time

MAIN-BCCHPWRDTSTIME

Set this parameter during off-peak hours.

Networkplanning

Power DeratingEnd Time

MAINBCCHPWRDTETIME

Set this parameter during off-peak hours.

Networkplanning

Power DeratingRange

MAIN-BCCHPWRDTRANGE

This parameter does not affectcell reselection and handovermeasurement.

Networkplanning

Power DeratingActive ChannelEnabled

MAIN-BCCHPWDTACTCHEN

This parameter does not affectcell reselection and handovermeasurement.

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set PowerDerating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power DeratingStart Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.

WARNINGl When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, the

downlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboringcells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore,perform this operation with caution.

l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes) and the current time is betweenPower Derating Start Time and Power Derating End Time, the BTS reducesthe transmit power of idle channels in non-BCCH timeslots on a BCCH TRX byPower Derating Range.

l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes), the BTS also reduces thepower of occupied channels on a BCCH TRX. If power control is applied to theoccupied channel and the reduction degree in power control is smaller than thevalue of Power Derating Range, then degree in power control is used in powerreduction; otherwise, the reduction range depends on Power Derating Range.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step,set Power Derating Active Channel Enabled to YES(Yes) so that the BSC6900 canreduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value of

Power Derating Enabled.

Expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes.




241

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power

Derating Enabled to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Enabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization functionSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization functionSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=NO;




242

75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610Dynamic Cell Power Off.


– BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.


– You are advised to use this feature together with GBFD-111602 TRX Power AmplifierIntelligent Shutdown and GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118106 Dynamic PowerSharing(Dual PA power sharing).

l License



– The BTS of the specified cell supports this feature.

– The specified cell has a co-coverage cell.

Context

In a co-BSC multiband network topology, when the traffic volume is low, a fully coverednetwork can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all network equipmentof the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption.

Data Preparation


DataSource

EnableTurning OffCell

TURNOFFENABLE

To enable the Dynamic Cell Power Offfeature, set this parameter to ENABLE(Enable).

Networkplanning

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off


243


DataSource

SameCoverage CellNo

SAMECVGCELLID

This parameter specifies the ID or name ofco-coverage cells.

Networkplanning

SameCoverage CellLoadThreshold

SAMECVGCELLLOADTHRD

The value of this parameter is obtainedbased on the historical traffic statistics.

Networkplanning

Dyn. TurningOn Cell LoadThreshold

TURNONCELL-LOADTHRD

The value of this parameter is obtainedbased on the historical traffic statistics.

Networkplanning

Dyn. TurningOff Cell BusyChannel Num.

TURNOFFCELLCHANNUM

A small value of this parameter decreasesthe number of handovers in a cell, but leadsto delayed cell shutdown and decreases thegain obtained from the function. You areadvised to use the default value.

Networkplanning

Dyn. TurningOff CellProtectionTime

PROTECTTIME A larger value of this parameter preventsping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortensthe cell shutdown duration and decreasesthe gain obtained from this function. Youare advised to use the default value.

Networkplanning

SameCoverage CellLoad Stat.Time

SAMECVGCELLLOADSTATTM

A larger value of this parameter preventsping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortensthe cell shutdown duration and decreasesthe gain obtained from this function. Youare advised to use the default value.

Networkplanning

Dyn. TurningOff Cell StartTime

TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME

The value of this parameter is obtainedaccording to the historical traffic statistics.Set this parameter to a time point in theperiod when the traffic volume is lowerthan TURNONCELLLOADTHRD.

Networkplanning

Dyn. TurningOff Cell StopTime

TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME

The value of this parameter is obtainedaccording to the historical traffic statistics.Set this parameter to a time point in theperiod when the traffic volume is lowerthan TURNONCELLLOADTHRD

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setEnable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable) and the parameters related to thetime of dynamic cell power off and co-coverage cell to appropriate values.



244

NOTE

l When activating the dynamic cell power off feature, you must configure a co-coverage cell.

l If the co-coverage cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related servicescannot be processed in the co-coverage cell after the dynamic cell power off feature isdeactivated.


NOTE

The cell to be verified has a co-coverage cell and the co-coverage cell works properly. There is nocall access request in the cell to be verified. The traffic of the co-coverage cell is lower than SameCoverage Cell Load Threshold.

It is recommended that Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold be set to a value close to the maximumvalue 100 so that the conditions for this feature can be easily met. After the verification, this parametermust be reset to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setCell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Enable Turning Off Cell toENABLE(Enable), and Same Coverage Cell Index Type to the index of the co-coverage cell. In addition, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. TurningOff Cell Stop Time to appropriate values so that the current time is within the timeperiod specified by the two parameters.

2. Wait for about five minutes, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.Expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to Yes, which indicates that the dynamiccell power off feature has been activated.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setDyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensurethat the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters.

4. Wait for about one minute, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.Expected result: The value of Cell Dynamic Switch is No. This indicates that the cellis enabled.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set

Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example//Activating Dynamic Cell Power OffSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=ENABLE, SAMECVGCELLIDTYPE=BYID, SAMECVGCELLID=1, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=23&33, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=05&33;//Deactivating Dynamic Cell Power OffSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;



245

76 Configuring TRX Working VoltageAdjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111611TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.



– Double- and multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



Context

Data Preparation

ParameterName


Adjust Voltage BTSadjust You are advised to set this parameterto YES(Yes) for all cells configuredwith multicarrier RF modules.

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAdjust Voltage to YES(Yes).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment


246

l Verification Procedure1. Measure the input current and voltage of the TRX board using a clamp meter and

voltmeter, and compare the power consumption before and after enabling the TRXworking voltage adjustment function. It is proven that after the function is enabled,the power consumption decreases.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set

Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating TRX Working Voltage AdjustmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES;//Deactivating TRX Working Voltage AdjustmentSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment


247

77 Configuring Multi-Carrier IntelligentVoltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligent Voltage Adjustment.


– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L(DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature.



l License


Context

Data Preparation

ParameterName


PA IntelligentAdjust Voltage

PaAdjVol You are advised to set this parameterto YES(Yes) for all cells configuredwith multicarrier RF modules.

Networkplanning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PAIntelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment


248


l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA

Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment


249


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301Flex Abis.


– For a BTS3900B or BTS3X series base station which does not support Flex Abis,– If a BTS3X series base station is a root node in a chain or tree topology, none of the

base stations in the chain or tree support Flex Abis.– If a BTS3X series base station is a lower-level base station of BTSs that support Flex

Abis, Flex Abis can be enabled on the upper-level BTSs only when the followingconditions are met:Flex Abis Mode for the BTS is set to SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).Flex Abis Mode for its upper-level BTSs is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and

OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, or GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.



l Other Prerequisites– The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring a BTS.

ContextFlex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis transmission resources among different BTSs, cells,and services and therefore improves the resource utilization. Especially for multi-cell largecapacity BTSs, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE function, the dynamicAbis resource allocation can greatly improve resource utilization.

Before Flex Abis is introduced, there is one-to-one mapping between the Um interface resourcesand the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC, the Abis

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis


250

interface transmission resources work in resource pool mode to improve the utilization of thetransmission resources.

If a ring topology needs to be configured, only BTS ring topology I is supported. When bothHuawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions must be met:l Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the

configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link.l No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass.l No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links.l No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.

Before deploying Flex Abis, collect the information specified in Table 78-1.



251

Table 78-1 Data preparation


Flex Abis Mode FLEXABISMODE

Configuration principles forcascaded BTSs

l To enable Flex Abis for acascaded BTS on a link, setFlex Abis Mode toFLEX_ABIS for its upper-level BTSs.

l If Flex Abis Mode is set toSEMI_ABIS for a cascadedBTS on a link, set Flex AbisMode to SEMI_ABIS for allits lower-level BTSs.

l Use the E1 port of the primarycabinet group to connect theprimary cabinet group of thelevel-1 BTS to a BSC interfaceboard. Use the internalconnections of the primarycabinet group to connect thesecondary cabinet group to aBSC interface board.Alternatively, use the E1 portof the secondary cabinet groupto connect the secondarycabinet group to a BSCinterface board.

l Use only the E1 ports of theprimary cabinet groups toconnect cascaded BTSs. Usethe internal connections of theprimary cabinet group of alower-level BTS to connect theBTS to an upper-level BTS.Alternatively, use the E1 portof the secondary cabinet toconnect the BTS to a BSCinterface board. Note thatsecondary cabinet groupsbelonging to the same BTScannot be cascaded.

l One BTS can only have oneupper-level BTS.

Configuration principles for otherBTSs

Users are allowed to run theBSC6900 MML command SET

Networkplanning



252


BTSFORBIDTSto disable certaintimeslots except timeslots in fixedallocation mode, such as signalingtimeslots and monitoring timeslotson E1 links for a Flex Abis-enabledBTS. Certain timeslots need to bedisabled in certain transmissionmodes, such as satellite mode orwhen only some timeslots on an E1link can be used.

MultiplexingMode

MPMODE If this parameter is set to a largevalue, the RSLs will becomecongested. Therefore, set thisparameter to MODE5_1 orMODE6_1 only when the trafficon a BTS is light.

Networkplanning

TransmissionResourcePreemptingSupport

ENPREEMPTTRANSADMT

To enable CS services to preemptthe Abis transmission resourcesoccupied by PS services when allAbis transmission resources areoccupied, set this parameter toON.The setting of this parameter iseffective for all BTSs under theBSC.

Networkplanning

PCU SupportPREEMPT_ABIS_LINKMessage

PCUPREEMPTFLAG

If an external PCU is used, and if aquick release of Abis linksoccupied by PS services isrequired, set this parameter toYes.In this way, after CS servicespreempt Abis transmissionresources, the BSC sends the PCUmessages indicating Abis linkpreemption, instructing the PCU torelease the Abis links, which inturn speeds up the Abis linkrelease.

Networkplanning

Congestionremain ratio

TDMCONGTH Set this parameter to a valuesmaller than that of Congestionclear remain ratio to preventping-pong handovers whentransmission links are congested.

Networkplanning



253


Congestion clearremain ratio

TDMCONGCLRTH

Set this parameter to a value largerthan that of Congestion remainratio to prevent ping-ponghandovers when transmissionlinks are congested.

Networkplanning

TRM LoadThreshold switch

LOADTHSW l If this parameter is set to ON,load control is enabled whentransmission links arecongested. In this case, setTRM load threshold index tospecify the threshold used forload control.

Networkplanning

TRM loadthreshold index

TRMLOADTHINDEX

The value of this parameter mustbe unique.

Networkplanning

LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set to any valueother than CLOSE, the value mustbe different from the values ofLDR Second, LDR Third, andLDR Fourth.

Networkplanning

LDR Second LDRSND If this parameter is set to any valueother than CLOSE, the value mustbe different from the values ofLDR First, LDR Third, and LDRFourth.

Networkplanning

LDR Third LSRTRD If this parameter is set to any valueother than CLOSE, the value mustbe different from the values ofLDR First, LDR Second, andLDR Fourth.

Networkplanning

LDR Fourth LDRFOUH If this parameter is set to any valueother than CLOSE, the value mustbe different from the values ofLDR First, LDR Second, andLDR Third.

Networkplanning





254

CAUTIONThis operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform thisoperation during off-peak hours.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to enable flex Abis. In this step, setFlex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and set BTS Multiplexing Mode to anappropriate value.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, setTCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, Flex Abis PriorChoose Load Thred, and other parameters to appropriate values.

CAUTIONThe transmission resources on the Abis interface may become insufficient before theTCHF resources become insufficient. To solve this problem, set the followingparameters to enable the TCHH allocation based on the traffic load on the Abisinterface: TCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, and FlexAbis Prior Choose Load Thred.When TCHH Function Switch is set to YES(YES), the system allocates TCHHspreferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Fix Abis Prior ChooseLoad Thred and the flex Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Flex Abis Prior ChooseLoad Thred.

4. Optional: If an external PCU is used and the PCU supports preempting Abistransmission resources,Run the BSC6900 MML command SETBTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINKMessage to YES(YES).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable the preemption ofPS secondary link resources of local BTS and lower-level BTS by CS services. In thisstep, set Sublink Resources Preemption Switch to YES(YES) and Low-levelSublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES(YES).– If there are lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set both Sublink Resources

Preemption Switch and Low-level Sublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of the CS services is increased ifthe Abis transmission resources are insufficient.

– If there are no lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set Sublink ResourcesPreemption Switch to YES(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of theCS services is increased if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient.NOTE

When all the Abis transmission resources are occupied, the new CS services need to requesttransmission resources. In this case, the CS services need to preempt the resources of the PS servicesso that the resources are preferentially allocated to the CS services.

NOTECS services can preempt the resources occupied by PCUs when PCU SupportPREEMPT_ABIS_LINK Message is set to YES.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, setTransmission Resource Preempting Support to ON(On).



255

If Transmission Resource Preempting Support is set to ON(On) and all Abistransmission resources are occupied, new CS services require more Abis transmissionresources. In this case, the CS services can preempt the Abis transmission resourcesoccupied by PS services so that the requirements for CS services can be preferentiallymet. The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC.

7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, setTransport Type to TDM, and set TRM load threshold index, Congestion remainratio, and Congestion clear remain ratio to appropriate values.This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.

8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step,specify the BTS to be configured. Set Carrier Type to TDM, and set TRM LoadThreshold switch and TRM load threshold index to appropriate values.This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.

NOTE

TRM load threshold index must be set to the value specified by TRM load threshold index inADD TRMLOADTH.

9. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDRFirst, LDR Second, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth to appropriate values.The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC. This step ismandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In PortNO. to the number of the port that the base station is connected to, Port Direction tothe same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block flex timeslots. Inthis step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., andEnd Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flextimeslots to ensure that only two contiguous 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for FlexAbis.

NOTE

Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. Timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/s subtimeslots, and reserve only one 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services.

3. Run the MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Cell Index to the index ofthe cell to be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS.

4. Run the MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set ChannelNo. to the number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock(Lock). Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH,and two TCHs.

5. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In thisstep, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupiedby the call is the timeslot that is unblocked.

6. End the call and block the occupied TCH by performing the previous steps. Then,only one unblocked TCH is available.

7. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to check the state of timeslots. In



256

this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whoseFlex Abis timeslot is unblocked.

8. Hang up the call.l Deactivation Procedure


NOTE

This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this operation duringoff-peak hours.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode toFIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

----End

Example//Activating Flex AbisDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900", FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS, MPMODE=MODE4_1;SET BTSFLEXABISPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISRESADJTCHHFUNSW=YES;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;//Deactivating Flex AbisDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900", FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;



257

79 Configuring BTS Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702BTS Local Switch.


– BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 seriesbase stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.


– In Abis over TDM transmission mode, this feature depends on the featureGBFD-117301 Flex Abis.

– In Abis over IP transmission mode, this feature depends on the features GBFD-118601Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP,GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-115601Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC),GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115703Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet LossConcealment (EPLC), GBFD-115711 EVAD, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding RateThreshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis.

l License



– The BSC works in either BM/TC separated mode or BM/TC combined mode, and theTDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces.

– At sites where BTS312s and BTS3012s combine into groups, BSS local switching isenabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.

– If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, BSS localswitching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to thesame MGW or different MGWs.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch


258

– In High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) transmission mode, BSS local switching isnot supported.

ContextBTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series basestations in TDM or IP transmission mode.

When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis orSemiSolid mode.

When a BTS uses the IP transmission mode, BTS local switching is classified into the localswitching under a BTS and the local switching between IP BTSs in a local switching area. Thelocal switching under a BTS is considered as a special case of the local switching between IPBTSs in a local switching area. Local switching area refers to the area where the BTSs are in IPtransmission mode and are connected to the same BSC.

BTS local switching saves transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reducesthe TC processing delay during a call.

If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS localswitching mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving duringa call, speech service and then fax service, and separate billing of BSS local switching.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS LocalSwitching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number forBTS to appropriate values.– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When

Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix

Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSS

local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.– If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently

based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS LocalSwitching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

– If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on networkplanning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set relatedparameters on the MSC side.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex AbisMode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).

NOTE

1. Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTSif it has been activated.

2. After performing this step, run the MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.



259

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTSLocal Switch to YES(Yes).

– IP transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS LocalSwitching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number forBTS to appropriate values.

– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start WhenAbis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.

– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by PrefixNumber), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSSlocal switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.

– If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independentlybased on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS LocalSwitching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

– If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on networkplanning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set relatedparameters on the MSC side.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTSLocal Switch to YES(Yes). If the cross-BTS local switching function is enabled,Region Information must be specified.

NOTE

XPUs where control-plane services of BTSs under the same local switching area are locatedmust be managed by the same MPU.

l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BTS to query the mapping relationship between theBTS and the XPU.

l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BRD to query the mapping relationship betweenthe XPU and the MPU.

If you need to configure BTS 1 and BTS 2 under the same local switching area, but the XPUswhere the contror-plane services for BTS 1 and BTS 2 are located are managed by differentMPUs, perform the following operations:

1. Configure region information about BTS 1.

2. Deactivate BTS 2.

3. Configure region information about BTS 2 to be the same as that of BTS 1.

4. Activate BTS 2.


1. Calling and called MSs start a conversation under the BTS enabled with the localswitching function.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query call resources used byan MS.

NOTE

If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no TC Resource Info and Abis Chno Ts Info isdisplayed.




260

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS LocalSwitching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BSCONLY(BSC Only).

----End

Example//Activating BTS Local Switch over TDM transmissionSET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY, BtsLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER, MsisdnPrfxList2StartBtsLs1="139", MsisdnSegList2AvoidBtsLs1="138";MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;//Verifying BTS Local SwitchDSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13988888888";//Deactivating BTS Local SwitchSET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY;



261

80 Configuring Abis TransmissionOptimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401Abis Transmission Optimization.


– An Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc is configured.

– In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board is configured for processing HDLCframes in the subrack where the PEUa board is located.

– The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.


– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch,GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.

l License



– The BTS software version supports this function.

ContextAbis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composedof several timeslots, enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.

CAUTIONl HDLC does not support bypass or Flex Abis.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization


262


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. In this step, set BTSIndex to 1, BTS Type to BTS3012, Service Type to HDLC, Abis ByPass Mode toFALSE, and Config Ring to NO.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet to a BTS.In this step, set BTS Name to the BTS name specified in Step 1, Cabinet No. to 0,and Cabinet Type to the BTS type specified in Step 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add a TRX board to theBTS. In this step, set Board Type to TRU, Subrack No. to 0, and Slot No. to 0.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, setCell Index to 1, Cell Name to gcell-1, Freq. Band to GSM900, MCC to 502,MNC to 85, Cell LAC to H'0185, Cell CI to 2, Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell,Start Flex MAIO Switch to OFF, and Operator Name to 46000.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add a frequency to thecell. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and Frequency1 to 21.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add the mappingbetween the cell and the Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set CellIndex to the cell index specified in Step 4 and OSP Code to the Originating SignalingPoint Code (OPC) of the cell.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add a carrier frequency. In thisstep, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4, TRX ID to 1, andFrequency to the frequency specified in Step 5.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind the cell to theBTS. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and BTSIndex to the BTS index specified in Step 1.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind the logicalcarrier frequency to the physical TRX board. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX IDspecified in Step 7, TRX Board to TRU, TRX Board Pass No. to 0, Subrack No.to 1, and Slot No. to 0.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel informationabout the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, ChannelNo. to 0, Channel Type to MBCCH, and Timeslot Priority to 1.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel informationabout the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, ChannelNo. to 1, Channel Type to SDCCH8, and Timeslot Priority to 2.

12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX attributes. In thisstep, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7 and Power Level to 7.

13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween the BTS and the BSC6900. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS indexspecified in Step 1, BTS In Port No. to 0, Dest Node Type to BSC, Subrack No. tothe number of the subrack where the BSC interface board is located, Slot No. to thenumber of the slot where the BSC interface board is located, and Port No. to 0.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. In this step, setBTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.




263

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT.Expected result: The value of Cell Initialized is Yes and the value of ChannelFault is No.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS

index specified in Step 1 in the activation procedure.

----End

Example//Activating Abis Transmission OptimizationADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="BTS-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=HDLC, FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO, MPMODE=MODE4_1;ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1", CN=0, TYPE=BTS3012;ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1",BT=TRU ,SRN=1, SN=0;ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="gcell-1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="502", MNC="85", LAC=H'0185, CI=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell, OPNAME="46000";ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FREQ1=21;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=H'B85;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=1, FREQ=41;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1,BTSID=1;ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=1, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, POWL=7;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;//Verifying Abis Transmission OptimizationDSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1;//Deactivating Abis Transmission OptimizationDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;



264

81 Configuring Abis Congestion TriggerHR Distribution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.

Prerequisitesl Dependencies on Other Features

– The feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.

– In Abis over TDM transmission mode, the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis has alsobeen configured before this feature is activated.



l Dependencies on Running EnvironmentThis feature does not have any special requirements for the running environment.

l Requirements for Transmission NetworkingThis feature is applicable to the following scenarios:– The Abis interface uses IP over E1 transmission.– The Abis interface uses IP over Ethernet transmission.– The Abis interface uses TDM transmission and the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis

has been configured.l Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices

Both the MSC and MSs support HR speech versions.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution


265

Context

Table 81-1 Data Preparation

Parameter Name ParameterID

Parameter Settings Data Source

LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set toCSPH, this feature will beactivated.If this parameter is set toCLOSE, this feature will bedeactivated.

Network planning

TRM load thresholdindex

TRMLOADTHINDEX

The value of this parametermust be unique.

Network planning

Transport Type TRANST This parameter must be set tothe actual type of transmissionused by the Abis interface.

Network planning

Threshold type THTYPE This parameter can be set toPercentage or Band Width.

Internal planning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDRconfiguration.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR First to CSPHand LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth to a value except CSPH.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set TRM loadthreshold index, Transport Type, and Threshold type to appropriate valuesaccording to threshold types.

4. In IP transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH. In thisstep, set the IP path-related parameters to appropriate values. For example, set TRMload threshold index to the same value as that set in Step 3.

5. In TDM transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETBSCABISPRIMAP. In this step, configure the Abis priority mapping on the BSCside. For example, set TRM load threshold index to the same value as that set inStep 3.

l Verification ProcedureThis feature can be enabled only when congestion occurs on the Abis interface. Therefore,this feature cannot be verified when the TRM load threshold is within a normal range.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDRconfiguration.



266

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, change the value of LDRFirst, LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth from CSPH to CLOSE.

----End

Example//Activating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution//Querying the LDR configurationLST LDR:;//The result is as follows:%%LST LDR:;%%RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List LDR-------- LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth

PS Downspeeding AMRC CS Preference TCHH CS TCHF-TCHH HO (Number of results = 1)

--- END

//Setting "LDR First" to "CS Preference TCHH" and "LDR Third" to "PS Downspeeding" to ensure the LDR-related parameters are set to different valuesSET LDR: LDRFST=CSPH, LSRTRD=PSDOWN;//Enabling the Abis interface to use IP transmissionADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=10, TRANST=IP, THTYPE=PERCENTAGE;MOD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=10;//Enabling the Abis interface to use TDM transmissionADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=11, TRANST=TDM;SET BSCABISPRIMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRANSTYPE=TDM, LOADTHSW=ON, TRMLOADTHINDEX=11;//Deactivating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution//Querying the LDR configurationLST LDR:;//The result is as follows:%%LST LDR:;%%RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List LDR-------- LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth

CS Preference TCHH AMRC PS Downspeeding CS TCHF-TCHH HO (Number of results = 1)

--- END

//Setting "CS Preference TCHH" to "CLOSE"SET LDR: LDRFST=CLOSE;



267

82 Configuring Flex Ater

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901Flex Ater.






– The TC subrack is located separately from the BSC.

– The Ater interface uses the TDM transmission mode.

Context

With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots.The BSC allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call establishment.If TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, 16 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.If TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, 8 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized.

This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TCnetworking.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K onAter set to YES(Yes).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater


268

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS with BM/TC config flag set toBM or TC and Ater connection path index to the number of an Ater connection path.

Expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of full-rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that ofhalf-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K on

Ater set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Flex AterSET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES;//Deactivating Flex AterSET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater


269

83 Configuring BSC Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701BSC Local Switch.



– When the Abis interface is in TDM transmission mode, this feature cannot be usedtogether with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A overIP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

– When the Abis interface is in IP transmission mode, this feature cannot be used togetherwith the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118602 Aover IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.



l Other Prerequisites– The BSC works in basic module (BM)/transcoder (TC) separate mode and TDM

transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface.– With BSC Local Switch, neither the base station serving the calling MS nor that serving

the called MS uses Abis Transmission Optimization.– In sites with a combined BTS cabinet group, BSS local switching can be enabled only

when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.

ContextWith this feature, the BSC performs a voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS andcalled MS are located under the same BSC. Voice signals are no longer transmitted on the Ateror A interface, therefore releasing transmission resources on the Ater interface and the transcoder(TC) coding resources.

This feature helps save local or remote transmission resources on the Ater interface.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 83 Configuring BSC Local Switch


270

If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in the BSC LocalSwitch mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during acall, speech service first and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching.

The BSS local switching is not supported as follow: The BSC is configured the MSC Poolfunction. The calling MS and the called MS are registered on more different MGWs, and theMGW is in IP transmission mode. The BTS is in High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)transmission mode.


1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching GeneralStrategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specifyOptions for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.

NOTE

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When AterCongests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch.

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by PrefixNumber), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.

2. Run the MOD GCNNODE command to configure whether BSS local switching isperformed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.

NOTE

l If only the BSC performs BSS local switching as selected by the network plan, you needto set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

l If both the BSC and the MSC perform BSS local switching as selected by the network plan,you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) orENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then set related parameters on the MSC side tosupport BSS local switching.

3. Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch toYES(Yes).


1. Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC.

2. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query call resources of an MS.Expected result: If BSC Local Switch is enabled successfully, information about Ainterface resources of the TC subrack and information about Abis interface resourcesof the BM subrack are displayed in the result.


1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching GeneralStrategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).

----End

Example//Activating BSC Local SwitchSET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY, BscLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER, MsisdnPrfxList2StartBscLs1="139";MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;



271

//Deactivating BSC Local SwitchSET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=NEITHERSTART;



272

84 Configuring Ater CompressionTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902Ater Compression Transmission.


– The POUc board is in position.– When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured.

l Dependencies on Other FeaturesThis feature cannot be used together with GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.



l Other Prerequisites– The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated

configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.

ContextWhen the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configuredremotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted toimprove the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost.The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology,where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted overthe channelized STM-1.

The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE,but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on thesignaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission


273


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board to the BMsubrack. Then, repeat the operation to add a POUc board to the TC subrack.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with Service Mode set toSEPARATE(Separate) and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Aterconnection path between the MPS and the TCS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML betweenthe MPS and the main TCS.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling linkbetween the MPS/EPS and the TCS.

6. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by referring toConfiguring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type setto BSC(Ater Interface on BSC) to add an adjacent node.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type setto TC(Ater Interface on TC) to add an adjacent node.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the BMsubrack. Then, run the command again to add an IP path to the TC subrack. To addmore IP paths, run this command repeatedly.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.2. Verify the links at the physical layer.

– Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as PPP links:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings ofLink state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set tothe same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command andDestination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSPPPPLNK command.Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, whichindicates that the MLPPP link is functional.

– Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as MLPPP links:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings ofLink state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link stateand LCP negotiated state.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set tothe same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command andDestination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSPMPGRP command.Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, whichindicates that the MLPPP link is functional.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD linkis functional.



274

Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal, which indicates that the LAPD linkis functional.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacentnode, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth.Expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greaterthan 0. That is, the adjacent node is functional.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path isavailable.Expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greaterthan 0. That is, the IP path is functional.

6. Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run theBSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interfaceresources.Expected result: The UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same.


----End

Example/*Activating the feature Ater Compression Transmission*///Adding a POUc boardADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;ADD BRD: SRN=3, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO, ISTCBRD=YES;//Setting the transmission mode over the Ater interfaceSET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, ATERTRANSMODE=IP;//Adding an Ater connection pathADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=0;ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=1;ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=2, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=2, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=2;ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=3, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=3, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=3;//Adding an Ater OMLADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=1, ATERPIDX=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding an Ater signaling linkADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;//Adding an Ater PPP link to the BM subrackADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1



275

&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;//Adding an Ater PPP link to the TC subrackADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the BM subrackADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the TC subrackADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;//Adding an Ater IP path to the BM subrackADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Adding an Ater IP path to the TC subrackADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;



276

85 Configuring Ring Topology

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801Ring Topology.



– This feature cannot be enabled when a DXX device is used.

– Reverse and forward links can be connected to the same Abis interface board or differentAbis interface boards in the same BM subrack, but cannot be connected to differentsubracks.


– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL andOML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-113728 OML Backup, and GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.

– GBFD-117301 Flex Abis cannot be used together with BTS ring topology II.

l License



– BTS ring topology I

– When this feature is simultaneously enabled with Flex Abis, Flex Abis must beconfigured on all BTSs, and only a single E1 link can be configured on the forwardand reverse links.

– BTS ring topology II

– Only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward and reverse links.

– HDLC ring topology (only BTS ring topology II is supported)

– Hybrid networking of HDLC and TDM is not supported. Secondary link is notsupported.

– The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 85 Configuring Ring Topology


277

– The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported, but the configuration ofmonitoring timeslots is not supported.

– Local switching is not supported.– The conversion of the bearing modes, that is, the conversion from the HDLC ring

topology to the TDM ring topology, is not supported.– Timeslots cannot be manually allocated.

ContextA ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In a ring topology, BTSs connect to eachother to form a common chain first, and then the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSCthrough a transmission link, thereby forming a ring. If the transmission link is disconnected ata point of the ring, the topology of BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains unchanged. BTSsthat follow the breakpoint form a new chain in the reverse direction.

Compared with a common chain topology, the ring topology has the following advantage: Whena transmission link is disconnected at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. Inthis way, BTSs that precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, improving systemrobustness.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES(Yes).

2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the EquipmentData.

3. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the LogicalData.

4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to TDM/HDLC.

NOTE

In the forward direction, a BTS in a ring connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port0, and it connects to a lower-level BTS or BSC through port 1.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to configure the attributesof the ring.– To enable BTS ring topology I, set Configure Ring II to NO(No), and set Ring

I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try Rotating Duration Time based onyour individual needs.

– To enable BTS ring topology II, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and set RingII Wait Time Before Switch, Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time, Ring IIRotating Penalty Time, T200, T203, andN200 based on your individual needs.

6. Configuring BTS clock by referring to Configuring a Clock for a BTS.7. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS

Configuration.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRINGPARA.Expected result: The parameter settings in the query results are consistent with theconfigured values.



278

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO

(No).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ring

connection.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

----End

Example//Activating Ring TopologyADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=1;SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FASTCNETFLAG=YES, BREAKTIME=0, BUILDTIME=60, ESTTIME=0, T200=12, T203=1, N200=3;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Verifying Ring TopologyDSP BTSRINGPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Deactivating Ring TopologyDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;MOD BTS:IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;



279

86 Configuring TRX Cooperation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801TRX Cooperation.





l License



– The cell supports TRX cooperation.

– At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell.

– The cell supports BCCH TRX cooperation.

– The cell supports baseband FH TRX cooperation.

– The cell supports switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation.

– The cell supports switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation.

Context

TRX cooperation enables the BSC to automatically designate an available TRX in the cell toreplace a faulty BCCH TRX or baseband FH TRX. This ensures that the cell can work properlywhen faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. There are two types of TRX cooperation: BCCHTRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation.

l BCCH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to use the TRX cooperation algorithm to selectan available TRX as the new BCCH TRX when the original BCCH TRX is faulty. Thisensures that the cell can work properly. When the fault on the original BCCH TRX isrectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 86 Configuring TRX Cooperation


280

l Baseband FH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to remove a TRX involved in basebandFH from the FH group when the TRX is faulty in a cell, whereas other TRXs in the FHgroup remain in baseband FH.

TRX cooperation is specific to each cell. That is, you can separately enable or disable the TRXcooperation function for each cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRXAiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allowed & Recover Immediately)and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part).

l Verification ProcedureVerifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation

1. Power off the BCCH TRX for the cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty,and therefore BCCH TRX cooperation is triggered.

2. Wait for about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MMLcommand DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Typeof channel 0 of a TRX (not the initially configured BCCH TRX) is set to MainBCCH.

3. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the BCCH TRX cooperation function andmake a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality is clear.

4. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRXcooperation.

5. Wait about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MMLcommand DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Typeof channel 0 of the initially configured BCCH TRX is set to Main BCCH.

6. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the switchback of BCCH TRX cooperationfunction and make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice qualityis clear.

Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping)and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).

NOTE

l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the basebandFH when a TRX in the same group is faulty.

l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station afterremoving it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base stationstate recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRXcooperation returns to the initial state.

2. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by referring to Tracing CS DomainMessages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click theOML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable baseband FHTRX cooperation.

3. Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributesmessage of the faulty TRX contains only one frequency whereas "arfcnLst" in the Set



281

Channel Attributes message of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group containsmultiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX.

4. Initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the AInterface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set relatedparameters to start the tracing task. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing byreferring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis InterfaceCS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracingtask. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voiceis clear during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces arecorrect. Ensure that the field h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENTCOMMAND message is 1.

5. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 2 to enable switchback of baseband FH TRXcooperation.

6. Wait 15 minutes, and then verify that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributesmessage of the fault-rectified TRX contains all frequencies in the baseband FH group.

7. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice is clearduring the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct.Ensure that h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT COMMANDmessage is 1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX

Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).

----End

Example//Activating TRX CooperationSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed, BHPREPOLICY=PART;//Verifying TRX CooperationVerifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperationDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperationSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop;//Deactivating TRX CooperationSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;



282

87 Configuring MSC Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401MSC Pool.






– Two MSs are available, and they are registered at the HLR.

– The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected, and the MSC pool function isconfigured on the MSC side.

– The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated.

– An original signaling point (OSP) and at least two destination signaling points (DSPs)are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC.

– The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the AInterface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

Context

An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs processing traffic from one MSC pool area. ABSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All MSCsin the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool,reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing disaster-tolerant redundancy capabilities.

One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs.

When the MSC does not support the function A Interface Circuits Managed by the MGW or thefunction is disabled, DPCs in an MSC pool are configured for different DPC groups.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 87 Configuring MSC Pool


283

NOTE

This section uses the configuration of two DSPs whose DPX Index are set to 0 and 1 as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator.In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, andMNC to appropriate values; set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes); and setLength of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value based on the data negotiatedwith the MSC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the firstDSP. In this step, set DSP index to 0, set Operator Name to the value set in Step1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSCAdministrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K Usernumber> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the secondDSP. In this step, set DSP index to 1, set Operator Name to the value set in Step1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSCAdministrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K Usernumber> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.

NOTE

Repeat the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE if there are more than two DSPs.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping betweenan NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value based on the data negotiated withthe MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side.

l Verification Procedure1. Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side.2. On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages

on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DSPof MSC1.

3. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell whereMS1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window isdisplayed.

NOTE

Initiate A-interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC2 by using the method described in Step2 and Step 3.

4. Power on MS1. Use MS1 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC1 side.The CN assigns a TMSI to MS1.

5. Power on MS2. Use MS2 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC2 side.The CN assigns a TMSI to MS2.

NOTE

To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GCNNODE to set MSC Administrable State for all other MSCs to UNAVAIL(Unavailable). After the location update, set the parameter to NORMAL(Normal).

6. Move MS1 to the coverage area of MSC2. Then, use MS1 to originate a call and checkthe A interface message tracing.



284

Expected result: MS1 sets up the call through MSC1, and the registered MSC of MS1remains unchanged.

7. Move MS2 to the coverage area of MSC1. Then, use MS2 to originate a call and checkthe A interface message tracing.

Expected result: MS2 sets up the call through MSC2, and the registered MSC of MS2remains unchanged.

NOTE

In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured bythe CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriateMSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSCon the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on theCN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mappingon the BSC6900 side.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC

Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating MSC Pool*///Adding a GSM operator and enabling the MSC pool functionADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="op1", MCC="460", MNC="188", MSCPOOLALLOW=YES, MSCNRILEN=3, MSCNULLNRI=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;//Adding a CN nodeADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800, CNID=0, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800, CNID=1, DFDPC=NO, ATransMode=TDM;//Adding an NRI-to-MSC mappingADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=10, CNNODEIDX=0;ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=11, CNNODEIDX=1;

/*Deactivating MSC Pool*///Disabling the MSC pool function MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO;



285

88 Configuring the SGSN Pool

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool


286

88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.


– The DPUd/XPUa/FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured. For details, seeConfiguring a Board.


– Nonel License



– The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

– The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.

– The BSC supports SGSN Pool.

– The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.

Context

SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool shareload and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investmentin equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reducesthe number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.

2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd Board.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packetcontrol unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In thisstep, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mappingbetween the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add a network service

virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode,



287

run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on theSGSN side.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSEIdentifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.

9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs inthe SGSN pool.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGPvirtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.

2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTPmessages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sentfrom the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages arecorrect, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.

3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PSservices are carried on one PTP BVC.

4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acesssesthe network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can performattach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to thetraced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carriedon another PTP BVC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to NO(No).

----End

Example//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;

//Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_IP, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=1, NSEI=1, IP="131.131.131.132", UDPPN=1355, SRN=1, SN=1; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;//Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;//Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.



288


– The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.l Dependencies on Other Features




– The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

– The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.

– The BSC supports SGSN Pool.

Context

The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool canexpand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improvenetwork reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, whichimproves network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packetcontrol unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In thisstep, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mappingbetween the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC to add a bearer channel (BC).7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC to add a network service virtual

connection (NSVC).8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE

Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in

the SGSN pool.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGPvirtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.

2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTPmessages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent



289

from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages arecorrect, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.

3. Ensure that the MS accesses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PSservices are carried on one PTP BVC.

4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS accessesthe network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can performattach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to thetraced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carriedon another PTP BVC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow

SGSN Pool to NO(No).

----End

Example//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: MOD GCNOPERATOR: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;

//Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD BC: SRN=1, SN=1, PN=1, BCID=1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=1, NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, BCID=1, DLCI=20; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;//Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;//Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;



290

89 Configuring Abis Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601Abis Bypass.


– The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.– The BTS3006C and BTS3002E in TDM transmission mode are configured with the

DMCM board that supports Abis Bypass.– The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) in TDM transmission

mode are configured with the DABB board that supports Abis Bypass.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL andOML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118401 AbisTransmission Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117801 RingTopology, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.



l Others– The physical transmission link is connected to the GTMU.– In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the BTS uses the logical IP address for

communication.– In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the local and peer IP addresses for the PPP links

or MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting theBTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0, as shown in Figure 89-1.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass


291

Figure 89-1 IP address planned for links in IP over E1 transmission mode

ContextAbis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topologies. When power supply to a BTS fails, thisfunction makes the BTS bypassed to function only as the path so that signals of lower-levelBTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lower-level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore.

To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPassMode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS.

A maximum of five levels of cascaded BTSs support Abis bypass.

For BTS3900 series, this function is effective only after DIP switches are set properly.l When the Abis interface uses the TDM transmission mode, DIP switches S4 and S5 are

required for supporting this function.l When the Abis interface uses the IP over E1 transmission mode, only DIP switch S4 is

required for supporting this function.Table 89-1 and Table 89-2 describe the bits of DIP switches.

Table 89-1 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S4

DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 Remarks

BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4

S4 ON ON ON ON Abis Bypassis supported.

OFF OFF OFF OFF Abis bypassis notsupported.

Other Prerequisites Unavailable



292

Table 89-2 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S5

DIP Switch Bit Status of S5 Remarks

BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4

S5 ON ON ON ON Abis bypassis notsupported.

OFF ON ON OFF The first-level BTSssupport Abisbypass.

ON OFF ON OFF The second-level BTSssupport Abisbypass.

OFF OFF ON OFF The third-level BTSssupport Abisbypass.

ON ON OFF OFF The fourth-level BTSssupport Abisbypass.

OFF ON OFF OFF The fifth-level BTSssupport Abisbypass.

Others Unavailable

Assuming that the Abis Bypass function is activated when the Abis interface uses the IP overE1 transmission mode:l When an upper-level BTS experiences a power failure, call drops or mute occur in lower-

level BTSs and last for approximate 5s. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is poweredoff, the PPP or MP link between BTS1 and BTS2 is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates withthe BSC about reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete andOML is reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover.

l When the upper-level BTS is powered on again, the services in lower-level BTSs areinterrupted. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is powered on again, the PPP or MPlink between BTS2 and BSC is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with BTS1 aboutreestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and OML isreestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover. The laboratory test data shows



293

that the adjacent lower-level BTS is affected for 4 to 15 minutes. The impact durationincreases by 1 or 2 minutes for a BTS of a higher level.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step,set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step,set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection forthe lower-level BTS. Repeat this step for each cascaded BTS you want to add,including:– Set Dest Node Type to BTS.– Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lower-

level BTS to the upper-level BTS.

NOTE

A BTS connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port 0, and it connects to a lower-levelBTS through port 2.

4. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 linkis PPP:– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK command to add PPP links.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSPPPLNK command to add BTS

PPP links.

NOTELocal IP Address and Peer IP address for PPP links over the port connecting the BTS andthe BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.

5. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 linkis MLPPP link group:– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP command to add MLPPP link

groups.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK command to add MLPPP links.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPGRP command to add BTS

MLPPP link groups.

NOTELocal IP Address and Peer IP Address for MLPPP link groups over the port connecting theBTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPLNK command to add BTS PPPlinks.

l Verification Procedure1. Power off the upper-level BTS.2. On the LMT, click Device Maintenance and enter the lower-level BTS maintenance

page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then, right-click the GTMU board and choose Query Board Information from the shortcutmenu. In the displayed dialog box, click Basic Information. If basic informationabout the GTMU board is displayed and the OML Faulty message is not displayed,the Abis bypass function has been enabled.



294

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode

to FALSE(Not Support).NOTE

Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS if it hasbeen activated.

----End

Example//The following uses the Abis over TDM transmission mode as an example.//Activating Abis BypassADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="3900-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=2;//Deactivating Abis BypassMOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE;



295

90 Configuring Robust Air InterfaceSignalling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721Robust Air Interface Signalling.


– RRU3004, DRFU, RRU3008 V1/V2, RRU3908 V1/V2, and MRFU V1/V2 havesupported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS12.0.

– BTS3900B, BTS3900E, BTS3012, and BTS3006C/02E (DTRU/DDRM) havesupported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.

– RRU3926/RRU3929/RRU3942, MRFUe, MRFd, and RRU3928 have supported uplinkand downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.

– BTS312 and QTRU do not support this feature.– Except BTS312 and QTRU, all other RF modules including BTS3900B/E support

downlink FACCH retransmission.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The MS supports this feature.

ContextWhen the radio quality is poor, by retransmitting FACCH or SACCH frames, the anti-interference capability of the FACCH or SACCH is improved, thereby increasing the possibilitythat the MS and BSC receive signaling messages successfully.

The robust air interface signaling function includes retransmission of downlink FACCH framesand retransmission of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling


296


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, setECSC to YES(Yes), Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(Yes) , RepeatedDownlink FACCH Threshold to 5, and Repeated SACCH to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Verify Repeated Downlink FACCH.

a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 WebLMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services> Abis Interface CS Trace. For details, see LMT User Guide.

b. During immediate assignment, the BSC6900 decodes the Channel Activationmessage. You can obtain MS's capability for supporting this feature in the bitinformation for repeate-acch of the IE "ms-capability".

c. Use the MS to initiate a new call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900Web LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSMServices > BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm.For details, see LMT User Guide.

d. The BSC6900 compares the receive quality in the downlink measurement reportwith the value specified by Repeated Downlink FACCH Downlink QualityThreshold. If the receive quality is lower than the value of this parameter, theBSC6900 retransmits FACCH frames to the BTS which then transmits the framesto the MS. The displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE"lapdm-dl-repeat-facch".

2. Verify Repeated SACCH.

a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 WebLMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services> BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm. For details,see LMT User Guide.Expected result: If the BSC6900 or MS cannot decode SACCH frames correctly,the displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE "lapdm-dl-repeat-sacch".

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Repeated

Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Robust Air Interface SignallingSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES, REPEATDLFASET=YES, REPEATDLFATHRED=5, REPEATSASET=YES;

//Deactivating Robust Air Interface SignallingSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REPEATDLFASET=NO, REPEATSASET=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling


297

91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803Abis Transmission Backup.

91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in theoptional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function inthe optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup


298

91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (RingTopology)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in theoptional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.


– Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission.– The BTS supports the Ring I topology.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis

Interface and GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.l License


ContextWhen a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-basedAbis interface, the GBSS automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellitetransmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured.

With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is differentfrom that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverselink uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure 91-1.

Figure 91-1 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.



299

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring toYES.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR. In this step, setConfigure Ring II to NO(No) and Ring I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I TryRotating Duration Time to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a reverse ringconnection.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.l Verification Procedure

1. (Optional) Use the MS to make a call.

NOTE

Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a non-ring topology network.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring.

Expected result: The value of Config Ring is YES.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the value of

Transmission Mode.

Expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.4. Interrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example,

remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS.

Expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission

Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(SatelliteTransmission).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ringconnection.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO(No).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.

----End

Example/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*///Deactivating the target BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;//Enabling ring topology for a BTSMOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES;SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, FASTCNETFLAG=NO, WTBS=90, TBS=90;//Adding a reverse ring connectionADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=18, PN=1;//Setting BTS transmission mode



300

SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS;//Deactivating the target BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;

/*Deacting Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*///Deactivating the target BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;//Setting BTS transmission modeSET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_TRANS;//Removing a reverse ring connectionRMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1;//Disabling ring topology for a BTSMOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;//Activating the target BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;

91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-LogicalBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function inthe optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.


– Link resources are required for terrestrial and satellite transmission modes.– An interface board for TDM transmission is required on the BSC side.– BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900AL must be configured with GTMUa

or GTMUb boards to support this feature.– The terrestrial BTS occupies port 0 on the physical BTS as the main port, and the satellite

BTS occupies port 1 on the physical BTS as the main port.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature depends on the GBFD-117301 Flex Abis feature.– This feature cannot be used together with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP,

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, and MRFD-210205 ChainTopology.



ContextThe dual-logical BTS solution provides two logical BTSs for a physical BTS. One logical BTSuses satellite transmission, and the other uses TDM terrestrial transmission. If the TDMterrestrial transmission is faulty, the system automatically switches over the transmission linkto the backup satellite transmission. The satellite station begins to process services to ensurenormal network communication.

The requirements for naming the two logical BTSs are as follows:



301

l The type of a BTS (a terrestrial BTS or a satellite BTS) must be identified.

l The mapping between two logical BTSs and a physical BTS must be identified.

For example, two logical BTSs in site A can be named as terrestrial BTS A and satellite BTSA.


1. Configure the terrestrial BTS.

a. Configuring the Equipment Data

b. Configuring the Logical Data

c. Configuring the Transmission Data

d. Configuring a Clock for a BTS

e. Activating the BTS Configuration

2. Configure the satellite BTS.

NOTEThe configuration data about boards, RXU, cells, and TRXs of the satellite BTS must beconsistent with that of the terrestrial BTS.

a. Configuring the Equipment Data

b. Configuring the Logical Data

c. Configuring the Transmission Data

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set BTSPort Detection Sequence to CUSTOMIZDE(Customized Sequence),Number of Customized Detection Types to 2, Preferential CustomizedDetection Type to TDME1_1(TDM E1 1 Port), and Subsidiary CustomizedDetection Type to TDME1_O(TDM E1 0 Port).

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, setTransmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

f. Configuring a Clock for a BTS

g. Activating the BTS Configuration


1. Use an MS to process a call.

NOTE

Ensure that the MS processes a call properly in terrestrial transmission mode and non-ring topologymode.

2. Remove the E1 cable from port 0 of the BTS to disconnect the terrestrial link betweenthe BTS and the BSC.

Expected result: The original call is interrupted and the BTS resets. The MS canprocess a call 10 minutes later.

l Deactivation ProcedureNone

----End



302

Example/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)*///Configuring the terrestrial BTS:ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Terrestrial", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="BTS3900_Terrestrial", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900;ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=0;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=1;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=2;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0", RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1", RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2", RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD GCELL:CELLID=5,CELLNAME="cell-11", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=1;ADD GCELL:CELLID=6,CELLNAME="cell-22", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=2;ADD GCELL:CELLID=7,CELLNAME="cell-33", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=3;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5, FREQ1=513,FREQ2=515;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6, FREQ1=517,FREQ2=519;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7, FREQ1=521,FREQ2=523;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=5, OPC=261;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=6, OPC=261;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=7, OPC=261;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,BTSID=9;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,BTSID=9;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,BTSID=9;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=9, FREQ=513, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=10, FREQ=515, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=11, FREQ=517, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=12, FREQ=519, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=13, FREQ=521, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=14, FREQ=523, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=9, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=10, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=11, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=12, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=13, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=14, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2";SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;



303

SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=9, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=10,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=11, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=12, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=13, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=14,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=0;ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=9;

//Configuring the satellite BTS:ADD BTS: BTSID=10, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Satellite", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="BTS3900_Satellite", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, MAINPORTNO=1, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900;ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=0;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=1;ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=2;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0", RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1", RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2", RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;ADD GCELL: CELLID=8, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=4;ADD GCELL: CELLID=9, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 2", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=5;ADD GCELL: CELLID=10, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 3", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=6;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8, FREQ1=514,FREQ2=516;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9, FREQ1=518,FREQ2=520;ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10, FREQ1=522,FREQ2=524;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=8, OPC=261;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, OPC=261;ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=10, OPC=261;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,BTSID=10;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,BTSID=10;ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,BTSID=10;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=15, FREQ=514, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=16, FREQ=516, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=17, FREQ=518, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=18, FREQ=520, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=19, FREQ=522, ISMAINBCCH=YES;ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=20, FREQ=524, ISMAINBCCH=NO;ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=15, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=16, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=17, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=18, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,



304

RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=19, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2";ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=20, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2";SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=15, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=16, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=17, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=18, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=19, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=20, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=1;SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SENDSAMBE=NO, ISSUPERBTS=YES, PROBESEQ=CUSTOMIZDE, PRIVATEPROBENUM=2, PRIVATEPROBEFST=TDME1_1, PRIVATEPROBESND=TDME1_O;SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=10;



305

92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725BSC Node Redundancy.


– This feature requires IP interface boards because the A, Gb, Abis, and Iur interfaces useIP transmission mode.

– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:

– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A overIP, GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

– The feature WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy Management - GBSS requires supportfrom the M2000.

l License


l IP transmission mode is used between the BSC and the CN and between the BSC and theBTS.

l A BTS is connected to the two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group through routersbecause the Abis interface does not support direct connections when BSC node redundancyis enabled.

l A single-homing BTS under two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group is configured onlyunder one of these BSCs. A dual-homing BTS is configured for these BSCs with one asprimary-homing and the other as secondary-homing.

l A BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs. Initial configuration is complete forBTSs and cells under the two BSCs and for originating point codes (OPCs) of the twoBSCs. The BTSs and cells work properly, and the connection between the two BSCs isnormal.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy


306

ContextBSC node redundancy allows two BSCs to form a BSC node redundancy group in an all-IPnetwork. In a BSC node redundancy group, the secondary BSC takes over voice and data servicesfrom the primary BSC when the primary BSC is faulty or when the transmission over the Ainterface is faulty. This improves the BSC reliability.

The BSC Node Redundancy feature has the following advantages:

l High equipment reliability. The BSC in a BSC node redundancy group uses 1+1 loadsharing mode. In this manner, a faulty BSC node does not decrease the system capacity,ensuring the equipment reliability.

l High transmission reliability. Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group establishconnections to the CN through their A interfaces using IP transmission. If the transmissionover the A interface for a single BSC is faulty, backup transmission over the A interface isprovided to ensure high transmission reliability.

The following figures show the A and Iur interface networking in the BSC node redundancyscenario.

l Figure 92-1 shows the A over IP networking.

Figure 92-1 A over IP networking

l Inter-BSC transmission and networking: An IP router is used for the transmission over the

Iur interface. A direct route between the BSCs and multiple alternative routes are required



307

to improve the reliability for inter-BSC fault detection. Data on each alternative route isforwarded by the access router for each MSC that is connected to the BSC node redundancygroup. See Figure 92-2.

Figure 92-2 Inter-BSC transmission and networking



308

NOTE

l The cell broadcast center (CBC) service does not support BSC node redundancy.

l Service migration for BSC node redundancy is supported only when the BSC is faulty or all signaling linksover the A interface are faulty.

l Calls may be interrupted for 10 to 20 minutes during service migration for BSC recovery or disasterredundancy recover.

l When BSC node redundancy is enabled, each BSC in a BSC node redundancy group can only be connectedto an MSC or a single MSC pool through cross connections.

l Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group support only built-in PCUs to implement disaster redundancyfor PS services.

l BSC node redundancy is not triggered if the transmission over the Abis interface is faulty.

BSC node redundancy can work in two modes:l Active/standby mode

– In this mode, all dual-homing BTSs take the same BSC (BSC1) as the primary-homingBSC (BSC1) and the same BSC (BSC2) as the secondary-homing BSC. If BSC1 isfaulty or the transmission over the A interface is faulty, BSC2 takes over services ofthe dual-homing BTSs under BSC1.

– BSC1 is configured with primary-homing signaling points and BSC2 is configured withsecondary-homing signaling points. The signaling points configured on BSC1 andBSC2 must be the same.

– If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homingsignaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.

l Load sharing mode– In this mode, some dual-homing BTSs take BSC1 as the primary-homing BSC and some

dual-homing BTSs take BSC2 as the secondary-homing BSC. If a BSC is faulty or thetransmission over the A interface is faulty, another BSC takes over services of the dual-homing BTSs under the faulty BSC.

– BSC1 and BSC2 are configured with both primary-homing signaling points andsecondary-homing signaling points. The primary-homing signaling points configuredon BSC1 must be the same as the secondary-homing signaling points configured onBSC2. Similarly, primary-homing signaling points configured on BSC2 must be thesame as the secondary-homing signaling points configured on BSC1.

– If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homingsignaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.

NOTE

If the ESN of BSC1 is ESN1 and the ESN of BSC2 is ESN2:

l Active/standby mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2.License2 is generated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2. A license file is generatedwhen license1 and license2 are combined together. The license file is loaded on both BSC1 andBSC2.

l Load sharing mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1. License2 isgenerated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN2. License1 is loaded on BSC1 and license2 isloaded on BSC2.

Data configuration for BSC node redundancy consists of the following steps: Configuring thesignaling point and signaling link over the A interface, configuring homing attributes for BTSs,configuring the link between BSCs, and configuring BSC node redundancy. This section usesthe BSC node redundancy in active/standby mode as an example. BSC node redundancy in loadsharing mode can be configured in a similar way.



309


1. Configure BSC1 data.

a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.

NOTE

To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signalingpoints. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC1. In this step, setOSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point dataformat, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type ofsignalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC1 to configure aDestination Signaling Point (DSP) for the primary-homing signaling point.In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point dataformat, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate values.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC1 to configure anM3UA local entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, setOSP index to the OSP index of the primary-homing signaling point.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC1 to configure anM3UA destination entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index of the primary-homing signalingpoint.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC1 to configurean M3UA link set for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, setDestination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the primary-homing signaling point.

f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC1 to configure anM3UA route for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, setDestination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of theprimary-homing signaling point.

g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1 to configurea Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) link for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set First local IP address, Firstdestination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to appropriatevalues.

h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC1 to configurean M3UA link for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, setSCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the primary-homing signalingpoint.

b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs



310

NOTE

l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that onBSC2.

l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSCMask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.

l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat thefollowing steps.

a. Add a BTS under BSC1. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC1. In this step, setHostType to PRIMHOST(Primary Host), and set Peer BTS ID, PeerBSC IP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.

c. Configure links between BSCsNOTE

When configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IPaddress for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IPaddress for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the sameas First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, LocalSCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP portNo./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple linksbetween BSCs.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1. In this step,set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Applicationtype to BBAP(BBAP).

b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, runthe BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC1 to configure the IProute from BSC1 to the intermediate device.

d. Configure BSC node redundancy.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 toconfigure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the sameas Peer BSC ID on BSC2, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSCID on BSC2.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC1. In this step, set ReHostType to an appropriate value.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 toactivate BSC node redundancy.

2. Configure BSC2 data.

a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.NOTE

To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signalingpoints. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC2. In this step, setOSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point dataformat, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type ofsignalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC2 to configure aDestination Signaling Point (DSP) for the secondary-homing signaling



311

point. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal pointdata format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriatevalues.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC2 to configure anM3UA local entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,set OSP index to the OSP index of the secondary-homing signaling point.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC2 to configure anM3UA destination entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index of the secondary-homing signalingpoint.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC2 to configurean M3UA link set for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the secondary-homing signaling point.

f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC2 to configure anM3UA route for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, setDestination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of thesecondary-homing signaling point.

g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2 to configurean SCTP link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, setFirst local IP address, First destination IP address, and DestinationSCTP port No. to appropriate values.

h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC2 to configurean M3UA link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, setSCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the secondary-homing signalingpoint.

b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs

NOTE

l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that onBSC2.

l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSCMask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.

l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat thefollowing steps.

a. Add a BTS under BSC2. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC2. In this step, setHostType to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host), and set Peer BTS ID, Peer BSCIP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.

c. Configure links between BSCs

NOTEWhen configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IPaddress for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IPaddress for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the sameas First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, LocalSCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP portNo./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple linksbetween BSCs.



312

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2. In this step,set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Applicationtype to BBAP(BBAP).

b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, runthe BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC2 to configure the IProute from BSC2 to the intermediate device.

d. Configure BSC node redundancy.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 toconfigure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the sameas Peer BSC ID on BSC1, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSCID on BSC1.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC2. In this step, set ReHostType to an appropriate value.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 toactivate BSC node redundancy.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 to query the homing

attribute of the dual-homing BTS.

Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing

attribute of the dual-homing BTS.

Expected result: The value of Hosted is No.3. Shut down the power supply for BSC1, wait for 15 minutes, and then run the

BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing attributeof the dual-homing BTS.

Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.4. Turn on the power switch for BSC1. After BSC1 starts, run the BSC6900 MML

command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.

Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes on BSC1 and is No on BSC2.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

Example/*Activating BSC Node Redundancy*//*Configuring BSC1 data*///Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface//ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST;ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";



313

ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="182.16.53.24", PEERIP1="182.16.53.25", PEERPN=6000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";//Configuring BTS homing attribute//SET BTSIP:BTSID=72, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.124", BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=172, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.69", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255", PEERBSCID=1, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;//Configuring a link between BSCs//ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=5000, LOCIP1="172.18.125.68", PEERIP1="172.18.125.69", PEERPN=58000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Configuring BSC node redundancy//SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=0, PeerBSCID=1;SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;

/*Configuring BSC2 data*///Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface//ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST;ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="182.16.53.25", PEERIP1="182.16.53.24", PEERPN=6000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";//Configuring BTS homing attribute//SET BTSIP:BTSID=172, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.69", BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=72, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.124", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255", PEERBSCID=0, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;//Configuring a link between BSCs//ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=58000, LOCIP1="172.18.125.69", PEERIP1="172.18.125.68", PEERPN=5000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Configuring BSC node redundancy//SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=0;SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;



314

93 Configuring TC Pool

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDMtransmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.

93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.

93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool


315

93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.


– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/OIUa board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.l License


l Other Prerequisites– Network Topology

– At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the twoBSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs isconfigured remotely.

– The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details onthe configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.

– Initial Data Preparation– The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.– The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Contextl To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC

pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only oneTC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.

l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC isonly configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to theTCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective

only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For detailson the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.


1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.



316

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool toYES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface TransferMode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSCto add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to addthe OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC toadd a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the mainBSC and TC subrack.

2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add anE1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAINBSC).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In thisstep, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool toYES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface TransferMode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TCPool.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to addan Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to addan Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specifiedin 3.1.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add anAter signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add anAter signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in3.1.

4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an Ainterface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB



317

BSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specifiedin 3.1.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to addan MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2(MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate.

Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC poolnetworking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.

l Verification Procedure1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag toMAINBSC(MAIN BSC).Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.

3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

----End

Examplel Configuration on the main BSC

//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interfaceSET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;//Configuring the Ater conpath or the Ater OMLADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=1;ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,



318

TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0;ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0;//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSCADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF, NAME="BM1";ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1";ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1";//Configuring the Ater E1T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;//Configuring the A E1/T1 for the sub-BSCADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;//congfiguring the semilink for the sub-BSCADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16, OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

l Configuration on the sub-BSC//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interfaceSET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;//Configuring the MTP3 links for the sub-BSCADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2,



319

TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2";ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";

93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.


– The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configuredEIUa/OIUa/POUc board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.l License


l Other Prerequisites– Network Topology

– At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the twoBSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs isconfigured remotely.

– The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details onthe configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.

– Initial Data Preparation– The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.– The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.– The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Contextl To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC

pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only oneTC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.

l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC isonly configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to theTCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.



320

l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effectiveonly when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For detailson the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.


1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool toYES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface TransferMode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSCto add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to addthe OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC toadd a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the mainBSC and TC subrack.

e. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP linkgroup).

– Add PPP link data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the TC subrack.

NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. Ifmultiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operationrepeatedly.

– Add MLPPP group data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the TC subrack.

NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time.If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the precedingoperation repeatedly.

f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.



321

g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. Inaddition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. Inaddition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add anE1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAINBSC).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In thisstep, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool toYES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface TransferMode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TCPool.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to addan E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TCconfig flag to CFGBM(BM).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to addan E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC configflag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add anAter signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add anAter signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

f. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP linkgroup).– Add PPP link data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the sub-BSC toadd a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.



322

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSCto add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

– Add MLPPP group data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the sub-BSC toadd an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC toadd an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the sub-BSC toadd an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the main BSC toadd an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.

g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the sub-BSC to add anAter interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.

h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the sub-BSC to add anIP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of theadjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATERInterface).

j. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC to add anIP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacentnode on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATERInterface).

4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an Ainterface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUBBSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to addan MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2



323

(MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in theTC pool.

Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC poolnetworking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.

l Verification Procedure1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag toMAINBSC(MAIN BSC).Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.

3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

----End

Examplel Configuration on the main BSC

//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interfaceSET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=IP;//Configuring the Ater conpath on the main BSCADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=1;//Configuring the Ater OML on the main BSCADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0;//Configuring the Ater CONSL ont the main BSCADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0;//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the BM side for the main BSCADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;



324

//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the TC side for the main BSCADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;//Configuring the Adjnode ong the BM side for the main BSCADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;//Configuring the Adjnode ong the TC side for the main BSCADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the main BSCADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the main BSCADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSCADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;//Configuring the MTP3 links on the main BSCADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF, NAME="BM1";//Configuring the MTP3 link on the main BSCADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1";//Configuring the MTP3 route on the main BSCADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1";//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the TC side for sub-BSCADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;//Configuring the adjnode on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the sub-BSCADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the sub-BSC



325

ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;//Configuring the semilink for the sub-BSCADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16, OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

l Configuration on the sub-BSC//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interfaceSET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;//Configuring the adjnode on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=BSC;//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the sub-BSCADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Configuring the MTP3 links on the sub-BSCADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";//Configuring the MTP3 link on the sub-BSCADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2";//Configuring the MTP3 route on the sub-BSCADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";



326

94 Configuring OML Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS isenabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OMLis disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.


– The BTS3900B, BTS3900E, and BTS3X series base station do not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology,GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP overE1/T1, or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.

– When this feature is enabled simultaneously with the GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aidfeature:– The value of Flex Abis Mode of the BTS must be set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).– TRX mutual aid is triggered by the active link. The static PDTCH on the active link

is unavailable due to transmission faults. Therefore, you are advised to change thestatic PDTCH to dynamic PDTCH.



l Other Prerequisites– This feature cannot be used together with the OML timeslot automatic detection.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 94 Configuring OML Backup


327

CAUTIONl The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP

transmission mode does not support this feature.l OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS main cabinet group support this feature. OMLs on other

ports of the main cabinet group and OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do notsupport this feature.

l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the sameE1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of an upper-level BTS. When the upper-levelBTS is connected to the BSC by using only one E1/T1 cable and the lower-level BTS requiresthe OML backup function, a secondary link must be added to directly connect the upper-level BTS or lower-level BTS to the BSC.

Contextl If the OML between the BSC and the BTS fails, the BTS cannot work. The OML Backup

feature allows a pair of OMLs to be configured on two independent E1 cables (one foreach). When the active OML is faulty, the BTS uses the standby OML. This prevents theBTS and cells from being out of service due to transmission failures or port failures.

l When this feature is used, one OML is configured on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS, respectively.After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If the BTSestablishes an OML on a port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is resetor the OML is disconnected. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts toestablish an OML on another port. If the OML is established successfully, the BSC triggersan OML switchover procedure.

l After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are notswitched over. That is, for ports 0 and 1, if the transmission link or port where the activeOML is located is faulty, all TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslotsconfigured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots, andmonitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, cells underthe BTS continue to provide services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, set

Configure Backup OML to YES(Yes) and set Wait Time before OML Switch andTry Switching Duration Time to appropriate values.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to query the value ofConfigure Backup OML.

Expected result: Configure Backup OML is set to YES, and other parameters areset based on configurations.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.



328

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, setConfigure Backup OML to NO(No).


----End

Example//Activating OML BackupDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Verifying OML BackupLST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Deactivating OML BackupDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=NO;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;



329

95 Configuring Adaptive TransmissionLink Blocking

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.


– The BSC6900 has been configured with an POUc, OIUa, or EIUa board that supportsTDM transmission.




ContextThe transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to badweather, leading to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate. To prevent thisproblem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The BSC automatically blocks anE1 link if the transmission quality of the E1 link is lower than the specified threshold. Afterbeing blocked, the E1 link carries no service. After the transmission quality of the E1 linkbecomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link. After being unblocked, the E1 link carriesservices.

WARNINGThis feature blocks an E1/T1 adaptively, leading to service interruption on the E1/T1.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking


330


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto IsolationSwitch set to ON(ON) and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3, RECOVERY:5E4) on the POUc/OIUa/EIUa board.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch setto ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3,RECOVERY:5E4).

NOTE

Step 1 and Step 2 uses an example for your reference only. Set High BER Auto IsolationThreshold and BER OOS Threshold based on the field configuration.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST E1T1 to query High BER Auto Isolation

Switch and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold.

Expected result: High BER Auto Isolation Switch is ON(ON) and High BER AutoIsolation Threshold is the same as that set in the activation procedure.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSE1T1BER to query BER OOSSwitch and BER OOS Threshold.

Expected result: BER OOS Switch is ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold is the sameas that set in the activation procedure.

3. Use the MS to make a call and wait for BER.

Expected result: The BER is higher than 1E-3.4. Log in to the LMT or M2000 to view the alarms reported in real time.

Expected result: An ALM-21207 E1/T1 Excessive Bit Error Rate alarm is reportedwith the cause value of BER within one minute exceeds the allowed limit. After 10seconds the alarm is reported, ongoing services are interrupted.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto Isolation

Switch set to OFF(OFF).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch set

to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSCSET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=ON, BERAUTOISOTHRD=O1E3_R5E4;//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTSSET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=ON, BEROOSTHD=O1E3_R5E4;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSC



331

SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=OFF;//Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTSSET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=OFF;



332

96 Configuring Automatic FrequencyCorrection (AFC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).


– The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.– Only the RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the AFC function for downlink.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115821 EICC,

GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution.l License


ContextAFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. Itensures reliability of radio links carrying high-quality speech services for MSs moving at 500km/h and also ensures service continuity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT.

If... Then...

The AFC function needs to be enabledin the uplink

Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch toYES(Yes).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)


333

If... Then...

The AFC function needs to be enabledin the downlink

Set both UL Frequency AdjustSwitch and DL Frequency AdjustSwitch to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT.

If... Then...

The value of UL Frequency AdjustSwitch is YES(Yes)

The AFC function is enabled in theuplink.

The values of both UL FrequencyAdjust Switch and DL FrequencyAdjust Switch are YES(Yes)

The AFC function is enabled in thedownlink.

2. Make a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the navigation tree,

choose Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed dialogbox, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, check the value of Uplink ReceiveQuality in the measurement report. If the AFC function has been activated, the valueof Uplink Receive Quality decreases.

NOTEUplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report. Thevalue ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates good quality, for example, 0 indicates thatthe quality is the best. A large value indicates poor quality, for example, 7 indicates that thequality is the worst.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL

Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES;//Verifying Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0;//Deactivating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)


334

97 Configuring Fast Move Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102Fast Move Handover.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.

l License


Context

Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from thecoverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must beinitiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radiointerface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the currentalgorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set QuickHandover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set QuickMove Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick HandoverDown Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time,Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number,Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement ReportNumber, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover DirectionForecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover


335

Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriatevalues.

NOTE

You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query information about theneighboring cells of this cell.

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, andQuick Handover Punish Value to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set ULFrequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement

report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speedof the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offsetinformation fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, theuplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, thedownlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down TriggerLevel, and the path loss of configured chain neighboring cells is lower than thespecified threshold of the path loss of the serving cell.

2. On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC with thehandover cause value "better-cell".

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick

Handover Enable set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Fast Move HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES;SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255;//Deactivating Fast Move HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover


336

98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103Chain Cell Handover.





l License


Context

This feature enables fast-moving MSs to move in chain cells by predicting the moving directionand thereby increases the handover success rate and improves service quality.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to add a neighboring cell. Inthis step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). If a cell has been added as aneighboring cell, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step,set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboringcell) and Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query the value of ChainNeighbor Cell.Expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover


337

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set ChainNeighbor Cell to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Chain Cell HandoverADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES;//Verifying Chain Cell HandoverLST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542;//Deactivating Chain Cell HandoverMOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover


338

99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104Multi-Site Cell.


– The base station must be DBS3900.– Table 99-1 shows the hardware for supporting this feature.

Table 99-1 Dependencies on hardware

TRX/Subsite xSubsite

GTMU Type RF Module CPRI Rate (Gbit/s)

O6*12O8*9O9*8O10*6

GTMUb RRU3004RRU3008 V1RRU3908 V1

Equal to or greaterthan 1.25

O6*6 GTMU andGTMUb

All types of RRUs Equal to or greaterthan 1.25

NOTE

Oa*b indicates a TRXs/subsites x b subsites. For example, O8*30 indicates 8 TRXs/subsites x 30subsites.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with any of the followings: GBFD-115830

VAMOS, GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-111604Intelligent Combiner Bypass, GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on ChannelType, GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation, GBFD-118701RAN Sharing, GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping,GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell,MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM), GBFD-118104 Enhanced

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell


339

EDGE Coverage, GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing, GBFD-118106 DynamicPower Sharing (The multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with dual-PA powersharing), and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) (Themulti-site cell feature cannot be used together with cross-module RF hopping)

l License


Context

The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Suchcell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multipleRRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels,or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency,and therefore improve user experience.

l In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured.

l A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boardsthat are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the primary subsitewith Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set toYES(YES).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the secondary subsitewith Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO(NO).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to theprimary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No.,and Slot No..

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to thesecondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., SubrackNo., and Slot No..

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP to bind a carrier inthe primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite afterspecifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, CabinetNo., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..

NOTE

l This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the primary subsite and those inthe secondary subsite are the same.

l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Directly MagnifierBTS Flag set to YES(Yes).

7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT.



340

If... Then...

Only the power amplifier for the carriersunder the operating subsite needs to bestarted,

Set Location Group Power Switch toOnlyCurPwrLoc(Only CurrentWorking Location TRXes be TurnedOn).

The power amplifier for carriers underall subsites needs to be started,

Set Location Group Power Switch toALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes beTurned On).


1. Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messagesof a Single Subscriber in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.

2. Use the MS to call a phone in the test subsite.3. Check the result of CS single user tracing.

The expected result: The location group no carried in the Channel Activationmessage is the test location group number.


----End

Example//Activation procedure ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES; ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRMAGANSITEFLAG=YES;



341

100 Configuring Satellite Transmissionover Abis Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.



– This feature cannot be used with the following feature: GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.l License


l Other PrerequisitesThe cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.To ensure the normal processing of PS services in satellite transmission mode, the GPRSparameters related to a PS cell need to be set as follows: T3168 is set to 1000ms, T3192to 1000ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 15.

Context

Using satellite transmission over Abis interface enables operators to deploy BTSs in areas thatare difficult to reach through conventional terrestrial transmission, therefore solving thecommunication problem in these areas. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longerdelay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission

Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface


342

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS. In this step, setRSL LAPD Window Size to an appropriate value based on the actual delay.

NOTE

RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be flexibly configured by operatorsbased on the actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,set T200 SDCCH to 100, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 100, and T200 SDCCHSAPI3 to 200. Operators can adjust the settings of these parameters based on the actualdelay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,set MS MAX Retrans to an appropriate value.

NOTE

Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and adjustingMS MAX Retrans to a smaller value lightens the load of the RACH and SDCCH.


7. Configuring a Clock for a BTS.

NOTE

If the BTS has a difficulty in using the original clock, run the BSC6900 MML command SETBTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell.Expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes.

2. Use the MS to initiate a call.

3. Initiate CS domain message tracing on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CSDomain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call is traced.

4. Connect the MS to the network through dial-up and then enable the MS to perform aPING service. The service succeeds.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission).

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,set T200 SDCCH to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to60. Adjust settings of these parameters based on the actual delay over the Abisinterface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,set MS MAX Retrans to 2_Times(2_Times). Adjust MS MAX Retrans to anappropriate value.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set T3168 to 500ms, T3192 to 500ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 10.


----End



343

Example/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*///Deactivating a BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Setting a transmission modeSET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;//Setting a clock modeSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK, TRANSTYPE=E1, PN=0;//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*///Deactivating the BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Setting a transmission modeSET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS;//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;



344

101 Configuring Satellite Transmissionover A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902Satellite Transmission over A Interface.


– The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured.



l License



The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normalstate and has idle channels.

Context

Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrialtransmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where anemergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backuptransmission means).

If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellitetransmission over the Ater interface.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the Ainterface.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface


345

NOTE

An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 hastwenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC.For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 mustbelong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configuredE1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used,Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24.When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pairof originating and destination signaling points must be unique.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset on the A interface.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to YES(YES) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route on the Ainterface.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3

signaling link.Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.

3. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the AInterface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messageson the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the AbisInterface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can beseen.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 signaling

link.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to NO

(NO) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.

----End

Example/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*///Configuring the A interface E1/T1ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;//Configuring an MTP3 link set over the A interfaceADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="SATTRAN";//Configuring an MTP3 link over the A interfaceADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1, LKTATE=64K, STFLG=YES NAME="0";//Configuring an MTP3 route over the A interfaceADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="SAT";/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*///Removing an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to YES(YES)RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1;//Adding an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to NO(NO)ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0,



346

ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1, LKTATE=64K, STFLG=NO NAME="1";



347

102 Configuring Satellite Transmissionover Ater Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.


– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other PrerequisitesThe initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normalstate and has idle channels.

ContextIn BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Aterinterface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.

If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellitetransmission over the Ater interface.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Aterconnection path between the MPS and the TCS.

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface


348

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 with Transmission Mode set to

SATEL(Satellite Transmission) to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb interface.

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL with WindowSize set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay.

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command.

The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater

signaling link.Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL with Transmission Mode set to

TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

----End

Example/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*///Adding an Ater connection pathADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=0;//Adding an Ater OMLADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding an Ater signaling link with Transmission Mode set to SATEL(Satellite Transmission)ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=SATEL;/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*///Modifying the transmission mode of the Ater signaling linkMOD ATERCONSL: ATERSLID=0, TNMODE=TRRS;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface


349

103 Configuring Satellite Transmissionover Gb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.


– The DPUb board is configured.l Dependencies on Other Features




1. The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is thesame as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface.For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the GbInterface (over IP).

l Verification Procedure1. After an NSE is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query

the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting ofSIG BVC State.Expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVCworks properly.

2. After a PTP BVC is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to querythe state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State.Expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set toNormal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface


350


----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script example of the Gb interface configuration in the InitialConfiguration.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface


351

104 Configuring Local MultipleSignaling Points

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301Local Multiple Signaling Points.



– This feature does not depend on other features.l Dependency on License


l Other prerequisites– Multiple OSPs are configured.– Multiple DSPs are configured.– The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is

Available.

ContextThe local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logicalBSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load isdistributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.

CAUTIONThe original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoingBSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points areconfigured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time areincreased.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points


352


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC repeatedly to add the OSPs. Theparameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent.OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must bedifferent from DSP Codes.

NOTE

l The OSP code of OSPs must be different from each other. They must also be different from theDSP code of DSPs with the same Network ID.

l The OSP code bits of systems with the same Network ID must be the same.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC repeatedly to add the desired DSPs.In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.

NOTE

After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take theestablishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you needto add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is thesignaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC areestablished.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logical

BSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according tonetwork planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical linkbetween the OSP and DSP.

NOTE

If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, the OSP index needs to be set tothe OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to networkplanning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IPtransmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3and M3UA).

3. Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, thenthe MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear typeis M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, andM3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 beartype as an example.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set betweenthe OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical linkbetween the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specifiedin Step 4.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from theOSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in directconnection or transfer manner.



353

NOTE

In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP indexcorresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSPindex in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configuredin Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transferfunctionality.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSPconfigured in Step 2.

Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.l Deactivation Procedure

NOTE

You are advised to remove traffic data and then DPCs and OPCs.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove a DPC.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove an OPC.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Adding an OPCADD OPC: NAME="opc1", SPX=0, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111;//Adding a DPCADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=222, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Removing a DPCRMV N7DPC: DPX=1;//Removing an OPCRMV OPC: SPX=0;



354

105 Configuring Semi-PermanentConnection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701Semi-Permanent Connection.





l Other Prerequisites– The BTS3900B does not support this feature.

ContextAfter a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslotat the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslotswitching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmittedin the BSC.

Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection:

l Semi-permanent linkThe input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. Inthis case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the outputtimeslot.

l Monitoring timeslotOne end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the otherend of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC togetherperform timeslot switching.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection


355


– Activating a semi-permanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK to add a semi-permanentlink in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER) andSemipermanent Link Rate to an appropriate value as required.

NOTE

In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set based on networkplanning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.

– Activating a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS to add a monitoringtimeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate to an appropriate value based on the siterequirements.

NOTE

If the transmission mode of a BTS is IP over FE/GE, the BTS does not monitoring timeslots.

l Verification Procedure– Verifying a semipermanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to query the state of a semi-permanent link.

Expected result: The value of State is OK.– Verifying a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to query the state ofa monitoring timeslot.

Expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.l Deactivation Procedure

– Deactivating a semi-permanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK to remove a semi-permanent link.

– Deactivating a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS to remove amonitoring timeslot from a BTS.

----End

Example//Activating a semi-permanent link ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=OTHER, LNKRATE=16K, INSRN=1, INSN=14, INPN=0, INTSN=10, OUTSRN=1, OUTSN=14, OUTPN=2, OUTTSN=20;//Activating a monitoring timeslot ADD BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSRATE=16K, BSCSRN=0, BSCSN=26, BSCPN=6, BSCTS=10, BSCSUBTS=6, STPN=7, STCN=0, STSRN=0, STSN=6, STTS=10, STSUBTS=2;//Verifying a semipermanent link DSP SEMILINK: IDX=0;//Verifying a monitoring timeslot LST BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;



356

//Deactivating a semi-permanent link RMV SEMILINK: IDX=0;//Deactivating a monitoring timeslot RMV BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;



357

106 Configuring End-to-End MSSignaling Tracing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.


– This feature requires support from the MSC and M2000.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– This feature requires support from the MSC.– The M2000 feature WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing and

WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing have been enalbed.

ContextThe end-to-end MS signaling tracing function creates or removes a user tracing task in the HLR.The HLR sends a tracing activation message to the MSC or VLR where the MS is located. Whenthe traced MS requests services, the MSC instructs the BSC to start user tracing. After the MSmoves to another MSC and initiates location update, the HLR sends a new tracing activationmessage to the new VLR. The original user tracing task ends.

By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect information abouta specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. Byrecording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs,facilitating fault handling.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing


358


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportEnd-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to check the value of

Support End-to-end User Tracing Function.

Expected result: Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is set to YES(Yes).2. On the M2000, choose Monitor > Signaling Trace > Signaling Trace

Management from the main menu. In the navigation tree, double-click 2G End-to-End User Trace.

Expected result: A 2G End-to-End User Trace dialog box is displayed.3. In the 2G End-to-End User Trace window, select User ID type from the drop-down

list and enter the user ID. Then click OK.

Expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signalingtracing.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support

End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*///Enabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing functionSET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES, AInterMsgTrace=YES, SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=YES;

/*Deactivating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*///Disabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing functionSET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=NO, AInterMsgTrace=NO, SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing


359

107 Configuring Active Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602Active Power Control.





l License


ContextActive Power Control enables the immediate performance of power control after an MSsuccessfully gains access to the network or a handover is successfully performed in the BSC. Insuch a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. Therefore, both theBTS and the MS transmit signals at a proper power. With the active power control, the systeminterference is decreased, the QoS is ensured, and the power consumption of the MS or BTS isdecreased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set ULPC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step,specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control


360

2. Perform the single user CS trace by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of aSingle Subscriber in cell 0.

3. Make a call.4. Check the result in Single User CS Trace window.

Expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. TheTCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Resultmessage regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message isdelivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the ChannelActivation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cellis 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Forecast Allowed.Expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to NO.

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control


361

108 Configuring Ciphering

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.





l Other Prerequisites– The MSC and the MS supports ciphering.

ContextThere are eight ciphering algorithms specified in the GSM protocols: A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3,A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7. In A5/0, ciphering is not supported. In A5/1, A5/2, and A5/3, safetyof CS and PS data of a user transmitted over the air interface is guaranteed.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A InterfaceTag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setEncryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.

NOTE

l This procedure takes A5/3 as an example. The configuration procedures of other cipheringalgorithms are similar as this procedure.

l A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering


362

NOTE

The verification procedures take A5/3 as an example.


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.

3. Double-click A Interface Trace on the LMT to create a trace task. On the Basic tabpage, specify the DPC of the test cell in the DPC(HEX) text box. Click BSSAP inthe Trace Type area. Specify the ID of the test cell in the Cell ID (cell1,cell2, ...cell16): text box in the BSSAP tab page. Then, click Submit.

4. After opening the A interface tracing window, use the MS to initiate a call in the testcell.

Expected result: The call is set up, and the IE chosen-encryption-algorithm in theCipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell

Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Setting Interface Tags SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;//Setting ciphering algorithms SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-1&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;/*Deactivation procedure*/ //Setting Encryption Algorithm to A5/0SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-0&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering


363

109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption FlowOptimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.


– None


– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l License



– The A5/1 encryption algorithm has been enabled. For details, see 108 ConfiguringCiphering.

– The MSC and MSs support encryption.

Context

Based on features related to transmission over the Um interface, the A5/1 Encryption FlowOptimization feature provides an optimized encryption procedure, enhancing networktransmission security. This feature provides several security functions, which can be enabled asrequired.


– Activating SDCCH fast handover

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with SDCCH HOAllowed set to YES(Yes).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization


364

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set to ON(On).

– Activating TCH scheduled handoverRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Intracell HOAllowed set to YES(Yes).Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time HandoverSwitch set to ON(On) and TCH Time Handover Period set to a required value.

– Activating Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC)Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set toON(On).

– Activating dummy bit randomizationRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy BitRandomization Switch set to ON(On).

– Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter afterencryptionRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5terafter Encrypt set to ON(On).

l Verification Procedure– Verifying SDCCH fast handover

1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface byreferring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.Expected result: The Handover Performed message is displayed.

– Verifying TCH scheduled handover

1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface byreferring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.Expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the Handover Performedmessage can be observed after the call lasts for a period specified by TCH TimeHandover Period.

– Verifying Flex TSC

1. Use an MS to initiate a call, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface,and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.

2. Terminate the call.3. Use an MS to initiate a call again, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um

Interface, and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.4. Compare the two TSC values.

Expected result: The two TSC values are different.– Verifying dummy bit randomization

1. Use an MS to initiate multiple calls, Tracing LAPDm Messages Through BTSSignaling Trace, and select the TRX carrying the SDCCH on the LAPDm tab.Then, enter the number of the timeslot or sub-timeslot to be traced.Expected result: When a call is assigned to the traced SDCCH, the lapdm-rr-frameinformation element contained in the MailBox Trace message shows that not alldummy bits are 2B. This indicates that dummy bits are randomized.

– Verifying the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter afterencryption



365

1. Use an MS to initiate a call, and use a drive test device to trace messages over theUm interface.Expected result: System information 5, 5bis, or 5ter is not found in the messagestransmitted over the Um interface.


– Deactivating SDCCH fast handoverRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set toOFF(Off).

– Deactivating TCH scheduled handoverRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time HandoverSwitch set to OFF(Off).

– Deactivating Flex TSCRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set toOFF(Off).

– Deactivating dummy bit randomizationRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy BitRandomization Switch set to OFF(Off).

– Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter afterencryptionRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5terafter Encrypt set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example/*Activating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*///Activating SDCCH fast handoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SIGCHANHOEN=YES;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON; //Activating TCH scheduled handoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTRACELLHOEN=YES;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=ON, TCHTIMEHOPERIOD=60;//Activating Flex TSCSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=ON; //Activating dummy bit randomizationSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=ON; //Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryptionSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=ON;/*Deactivating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/ //Deactivating SDCCH fast handoverSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating TCH scheduled handoverSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating Flex TSCSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating dummy bit randomizationSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryptionSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=OFF;



366

110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate(EFR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).





l Others

– The MS is supported the EFR.

Context

The EFR is used to improve voice quality.

NOTE

In A over IP mode, EFR and E-Coder cannot be enabled forcibly as the current speech version.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, selectthe FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2) check box under the parameter SpeechVersion for the specified cell.

2. Optional: To enable EFR forcibly as the current speech version, run the BSC6900MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Allow Forced EFR in Cell toYES(Yes).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)


367

3. To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, run theBSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, specify the subrack numberand slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and set CodingMode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the setting

of Speech Version in the cell.

Expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.l Deactivation Procedure

The feature does not need to be deactivated. At least one speech version must be configuredfor the BSC6900. Therefore, the deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you canrun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speechversion.

----End

Example//Activating EFRSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER2-1;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)


368

111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 HalfRate Speech (HR).





ContextThis feature enables the operator to expand the network capacity and improve the frequencyusage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, a higher traffic volume can becarried on an E1.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML Command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1),HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), andHALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER2) of Speech Version is reserved for compliance with protocols. Currently, no serviceuses HR speech version 2.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to view the setting of

Speech Version of a specified cell.

Expected result: The activated speech versions are labeled USED.l Deactivation Procedure

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)


369

At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, thedeactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech version.

----End

Example//Activating half rate speech (HR)SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)


370

112 Configuring Dynamic AdjustmentBetween FR and HR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.




– The feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License



– The cell is not a concentric cell and works properly.

– The CN, cell, and MS all support this feature.

Context

With this feature, full-rate channels (TCHFs) and half-rate channels (TCHHs) are dynamicallyconverted to meet the requirements of calls in a cell. This prevents the situation in which onetype of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want toconfigure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow of a TRX to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set the threshold fordynamic adjustment between TCHHs and TCHFs.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR


371

NOTE

For non-AMR calls in a common cell, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriatevalue based on the actual requirement. For non-AMR calls in a concentric cell whose Load ofUL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed is enabled, set Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold andTch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold to appropriate values. For AMR calls in common cellsand concentric cells, set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to an appropriate valuebased on the actual requirement.In channel assignment algorithms, the BSC6900 determines whether to assign TCHHs orTCHFs based on the traffic volume of the network. If the channel seizure ratio exceeds TCHTraffic Busy Threshold, the network is busy. If the network is busy, TCHHs are assignedpreferentially. If the network is not busy, TCHFs are assigned preferentially.


The following procedure takes the non-AMR calls in a common cell as an example.

1. Monitor channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH

Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assignedTCHHs.

3. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.A TCHF is converted into two TCHHs and are occupied by MSs.

4. Terminate the call.Expected result: The TCHHs are not converted into a TCHF.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHFs in the cell.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCHTraffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assignedTCHFs.

NOTE

In Step 6, if the calling party and the called party camp on the same cell, reserve a TCHF toensure successful setup of the call.

7. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.The MS occupies a TCHF.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want to

configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the setting of TCH

Rate Adjust Allow.

Expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.

----End

Example//Activating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HRSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=50;



372

//Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HRSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=NO;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=NO;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=NO;



373

113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast

About This Chapter

Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messagesin the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells canreceive the short messages.

113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).

113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell BroadcastThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602Simplified Cell Broadcast.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast


374

113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast(TS23)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).


– An XPUa/XPUb board is configured.


– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified CellBroadcast.

l License



– The Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) works properly.

– The hardware and software of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipmentare installed.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributesfor a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN to add the VLAN attributes ofthe XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLANattributes at the BSC6900 that is connected to the CBC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT to set the attributes of ports onthe XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR to add CBC information. Inthis step, specify CBC INDEX, and set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operatorto which the cell to be verified belongs, Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSCIP to those of the XPU board added by running the ADD XPUVLAN command. Inaddition, specify BSC Port, Mask, and CBC Port, and set BSC GateWay IP to thegateway IP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, and If CB ShakeHand to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set TRX and channelattributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCHTRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH).



375

NOTEIf Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of anyTRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.

6. Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and dividecells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.

l Verification Procedure1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN

(Open). Then, Ensure that the IP address of this port can be pinged.Expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works properly.

2. Use an MS enabled with the CBC function to access the network in different cells,and initiate message tracing on the BSC-CBC(Cb interface) and Abis interfaces.Expected result:In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH QueryResponse are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message andReport are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.The SMS Broadcast Command message is traced on the Abis interface.The MS properly receives the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set

Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV XPUVLAN. In this step, remove the VLAN

attributes of the XPU board add in step2.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCBSADDR. In this step, remove CBC

information add in step4.

----End

Example/*Activating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*///Enabling cell broadcastMOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD;//Setting the VLAN attributes of the XPU boardADD XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, MAC=0, IP="10.161.72.185", NETMASK="255.255.255.0";//Setting attributes of the port on the XPU boardSET XPUPORT: SRN=0, SN=0, PortSwitch=OPEN;//Adding CBC informationADD GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0, OPINDEXSET=OPINDEX0-1&OPINDEX1-0&OPINDEX2-0&OPINDEX3-0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPUN=1, BSCIP="10.161.72.185", BSCPORT=5000, BSCGATEWAYIP="19.168.6.1", CBCIP="19.168.6.20", MASK="255.255.255.0", CBCPORT=6000;//Setting TRX parametersSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;/*Deactivating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*///Disabling cell broadcastMOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;//Remove the VLAN attributes of the XPU boardRMV XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1;//Remove CBC informationRMV GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0;



376

113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell BroadcastThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602Simplified Cell Broadcast.


– The XPUa/XPUb board is configured.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message ServiceCell Broadcast (TS23).



ContextThe simplified cell broadcast feature provides the simple cell broadcast services without theCBC system.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support CellBroadcast set to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB) to modify the attributes ofa GSM operator.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify ChannelNo., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified andChannel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH).

NOTEIf Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of anyTRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.

3. Send cell broadcast messages.– Sending a specified message without any restrictions

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell BroadcastName to YES(Yes). In addition, specify Chan ID, Geography Scope,Broadcast Interval, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Content.

– Sending a specified message at a specified time and with a specified number oftransmissions

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set CellIndex List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope toLAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, specifyRepeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to the



377

specified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content ofMessage as required.

NOTE

l Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time ofthe OMU.

l When Repeat is set to 60, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater thanone hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted for60 times.

l Verification Procedure1. Create an Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT. Set the same channel on

the MS side as the channel specified by Chan ID in Step 3 (the setting proceduredepends on the MS brand).Expected result: The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abisinterface. The MS can receive the Content of Message specified in Step 3.

NOTE

Content of Message set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time.Content of Message set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only withinthe specified time period.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell

Broadcast set to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Supporting Simple Cell BroadcastMOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE;//Setting TRX and channel attributesSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;////Sending cell broadcast messages.SET GCELLSBC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES, GS=LAC_CI, CHANID=0, SCHEME=ENGLISH, BROADCASTCONTENT="Happy", BROADCASTINTERVAL=60;/*Deactivation procedure*///Not supporting Cell BroadcastMOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;



378

114 Configuring Automatic LevelControl (ALC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601Automatic Level Control (ALC).




This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702TrFO.

l License

The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate thelicense, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overviewof Feature Activation Guide.


TDM transmission is used over the A interface.

Context

The ALC feature adjusts the gains of uplink and downlink digital speech signals and changesthe amplitude of digital speech signals at an interval of 20 ms. This retains the speech signallevel in the entire network in a stable state and ensures that the speech quality is not affected bythe volume fluctuation of both parties.


– If the fixed level mode is required, perform the following operations:

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch toON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix TargetLevel to its recommended value for the DPU board.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)


379

NOTE

If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set, it can be set as required.

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a greater value. Its maximumvalue is -4. To decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a smaller value. Itsminimum value is -23.

– If the fixed gain mode is required, perform the following operations:

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch toON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to itsrecommended value for the DPU board.

NOTE

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12. To decrease the acoustic volume, setALC Fix Gain to 3.

– If the adaptive mode is required, perform the following operations:

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch toON(On) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode) on the DPU board. Inaddition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to theirrecommended values.

l Verification ProcedureThe following takes the fixed gain mode as an example to describe the verificationoperations.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch ofall the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixedgain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0.

2. Run the BSC6900MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all theparameters set in Step 1 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previouscommands are executed successfully.

3. In the same cell, use MS1 to call MS2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch ofall the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixedgain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all theparameters set in Step 4 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previouscommands are executed successfully.

6. Use MS1 to call MS2 again. Speak with a normal volume on MS1.

Expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with the volumeheard in Step 3.

NOTE

The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gainmode). Similar verification steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixedgain mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch toOFF(Off) for the DPU board.

----End



380

Example//Activating ALC when the fixed level mode is usedSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDLEVEL, AlcFixLev=-18;//Activating ALC when the fixed gain mode is usedSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDGAIN, AlcFixGain=0;//Activating ALC when the adaptive mode is used)SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=ADAPTIVE, AlcMaxLev=-4, AlcMinLev=-23;//Deactivating ALCSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=OFF;



381

115 Configuring Acoustic EchoCancellation (AEC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).


This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features

This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702TrFO.

l LicenseThe license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate thelicense, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overviewof Feature Activation Guide.

l Other PrerequisitesA over TDM transmission is used.

ContextThe AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, improving the speech quality.

Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver.After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to PartyA through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known asacoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminatedby means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to ON(On) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)


382

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF(Off) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.

2. Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acousticecho occurs, and then hand off the call.

NOTE

The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placedin a sealing box.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch of the DPUboard on the test BSC set to ON(On) and other parameters set to their default values.

4. Run the MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set instep Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands areexecuted successfully.

5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced.If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification.

If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET TCPARA with AEC Echo Return Loss set to a smaller value withinthe valid range. If AEC Echo Return Loss is already set to the smallest value, setAEC Echo Path Delay to a greater value. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether theechoes are reduced.

NOTE

l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-line phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side.

l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must beset, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF

(Off) for the DPU board.

----End

Example//Activating AECSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=ON;//Deactivating AECSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)


383

116 Configuring Automatic NoiseRestraint (ANR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).



l Dependencies on Other FeaturesWhen a call uses the Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) feature, ALC is mutually exclusiveto features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.



Context

ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink speech signals and improves the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearlyhear the voice.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), Noise Suppression AlgorithmSwitch to MODE1(Optimized version), and Noise Attenuation Mode, NoiseSuppression Mode, and Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev set toappropriate values for the DPU board.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)


384

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPson the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).

2. Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make acall to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heardthrough the MS 2, and then hand off the call.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPson the DPU board to be tested set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(Onfor dnlink).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all theparameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previouscommands are executed successfully.

5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, andcheck that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs

on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating ANRSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=UPLINK, AnrMode=MODE1, AnrNseReductMode=RELATIVELEVEL, AnrNseReductLev=RELATIVE_2, AnrByPassNseLev=-43;//Deactivating ANRSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)


385

117 Configuring TFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701TFO.



– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic LevelControl (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation(ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC),GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-117702BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-115702 TrFO, orGBFD-118602 A over IP.



l Others PrerequisitesTDM transmission is used over the A interface.

ContextTFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding bycanceling one encoding and decoding process to improve the signal quality.

To enable TFO for calls using the AMR speech version, the BSC version and BTS version mustmeet the mapping relationship in the following table.

BSC Version BTS Version Support TFO for Calls UsingAMR

GBSS8.1 GBSS8.1 Support

GBSS8.1 GBSS9.0 and later Not support

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 117 Configuring TFO


386

GBSS9.0 and later GBSS8.1 Not support

GBSS9.0 and later GBSS9.0 and later Support

To enable TFO for calls using the non-AMR speech version, there is no requirements for themapping between the BSC version and BTS version.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch to ENABLE(Enable).

2. Configure the speech version by performing the following operations:

– For non-AMR services:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), or HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1).

– For AMR services:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set AInterface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, set Um Interface Tag toGSM_PHASE_2Plus , set Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus .

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) andFULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), or FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, setAMR ACS[F] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S, 7_40KBIT/S, and12_2KBIT/S, or set AMR ACS[H] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S,7_40KBIT/S.


NOTE

The following describes how to verify the TFO function for non-AMR services.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic BusyThreshold set to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned full-rateTCHs.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, only setSpeech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).

NOTE

Only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) is selected, two test MSs use the same FRcoding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

4. Use MS1 and MS2 to access the network from the test cell, and use MS1 to call MS2.



387

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User IdentityType to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO not start in the Query Result area.

6. Terminate the call.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO

Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).8. Use MS1 to call MS2 again.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity

Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO start in the Query Result area. If thevalue of Tfo State is TFO start and the speech quality improves, TFO has beenenabled.

NOTE

Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover is not performed during the call when verifyingTFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed after such a handover.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO

Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example//Activating TFO/*Activating TFO for non-AMR services*/SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;/*Activating TFO for AMR services*/SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-0&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-0&7_40KBIT/S-1&7_95KBIT/S-0&10_2KBIT/S-0&12_2KBIT/S-1;//Deactivating TFOSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE;



388

118 Configuring Automatic NoiseCompensation (ANC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).


The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally.l Dependencies on Other Features

When a call uses the Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) feature, ALC is mutuallyexclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.




1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch toON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended valuesfor the DPU board.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and

Slot No. to those of the DPU board, and set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).2. Place MS1 in a noisy place, and then use MS2 to call MS1.

Expected result: MS2 cannot hear the voice of MS1 clearly.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and

Slot No. to those of the DPU board. Then, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set ANCTarget SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)


389

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check the values of ANCSwitch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain.Expected result: The value of ANC Switch is ON, which indicates that the ANCfeature is enabled.

5. Use MS2 to call MS1 again.Expected result: The voice of MS1 is clearer.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to

OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating ANCSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=ON, AncSnrGateRS=12, AncMaxGain=6;

//Deactivating ANCSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)


390

119 Configuring Enhancement PacketLoss Concealment (EPLC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).



– The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated:GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 Enhanced FullRate.

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO,GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch orGBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.



ContextWith EPLC, frames of lost packets can be recovered and compensated. To a certain extent, thishelps solve the problem of speech frame loss in a poor transmission or radio environment, therebyimproving the network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of

Speech Version.


119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment(EPLC)


391

Expected result: At least one of Full-rate VER 2, Full-rate VER 3, and Half-rateVER 3 is selected for Speech Version.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toOFF(Off) and retain the default values of other parameters.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configurationinformation about the TC.Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is Off.

4. Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplinkreceive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configurationinformation about the TC.Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is On.

7. Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplinkreceive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.

8. Compare the MOSs recorded in Step 4 and Step 7.Expected result: The MOS recorded in Step 7 is greater than that recorded in Step4.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to

OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating EPLCSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=ON;//Deactivating EPLCSET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=OFF;


119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment(EPLC)


392

120 Configuring EVAD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115711EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.


– The DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board is configured and functional.


– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink and GBFD-115501 AMR FR/GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113301Enhanced Full Rate.

– This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-117701 BSC LocalSwitch, and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

l License


Context

The enhanced VAD technology improves the encoding effect of music and prevents damage tomusic by the traditional VAD algorithm.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA, in this step, set EVAD Switchto ON(On) on the DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board.


1. Use a UE to initiate and set up a call.

2. Have the called UE play the ring back tone (RBT).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 120 Configuring EVAD


393

Expected result: The music received by the UE is smooth and with a good voicequality.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with EVAD Switch to OFF

(Off).

----End

Example//Activating EVADSET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=ON;//Deactivating EVADSET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 120 Configuring EVAD


394

121 Configuring Voice Quality Index(VQI)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801Voice Quality Index (VQI).



– The feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) has been configuredbefore this feature is activated.



l Others Prerequisites– The cell is configured with neighboring cells.– The BTS of the cell supports downlink VQI.

ContextThe VQI establishes the mapping between radio network performance and voice quality. TheVQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the radio qualityparameters for the uplink and downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is applied inVQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of middle-rate and low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5.

Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. TheVQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the uplink anddownlink speech signals. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate voiceproblem identification and network optimization.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)


395


– Activating downlink VQI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set ReportDownlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable).

NOTEVQI is recorded in a measurement report if only Report Downlink VQI Allowed is set toENABLE(Enable) and a voice service is processed. The downlink VQI value is 255 when theMS does not support enhanced measurement reports or Measurement Report Type is not setto EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).

– Activating uplink VQI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, setVoice quality report switch to YES(Report).


– Verifying downlink VQI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and Report Downlink VQIAllowed to ENABLE(Enable). Perform a voice service test and check thedownlink VQI value in the measurement reports.Expected result: The downlink VQI value is not reported.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step,set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Measurement ReportType to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).

NOTEYou need to configure a neighboring GSM cell if no enhanced measurement report is obtainedwhen enhanced measurement reports are configured and the MS in a voice service supportsenhanced measurement reports.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to one that matches the channel type. Speech versions areFULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rateVER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI valuein the measurement reports.Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and SentFreq.of preprocessed MR to an appropriate value based on the site requirements.Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value in the preprocessedmeasurement reports.Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.

– Verifying uplink VQI

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS domain message tracing of a single subscriberby referring to Tracing CS domain messages of a single subscriber. Perform a voiceservice test, and check the uplink VQI value in the measurement reports.Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.



396

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and SentFreq.of preprocessed MR to an appropriate value based on the site requirements.Perform a voice service test and check the uplink VQI value in the preprocessedmeasurement reports.Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating downlink VQI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set ReportDownlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(Disable).

– Deactivating uplink VQI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, setVoice quality report switch to NO(Not report).

----End

Example//Activating downlink VQISET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE;//Activating uplink VQISET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=YES;//Verifying downlink VQISET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-1&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;//Deactivating downlink VQISET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=DISABLE;//Deactivating uplink VQISET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=NO;



397

122 Configuring Enhanced MeasurementReport

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501Enhanced Measurement Report.




– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l License



– The MS supports enhanced measurement report (EMR).

– The test cell is configured with neighboring cells and supports the EMR feature.

Context

EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from 3GPP R99. Measurement results,such as Bit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. Thisimproves the performance of power control algorithms and handover algorithms. This featurebrings the following benefits:

l This feature improves the capability of voice quality monitoring and the performance ofpower control algorithms and handover algorithms.

l As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a betterperformance of interoperability between the GSM, WCDMA, and TD-SCDMA systems.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report


398

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, setMeasurement Report Type of cell0 to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced MeasurementReport).

l Verification ProcedureAssume that cell0 and cell1 are neighboring 2G cells of each other.1. Use an MS to make a call in cell0.2. Check whether the RSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the

EMR information element (IE).Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. TheRSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the EMR IE(In an originalmeasurement report, the EMR IE is enhanced-measurement-report-struct. In apreprocessed measurement report, the EMR IE is pre-proc-emr).

NOTEA common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set

Measurement Report Type of cell0 to ComMeasReport(Common MeasurementReport).

----End

Example//Activating Enhanced Measurement ReportSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;//Deactivating Enhanced Measurement ReportSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report


399

123 Configuring BTS power lift forhandover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117101BTS power lift for handover.


– None


– The feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI IIHandover has been configured before this feature is activated.

l License


Context

The BTS power lift for handover function determines whether the BTS of the serving celltransmits signals at the maximum power during a handover. After the function is enabled, theBTS adjusts its transmit power to the maximum value before the BSC sends a handovercommand to the MS. This ensures that the handover can be performed successfully.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set PowerBoost before HO Enabled or Not to YES(StartUp).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHBASIC.Expected result: Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not is set to StartUp.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover


400

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set PowerBoost before HO Enabled or Not to NO(Not StartUp).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=YES;//Verification ProcedureLST GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover


401

124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FRAdaptation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.





l License



– The test cell is enabled with the HR function. In addition, the test cell is configured withTCHFs and TCHHs and these channels are available.

Context

Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation is a feature based on which dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHFresources is performed on the call that is established.

l When TCH resources are sufficient, the call that occupies a TCHH and whose transmissionquality is bad is handed over a TCHF to improve voice quality.

l When TCH resources are insufficient, the call that occupies a TCHF and whosetransmission quality is good is handed over a TCHH to increase cell capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Intracell HOAllowed set to YES(Yes), Current HO Control Algorithm set to

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation


402

HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), and AMR F-H Ho Allowed andNon-AMR F-H Ho Allowed set to YES(Yes).

2. Configure conversion between FR calls and HR calls.– Adjusting FR calls to HR calls

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion set to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rateVER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold set to 7, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold setto 255, and Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold set to 0.

– Adjusting HR calls to FR calls

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion set to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rateVER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5)Select All.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with AMRTCH/H Prior Allowed set to ON(On), AMR TCH/H Prior Cell LoadThreshold set to 0, and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold set to 0.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR H-F Traffic Threshold set to 100, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold set to 0,AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold set to 0, and AMR H-F Ho ATCBThreshold set to 255.


Adjusting FR calls to HR calls

1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interfaceby referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messageson the Abis Interface.

2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface andRSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.

3. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on theAbis interface.Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. Thespeech version FAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speechversion switches to HAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messagesare traced on the Abis interface.

Adjusting HR calls to FR calls

1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interfaceby referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messageson the Abis Interface.

2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface andRSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.

3. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on theAbis interface.



403

Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. Thespeech version HAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speechversion switches to FAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messagesare traced on the Abis interface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR F-H Ho

Allowed set to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting of

AMR F-H Ho Allowed.Expected result: AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Non-AMR F-HHo Allowed set to NO(No).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting ofNon-AMR F-H Ho Allowed.Expected result: Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.

----End

Example//Activating Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES;//Deactivating Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO;



404

125 Configuring Um Interface SpeechFrame Repairing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115708Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.


– The GRFU and GRRU support this feature.– The MRFU V2 and MRRU V2 that are configured with less than five carriers support

this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextCurrently, the speech services using EFR and AMR-NB account for the largest proportion ofspeech services in live networks. When the bit error rate (BER) is high and the C/I is low, thechannel decoding may fail. As a result, the erroneous results of channel decoding will bediscarded, which greatly degrades the voice quality.

To solve the preceding problem, Huawei develops a technique based on the characteristics ofEFR and AMR-NB speech frames to repair the erroneous speech frames over the Um interface.This technique increases the success rate of voice decoding, thus improving the voice qualityunder low C/I. After this feature is applied, the mean opinion score (MOS) can be increased by0.1 to 0.2 under low C/I.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set UmInterface Speech Frame Repair Switch to YES(Yes), and then set Speech Frame

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing


405

Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold, and GQSpeech Frame Repair BER Threshold as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query the parameters

related to the Um interface speech frame repairing feature.Expected result:– The value of Um Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch is YES(Yes).– The values of Speech Frame Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame

Repair BER Threshold, and GQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold are thesame as those set in the activation procedure.

2. When making calls in an area of the network with severe frame loss, run theBSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with FER Report Enable set to YES(Yes) to allow the BTS to report the Frame Erase Ratio (FER).

3. Query FER-related counters reported by the BTS on the M2000. To do so, choosePerformance > Query Result on the menu bar. In the displayed window, click NewQuery. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MRMeasurement > FER Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of the counterEFR Average FER.Expected result: After the Um interface speech frame repairing feature is enabled, thevalue of EFR Average FER decreases and the speech quality is improved.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Um Interface

Speech Frame Repair Switch set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=YES, UMSFRLLRFACTOR=4, UMSFRLLRTHRESH=60, UMSFRBERTHRESH=50;//Verification procedureLST GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FERRPTEN=YES;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing


406

126 Configuring AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-115501AMR FR and GBFD-115502 AMR HR.





l Other Prerequisites– The MS, BTS, and MSC support the AMR function.

ContextThe adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm, which can beadjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by theprotocol. With AMR, the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio networkaccording to the measurements such as receive level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference(C/I) ratio, and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. In this way, both the anti-interference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved.

NOTE

l The AMR HR supports the 7.95 kbit/s coding scheme only when Service Mode of the Abis interfaceis IP or HDLC in BM/TC combined or A over IP mode.

l If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then AMR cannot be configured. In this case,a BTS software version that supports AMR must be obtained.


1. Set basic AMR parameters.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 126 Configuring AMR


407

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag setto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,select the FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1)check box in the Speech Version parameter for the cell.

NOTE

If the cell supports half-rate services, select the HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER3) check box simultaneously.

c. To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, run theBSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, specify the subracknumber and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and setCoding Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).

2. Set AMR call processing parameters.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with AFR RadioLink Timeout and AFR SACCH Multi-Frames set to appropriate values.

NOTE

If the cell supports half-rate services, set AHR Radio Link Timeout and AHR SACCHMulti-Frames to appropriate values simultaneously.

b. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to setAMR call control parameters related to full-rate and half-rate channels.

NOTE

l AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively.In A over IP mode, their settings must be consistent with those on the CN side.

l You can select different algorithms according to the setting of AMR RateAdjustment Switch.

l By setting AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes), you canenable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink thresholds.

3. To set parameters for AMR intra-cell handover between TCHF and TCHH, seeActivating the AMR handover algorithm in 7 Configuring HUAWEI IHandover and Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF andTCHH in 189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover.

4. Optional: Set AMR power control parameters.– When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, run the BSC6900 MML

command SET GCELLPWR2 to set AMR power control parameters such asAMR PC Interval.

– When Huawei III power control algorithm is used, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III Power Control ForAMR to ON(Allowed) and set other AMR power control parameters based onnetwork conditions.

5. Set AMR channel management parameters.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold set toappropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Start a call between two MSs.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES.



408

Expected result: In the displayed information, Speech version = Full-rate VER 3.l Deactivation Procedure

At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, thedeactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech version.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER5-0;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AFRSAMULFRM=48, AHRSAMULFRM=32, AFRDSBLCNT=64_Times, AHRDSBLCNT=52_Times;SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RATECTRLSW=ALG1, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1, ACTCDSETH=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1, AMRDADTHAW=YES;SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRPCADJPERIOD=3;SET GCELLCHMGAD IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;



409

127 Configuring AMR Coding RateThreshold Adaptive Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.


– The BTS supports AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.– An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.

This feature depends on the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR).

– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115702 TrFO.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The test cell is configured with neighboring cells.

ContextNOTE

BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a non-optimized DTRU.

This feature sets the target voice quality of the network and adjusts the coding rate thresholdadaptively so that a proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and therefore togain optimal AMR voice quality.

AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings thefollowing benefits:l A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service.


127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold AdaptiveAdjustment


410

l Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.

Procedurel Activate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR UplinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

l Verify AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.

Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell,select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equallydistributed along the test path.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1(FULL-RATE VER1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(HALF-RATE VER 3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR UplinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then performa drive test on the test path.

NOTE

The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the movingspeed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (threecome-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR UplinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).

5. Repeat Step 3.6. Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality

when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and when it isset to NO(No).

Expected result: The MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is setto YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive ThresholdAllowed is set to NO(No).

l Deactivate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR Uplink

Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to view the value of AMR

Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.

Expected result: AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to No.l Activate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR DownlinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Is RATSCCH FunctionEnabled to ENABLE(Enable).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS withMeasurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced MeasurementReport).

l Verify AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.




411

Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell,select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equallydistributed.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with SpeechVersion set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1(FULL-RATE VER1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(HALF-RATE VER 3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR DownlinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then performa drive test on the test path.

NOTE

The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the movingspeed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (threecome-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR DownlinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).

5. Repeat Step 3.6. Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality

when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and whenit is set to NO(No).

Expected result: The MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed isset to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive ThresholdAllowed is set to NO(No).

l Deactivate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR Downlink

Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to view the value of AMR

Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.

Expected result: AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to No.

----End

Example//Activating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustmentSET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=YES;//Deactivating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustmentSET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=NO;//Activating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustmentSET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=YES;//Deactivating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustmentSET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=NO;




412

128 Configuring WB AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507WB AMR.


– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this featurewhen they use a non-optimized DTRU.



l License



– The MS, MGW, and MSC server support this feature.

Contextl WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. Using WB

AMR, the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extendedto 0.05-7 kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech comparedwith the narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency rangebetween 200 Hz and 3400 Hz.

l WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports therates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to set the accesscontrol parameters for the cell.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 128 Configuring WB AMR


413

NOTE

Select the FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter SpeechVersion while retaining the default speech versions.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to set the call controlAMR parameters for the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL CodingRate adj.th1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rateadj.hyst1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rateadj.th1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rateadj.hyst1[WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB].

NOTE

When transmission quality over the Um interface is good, the value of the coding rateadjustment threshold should be relatively low. In this way, a rate can be easily increased toimprove speech quality. If the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, a low ratecoding mode should be used to improve robustness over the Um interface.

Reducing the coding rate hysteresis leads to more frequent rate adjustments.

l Verification Procedure1. Use two MSs supporting WB AMR to call each other.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to verify that the value of

Channel Service Type is AMR_WB.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, clear theFULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter SpeechVersion.

----End

Example//Activating WB AMRSET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-1;//Verifying WB AMRDSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13818889988";//Deactivating WB AMRSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 128 Configuring WB AMR


414

129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901Streaming QoS(GBR).


– A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board areconfigured.


– The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License



– The MSs and SGSN support the PFM procedure and R99 QoS.

– The cell is configured with static PDCHs.

Context

In the case of streaming services, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users based on their QoSattribute GBR and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streamingservices. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming servicescan preempt radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources areinsufficient. This ensures that higher-priority services preferentially use radio resources. Ifstreaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBR is decreased when radioresources are insufficient; when radio resources become sufficient, the GBR is restored to thenegotiated values. When the BSC needs to decrease or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSNto modify the GBR through a PFM procedure.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)


415

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setSupport GBR QoS to YES(Support). To enable streaming services to preemptPDCHs, set Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to ON(ON).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support).

3. On the SGSN side, enable the network service entity (NSE) to support Packet FlowContext (PFC). To enable streaming services to preempt PDCHs, configure the NSEto carry the ARP information element.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC to ensure thatthe NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Um interface PS message tracing and check the PSI13 message.

Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1. Thisindicates that the BSC supports PDC.

2. Initiate Gb interface PTP tracing. Perform PDP context activation on an MS whoseregistered traffic class is streaming.Expected result: Signaling messages such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSSPFC ACK are traced. This indicates that the PDP context is activated.

3. Use an MS whose registered traffic class is streaming and an MS whose registeredtraffic class is interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share thesame channel group.Expected result: The BSC allocates resources to the MS whose registered traffic classis streaming based on the registered GBR. The other MSs share the remainingresources.

4. Use multiple MSs whose registered traffic class is streaming to perform PS services.Expected result: If the MSs have the same priority, the BSS allocates resources to theMS that is the first to access the network. If the MSs have different priorities andsupport resource preemption, a high-priority MS can preempt resources of a low-priority MS.

NOTEThe information element ARP of CREATE BSS PFC of the Gb interface specifies information suchas the priority of streaming services and whether streaming services can preempt resources and bepreempted.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set

Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support) and Preempt Switch of StreamingResource to OFF(OFF).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO(No Support).Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

----End

Example//Activating Streaming QoS(GBR)SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES, OccupyStreamingSwitch=ON;



416

MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;//Deactivating Streaming QoS(GBR)SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO, OccupyStreamingSwitch=OFF;MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;



417

130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902QoS ARP&THP.



l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before

this feature is activated.l License


ContextThe BSC allocates radio resources to the MS according the allocation/retention priority (ARP)and traffic handle priority (THP) in the QoS attributes. The higher-priority users enjoy moreradio resources and wider radio bandwidth. The BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoSaccording to the 3GPP specifications.

With this feature, the operator allocates radio resources according to service types and userpriority. As a result, the user with a higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higherdata rate and services of better quality.

Interactive services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP and THPin the QoS attributes. If the ARPs of users are the same, users with a higher THP are allocatedmore radio resources. If the THPs of users are the same, users with a higher ARP are allocatedmore radio resources.

Background services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP of QoS.Users with a higher ARP are allocated more radio resources.

The BSS allocates radio resources to services that do not support QoS in the way it allocatesradio resources to best effort services.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP


418


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setSupport QoS Optimize to YES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support).

3. Configure the NSE to support PFC on the SGSN side.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset SIGBVC to ensure that

the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set the values

of THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT,THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT,THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT,THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT,THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT,BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT, andBEARP3PRIWEIGHT according to the weight of bandwidths occupied by userswith different priorities.


NOTE

To verify this feature, you can run the command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block idle channelsin the cells so that as many MSs as possible are multiplexed on the same channel group.

To query the channel number of each MS, initiate PS message tracing of a single user by referring toTracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Perform PS download services to check the datarate of each MS.

1. Use the MSs whose registered traffic classes are interactive or background to performPS services and ensure that the MSs share the same channel group.Expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of the transmissionrate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP.


Support QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO

(Not Support).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

----End

Example//Activating QoS ARP/THPSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=YES;MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT=10, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT=6, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT=6, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, BEARP3PRIWEIGHT=2;



419

//Deactivating QoS ARP/THPSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=NO;MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;



420

131 Configuring PS Active PackageManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904PS Active Package Management.


– Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.

l Dependency on Other Features– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This

feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.l License


ContextActive queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue lengthwithin an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increasesdata throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization.

AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur.

AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that requirelow transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increasesdata throughput.

AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely,services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streamingservices.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 131 Configuring PS Active Package Management


421

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQMSwitch to OPEN(Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM TargetThreshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval,AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard IntervalUpper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual networkconditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After the

download is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) throughFTP.

2. View the result of downloading the small-sized file.The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required todownload the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sizedfile is decreased.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQM

Switch to CLOSE(Close).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA and view the value of

AQM Switch.The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256, AqmTarTh=384, AqmMaxTh=1024, AqmSwitch=OPEN, AqmNinit=20, AqmNLowerBound=10, AqmNUpBound=20, AqmM=20;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmSwitch=CLOSE;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 131 Configuring PS Active Package Management


422

132 Configuring PoC QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905PoC QoS.


– Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.


feature depends on the following features GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).l License


l Other Prerequisites– The MS and the CN support PoC service.

ContextThe push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on theGSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on theGPRS/EGPRS networks.

Huawei GBSS equipment can correctly distinguish PoC services from other services and applyQoS mechanisms for the PoC services. The QoS mechanisms consist of GBR, reduced datatransmission delay, and uplink/downlink balanced channel allocation method.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setPOC Support to Support(Support). Set Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBRfor POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actualsituations.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 132 Configuring PoC QoS


423

l Verification Procedure1. Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value

is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POCService. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POCService.

2. Use the MS to perform PoC service.The expected result: The PoC result runs properly.

3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other typesto perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group.The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated.


Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, POCGBRMIN=6, POCGBRMAX=16, POCDELAY=650, PocSup=Support;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PocSup=NotSupport;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 132 Configuring PoC QoS


424

133 Configuring NC2

This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional featureGBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).


– Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.


feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-114151 DTM.



l Other Prerequisites– The test cell has a neighboring cell.– The serving cell works properly.– This feature should be supported by the MS.

ContextWith this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal level canreselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level.

Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselectionconsiders factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, and signallevel of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set theparameters as follows:

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 133 Configuring NC2


425

– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkControl Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set thethresholds at cell reselection.

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform GPRS services on the GSM serving cell. On the LMT, trace

PS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages onthe Um Interface.

2. Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cellis higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the servingcell.

3. Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced,the NC2 is enabled.– The Packet Measurement Report message that the MS sends to the BSC.– The Packet Cell Change Order message that the BSC sends to the MS.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to

SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=50;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 133 Configuring NC2


426

134 Configuring Network Assisted CellChange (NACC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI).



l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.



l Other Prerequisites– The MS and Core Network (CN) must support this feature.– The test cell is a GSM cell and has a neighboring GSM cell.– The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service.– The serving cell support NACC.– The network control modes of the serving cell is set to NC0 or NC1.– The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring

cell with better signal strength.

ContextNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period ofservice disruption caused by cell reselection.

The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packettransfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving thesystem information on neighboring cells on the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfer modecan keep these information for 30 seconds, during which it can attempt to access the neighboringcell according to the system information.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)


427


– Activating Intra-BSC NACC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).

NOTETo further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be setto YES(Yes).

– Activating Inter-BSC NACC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).

NOTETo further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be setto YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support toYES(Support).

NOTE

l Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM.

l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the serving cell and target cell is set to Yes.

l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to activate RIM.

NOTEPerform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cellsunder the NSE.

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to initiate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Um interface.

Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell.2. Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of the

target cell higher than that of the serving cell.3. Trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages

on the Um Interface.

After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an externalneighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELLCHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with thePACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, andSI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends thePACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS toproceed with the cell reselection procedure.




428

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set SupportNACC to NO(No) and ACKET SI to NO(No).Expected result: The value of Support NACC is NO(No) and that of PACKET SIis NO(No). The cell supports neither NACC nor PACKET SI STATUS.

----End

Example//Activating Intra-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES, PKTSI=YES;//Activating Inter-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES, PKTSI=YES;MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Deactivating Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO, PKTSI=NO;



429

135 Configuring GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101GPRS.


– A built-in PCU is configured. A packet switched (PS) service processing board and theGb interface board are used.



l License



– This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and Mobile Station (MS).

– If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring thePb Interface.

– If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring theGb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

– The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring theTransmission Data.

Context

This feature implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controllingMS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters asfollows:

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 135 Configuring GPRS


430

– If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as externalPcu), and then run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance consoleto support GPRS.

– If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU).

2. Optional: If built-in PCU is used, if Configuring CS3/CS4, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLPSCS with both Downlink Fixed CS Type and UplinkFixed CS Type set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set Channel Type toPDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel.

4. Do the following operations according to the BTS works:– If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS

by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.– If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by Run the

BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH. It is recommended that IP path ID beset to QoS(QoS), BE(BE), AF11(AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21(AF21), AF22(AF22), or AF23(AF23).

l Optional: Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with Uplink Fixed CS

Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4).NOTEThis operation affects the ongoing services of the cells. Therefore, perform the operation inlow traffic hours.

2. Use an MS to perform PING services. On the BSC6900 LMT, trace PS messages onthe Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.You can view that the CS3 or CS4 coding scheme is used in the uplink and downlink.

CAUTIONAfter the verification is complete, set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink FixedCS Type to UNFIXED(UNFIXED) according to the activation procedure.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data.

Expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set GPRS to NO(Notsupport).

----End

Example/*Activating GPRS*///External PCU commandSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsExtPcu;PCU SET ATTR 0 460009162963A 1 02187 1 yes 2 255 true Cell-0//Built-in PCU commandSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;



431

SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH;//(Optional)Built-in PCU commandSET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=UNFIXED, DNFIXCS=UNFIXED;//(Optional)Verification procedure SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=CS3, DNFIXCS=CS4;//Deactivating GPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=NO;



432

136 Configuring Network OperationMode I

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001Network Operation Mode I.


– A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The Gs interface (the interface between MSC/VLR and SGSN) is configured between

the MSC and SGSN. If a cell is configured with MOCN, the Gs interface must beavailable on the MSC and the SGSN of all operators.

ContextThe combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface supports coordinated pagingand CS paging in packet transfer mode.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkOperation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I).

l Verification Procedure1. Use a MS to perform a ping service.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I


433

2. Use another MS to call the MS processing the ping service.Expected result: The call is successfully established and the voice quality is good.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network

Operation Mode to NMOII(Network Operation Mode II).

----End

Example//Activating Network Operation Mode ISET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOI;//Deactivating Network Operation Mode ISET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOII;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I


434

137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118901CS-3/CS-4.


– The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.l Dependency on Other Features

– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on GBFD-114101 GPRS.



l Other Prerequisites– The MS supports only GPRS.– The signal quality on the Um interface is high.– If the BTS works in TDM mode, there must be sufficient free timeslots. If the BTS

works in IP mode, there must be sufficient IP paths.– The configuration of the Gb interface is complete. For details, see Configuring the Gb

Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

ContextThis feature allows the BSS to use high coding schemes when the signal quality on the Uminterface is high and the Abis transmission resources are sufficient, thereby increasing the GPRSdata rate.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with both Uplink Fixed CSType and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4


435

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with Uplink Fixed CSType and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4).

NOTEThis operation affects the ongoing services of the cells. Therefore, perform the operation inlow traffic hours.

2. Use an MS to perform PING services. On the BSC6900 LMT, trace PS messages onthe Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.You can view that the CS3 or CS4 coding scheme is used in the uplink and downlink.

CAUTIONAfter the verification is complete, set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink FixedCS Type to UNFIXED(UNFIXED) according to the activation procedure.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=UNFIXED, DNFIXCS=UNFIXED;//Verification procedureSET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=CS3, DNFIXCS=CS4;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4


436

138 Configuring EGPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201EGPRS.


– The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used.– A packet processing board and a Gb interface board are required if the built-in PCU is

used.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.



l Other Prerequisites– This feature should be supported by the GPRS Support Node (GGSN/SGSN) and the

Mobile Station (MS).– If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Pb Interface.– If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).– The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Transmission Data.

ContextProvides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS servicesand the congestion rate, improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 138 Configuring EGPRS


437

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters asfollows:

– If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as externalPcu) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

– If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2. Do the following operations according to the BTS works:

– If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTSby referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.

– If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by running theADD IPPATH command. It is recommended that IP path type be set to QoS(QoS), BE(BE), AF11(AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21(AF21), AF22(AF22), or AF23(AF23).

3. Optional: If built-in PCU is used, configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCScoding, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step,set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplinkquality measurements reported by BTS).


– In the case that the external PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,start the message tracing over the Um interface on the PCU maintenance console. Theresult shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS areused.

– In the case that the built-in PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,start the task Um Interface PS Trace on the LMT. The result shows that the codingschemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used.

Optional: verification procedure of configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCScoding

– Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet.

– After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combinedsignals to the receive end of the TRX.

– Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set thetransmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet.

– Use the MS to load files through FTP.

– Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMTby referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result ofuplink MCS coding adjustment.

The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplinkEGPRS coding scheme decreases.


– In the case that the external PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as externalPcu) and EDGE to NO(No).

– In the case that the built-in PCU is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU) and EDGE to NO(No).



438

– Optional: If built-in PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS DynamicAdjust to 1(According to downlink quality measurements reported by MS).

----End

Example//Activating EGPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; //(Optional)Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2;//Deactivating EGPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;//(Optional)Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=1;



439

139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-11920111-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic featureGBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.


– Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board arerequired.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l License



– This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context

The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS powerconsumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance ofthe EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improvethe access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay.

For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.

NOTE

l In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS andthe takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default.

l In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS,run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo> g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disablethe takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access


440


1. Configure the extended uplink TBF.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU

maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a valuegreater than 0.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period ofExtended Uplink TBF to a value greater than 0.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setEXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.

2. Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU ADD EGPRSPara command on the PCU

maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on theCCCH for the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Accessto YES(Yes).

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETBSCPSSOFTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Force MS Two-phaseAccess to Close(Close).

3. Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu

g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running thecommand, you should reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move PacketAssignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Verify the extended uplink TBF.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA to checkwhether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS toperform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does notrelease the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after theduration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF.

2. Verify the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.

Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. If the value of randomaccess for a channel request is 11-bit, the MS has accessed the network.

3. Verify the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.

Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the pingfunction. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delayby 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface.




441

1. Deactivate the extended uplink TBF.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU set privateoptpara command on the PCU

maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0.– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET

GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period ofExtended Uplink TBF to 0.

2. Deactivate the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU

maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bitEGPRS access on the CCCH.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Accessto NO(No).

3. Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppu

g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.After running the command, reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move PacketAssignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating the extended uplink TBF*///External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0PCU ADD PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 2000 2400//Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=2000;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND;

/*Activating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*///External PCU modePCU ADD EGPRSPara 11 la 8 yes unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6//Built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=YES;

//Closing the Force MS Two-phase AccessSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: Force2Phase=Close;/*Activating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*///External PCU modePCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1//Built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=YES;/*Deactivating the extended uplink TBF*///External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0PCU SET PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 0 2400//Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=0;

/*Deactivating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*///External PCU mode



442

PCU SET EGPRSPara 11 la 8 no unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6//Built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=NO;/*Deactivating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*///External PCU modePCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0//Built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=NO;



443

140 Configuring Dynamically Adjustingthe Uplink MCS Coding

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.




feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The cell is configured with EGPRS, and the uplink coding scheme of the cell can be

changed.

ContextWith this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH basedon the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH coding scheme canquickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, setSupport EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink qualitymeasurements reported by BTS).

l Verification Procedure1. Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet.


140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCSCoding


444

2. After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combinedsignals to the receive end of the TRX.

3. Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set thetransmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet.

4. Use the MS to load files through FTP.5. Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT

by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result ofuplink MCS coding adjustment.The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplinkEGPRS coding scheme decreases.

NOTEThe interference source power cannot be too great. Otherwise, the PS services may fail.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, setSupport EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 1(According to downlinkquality measurements reported by MS)

----End

Example//Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2;//Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=1;


140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCSCoding


445

141 Configuring Packet ChannelDispatching

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302Packet Channel Dispatching.





l License



– An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service is available.

– An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.

Contextl The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system

uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services andGPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks withthe USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRSdownlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects thedownlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate theEGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlinkthroughput of the EGPRS MS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching


446

l This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use thesame channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire networkperformance, and enhancing the user experience.

141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS ServiceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special ChannelBe Used by Only EGPRS Service.

141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred ChannelThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.

141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up ScenarioThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E(EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.



447

141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by OnlyEGPRS Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special ChannelBe Used by Only EGPRS Service.


1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu

(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.3. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,

Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are PDTCH(PDTCH), and the values of Timeslot Priority are EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS SpecialChannel).

l Verification ProcedureNOTEAn GPRS MS(class10)that supports GPRS service and an EGPRS MS(class10) that supports EGPRSservice are available.

1. Monitor the channels used by the MSs.2. Attach the GPRS MS to the EGPRS network.3. Attach the EGPRS MS to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.

The expected result:

– The GPRS MS cannot be attached to the EGPRS network.– The EGPRS MS can be attached to the EGPRS network and the PDP activation

successes.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;



448

SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;

141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred ChannelThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.


1. Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell.

2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.

3. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set TRX ID,Channel No., and Administrative State.The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on theBCCH TRX are Lock(Lock).

4. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCHChannel Priority Type.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH). PDCHChannel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS PriorityChannel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS(GPRS Channel).


NOTEThe GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.

1. Record the process of configuring devices.

2. EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

3. GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

4. GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

5. EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH.

6. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time.

7. Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.


– After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRSpreferred channel.

– After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The systemdoes notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2.

– After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 isswiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. Thecorrect channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1.



449

– After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out ofthe EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRSMS2.

– The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel.


1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of theEGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCHChannel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS PriorityChannel).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, ADMSTAT=Ulock;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;

141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down GUp Scenario

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E(EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.



450


1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.2. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,

Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH), and thevalues of Timeslot Priority of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRSNormal Channel).

3. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G UpSwitch to CLOSE(Close).


NOTETwo GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.

1. Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used.

2. Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRSMS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1.

3. Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1.

4. Record the channels used by each MS.


– After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRSMS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.

– After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.


1. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G UpSwitch to OPEN(Open).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=CLOSE;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=OPEN;



451

142 Configuring BSS PagingCoordination

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305BSS Paging Coordination.



l Dependency on Other Features– None



l Other Prerequisites– The Gs interface does not exist.– The MS supports this feature.

ContextIn the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS isin packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH toenable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSSPaging Co-ordination to YES(YES).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination


452

1. Use one test MS to perform the PING service.2. Use a second MS to call the test MS.

The expected result: The call is set up successfully and the conversation is proper.

NOTEAfter a CS paging is initiated, a CS call is set up successfully but the ongoing PS service isinterrupted.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSS

Paging Co-ordination to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination


453

143 Configuring PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502PS Handover.


– The BSC is configured with a built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and aGb interface board.


– The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.

l License



– The MS supports PS handover. To support inter-RAT PS handover between GSM andUMTS, the MS must be a multi-mode MS.

– The CN supports PS handover.

– The SGSN supports PS handover.

– A neighboring GSM or UMTS cell has been configured.

Context

After an NSE is configured to support PS handover, all cells under this NSE support PS handover.

l Intra-RAT PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over from aGSM cell to another GSM cell under the same BSC or different BSCs.

l Inter-RAT incoming PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed overfrom a UMTS cell to a GSM cell.

l Inter-RAT outgoing PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed overfrom a GSM cell to a UMTS cell.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 143 Configuring PS Handover


454


– Activate PFC at an NSE by performing the following operations:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support toYES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step,set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support).

– Activate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS HandoverSupport to YES(Support).

– Activate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the followingoperation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RATInter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

– Activate inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the followingoperation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RATInter-Cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

– Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

NOTEPerform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cells underthe NSE.


NOTE

The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure. Otherwise,some messages will not be traced successfully.

– Verify that the NSE supports PS handover by performing the following operations:

1. Initiate Gb-interface signaling tracing of the NSE on the BSC6900 LMT byreferring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the value of PS Handover contained inExtended Feature Bitmap is 1.

– Verify that a cell supports intra-RAT PS handover by performing the followingoperations:

1. Initiate Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring toTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. When the handover requirement for the cell level is met, initiate a PS handoverrequest.

Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the information element(IE) "Target RNC Identifier."

– Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT incoming PS handover by performing thefollowing operations:



455

1. Enable the MS to camp on a UMTS cell and upload and download files. InitiateGb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to TracingPTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. Move the MS away from the UMTS cell or increase the number of MSs that uploadand download files in the UMTS cell.

3. Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target GSM cell.Expected result: The PS Handover Request message carries the IE "Source RNCIdentifier." In addition, the PS Handover Request Ack message from the BSC canbe viewed.

– Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT outgoing PS handover by performing the followingoperations:

1. Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell and upload and download files. Initiate Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTPMessages on the Gb Interface.

2. Move the MS away from the UMTS cell or increase the number of MSs that uploadand download files in the UMTS cell.

3. Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target UMTS cell.Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the IE "Target RNCIdentifier."

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the following

operation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RATInter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate the inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the followingoperation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RATInter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS HandoverSupport to NO(No Support).

– Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

----End

Example//Activating PFC at an NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PFCSUP=YES;SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES;//Activating PS handover at the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=YES;//Activating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Activating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;



456

//Resetting the SIG BVCRST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Deactivating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;//Deactivating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;//Deactivating PS handover at the NSEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=NO;//Resetting the SIG BVCRST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;



457

144 Configuring Early TBFEstablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119503Early TBF Establishment.



l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF has been configured before this

feature is activated.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The MS supports Early TBF Establishment.

ContextEarly TBF establishment described in 3GPP TS 44.060 (Release 7) is an enhancement of theextended uplink TBF function. If the MS supports Early TBF Establishment, the TBF can beallocated before the MS transmits data, thereby reducing the service access delay.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set EarlyTBF Establishment to ON.

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform downloading services.2. Initiate PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the LMT by referring to

Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface, and trace dummy control blocks.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment


458

Expected result: The value of the field EARLY_TBF_ESTABLISHMENT containedin the message PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK is 1. After the BSC assignschannel resources to the MS in the PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message, theMS sends multiple UPLINK DUMMY CONTROL BLOCK messages.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Early

TBF Establishment to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating Early TBF EstablishmentSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EarlyTBFEst=ON;//Deactivating Early TBF EstablishmentSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EarlyTBFEst=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment


459

145 Configuring PS Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504PS Power Control.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.

– This feature cannot be enabled together with the feature GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGE Coverage.

l License


Contextl Only PS downlink power control needs to be activated.l Activating PS power control enables the transmit power of the TRX to be controlled.l In situations that a good link quality can be obtained without the need of maximum transmit

power, PS power control helps to reduce the transmit power, reducing the entire networkinterference and increasing the system capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA to activate the PSpower control. In this step, set Support PS Downlink Power Control to YES(Yes)and PC_MEAS_CHAN to BCCH(BCCH).

Then, set the following parameters according to the network plan:

– Code Scheme Statistics Threshold

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 145 Configuring PS Power Control


460

– Code Scheme Stable Threshold– Downlink Power Control Start Threshold– P0– Target CIR Position– Target CIR Offset– Max Power Control Fall Step– Power Control Precision– Dummy Power Reduce Granularity– USF Dummy Power Control Factor

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set

Uplink Fixed MCS Type and Downlink Fixed MCS Type to MCS9(MCS9).2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to perform GPRS services.3. Trace the signaling over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to

Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. The information elements P0 andPR_MODE are carried in the messages PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT,IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT, DTMASSIGNMENT COMMAND, and PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIG.

NOTE

Take the message PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT as an example. The value of is-p0 is1, and p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (When PS power control is not activated,the value of is-p0 is 0.)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA. In this step, set

Support PS Downlink Power Control to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating PS Power ControlSET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=YES, PCMEASCHAN=BCCH; MCSSTATTHR=10, MCSSTABTHR=8, DLPCSTARTTHR=MCS9, DLPCINITPR=DB0, TGTCIRPOS=3, TGTCIROFFSET=2, MAXPCSTEP=1, PSPCPRES=0.6dB, DummyPRGran=15, USFDummyPCFactor=3;//Deactivating PS Power ControlSET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 145 Configuring PS Power Control


461

146 Configuring PDCH DynamicAdjustment with Two Thresholds

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.




feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.

ContextWith this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performedaccording to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage,reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, andtherefore improves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set UplinkMultiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Downlink MultiplexThreshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS IdleChannel Rate, Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, Inter_Cell PSResource Preempt Allowed, and Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempted Allowed to


146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with TwoThresholds


462

appropriate values. The value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate mustbe less than 100.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PS ServiceGuaranteed Rate to an appropriate value.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA. In this step,set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 1.

l Verification ProcedureNOTEThe following configuration is temporarily implemented to quickly bring this feature into effect. Fora commercial network, it is recommended that the configuration be implemented as planned. Restoreto the original configuration after the verification.

1. Configure sufficient idle timeslots.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Upper

Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 20), LowerThreshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 5), MaximumRate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100, and Reservation Threshold of DynamicChannel Conversion to 0.

3. Configure one static PDCH and multiple TCHFs. Ensure that at least 4 PDCHs canbe generated through channel conversion after PS services are initiated, and that theproportion of idle TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS IdleChannel Rate.

4. Use two MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion of idleTCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle ChannelRate, TCHF-to-PDCH conversion is triggered.

5. Use more MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion ofidle TCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Lower Threshold for CS IdleChannel Rate and the average downlink load of PDCHs in the cell is greater than thevalue of Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, TCHF-to-PDCH conversion is triggered.

6. Initiate CS services to occupy more TCHs. When the proportion of idle TCHs to allTCHs is less than the value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, idlePDCHs are converted to TCHs.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Downlink

Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to the value before thisfeature is activated and Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PS ServiceGuaranteed Rate to the value before this feature is activated.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA. In this step,set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 0.

----End

Example//Activating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two ThresholdsSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, CHIDLHIGHTHR=20, CHIDLLOWTHR=10, PSRESPREEMPT=YES, PSRESPREEMPTED=YES;SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=64K;SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=262144;




463

//Deactivating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two ThresholdsSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=10, CHIDLHIGHTHR=100;SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=32K;SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=0;




464

147 Configuring Timeslot MultiplexingPriority for GPRS/EGPRS User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119506Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.


– A built-in PCU, packet service processing board, and Gb interface board have beenconfigured.


– The feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.

l License



– The Gb interface has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface(over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

ContextThis feature controls the proportion of Um interface resources allocated to GPRS users andEGPRS users by adjusting GPRS/EGPRS timeslot multiplexing priority parameter settings,thereby increasing the network throughput.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setMAC Scheduling Type to PFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. Inthis step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to an appropriate value based on thenetwork plan.




465

NOTEThe default value of Priority Weight of EGPRS Users is 1. If this parameter is set to anothervalue, EGPRS and GPRS users are multiplexed based on their priorities.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. Inthis step, set Downlink Minimum Guaranteed Rate to an appropriate value basedon the network plan.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set

Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the minimum value, 1.2. Use two MSs, one supporting EGPRS and the other supporting GPRS, to download

data through FTP simultaneously. Check the downloading rates of the two MSs.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set

Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the maximum value, 3. Then, check thedownloading rates of the two MSs. The expected result is that the downloading rateof the EGPRS MS increases whereas the downloading rate of the GPRS MS decreases.


Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the default value 1 or set MAC SchedulingType to a value other than PFSCHEDULE.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE;SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=2;SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=12;//Verification procedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=1;SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=3;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MACSCHEDULETYPE=CIRSCHEDULE, SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=1;




466

148 Configuring EDA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).




– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l License



– This feature is supported by MS.

Context

Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In some specificsituations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however,the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate three or moretimeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can beallocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement forhigher bandwidth in the uplink.

The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reportedto the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to SUPPORT(Support).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 148 Configuring EDA


467

l Verification Procedure1. Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number

(activate PDP context).The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message thatthe value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprs-extended-dynamic-alloccation is 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value ofSupport EDA.The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

4. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.5. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.

NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check numberof PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to SUPPORT(Support).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value ofSupport EDA.The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support.

8. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.9. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.

NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check numberof PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

10. Compare the results obtained in Step 5 and Step 9.

The expected result: As recorded in Step 9, the number of PDCHs occupied by theMS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extentthan that recorded in Step 5.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set

Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of

Support EDA.The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;



468

DSP PDCH: IDXTYPE=BYCELL, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;



469

149 Configuring MS High MultislotClasses

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119402MS High Multislot Classes.



l Dependency on Other Features– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.

This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended DynamicAllocation (EDA) when more than two timeslots are required on the uplink.



l Other Prerequisites– This feature is supported by MS.

Context

The function of MS High Multislot Classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/downlink timeslots to an MS, thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport High Multislot Class to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. For details,

see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes


470

2. Use the MS to download data in the test cell.3. Double-click the Packet Downlink Assignment message in the traced messages, and

query the value of the timeslot-allocation information element (IE). Verify that thenumber of 1s in the value of the IE in the corresponding binary bitmap reaches themaximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set

Support High Multislot Class to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example\\Activation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=SUPPORT;\\Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=NOTSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes


471

150 Configuring DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151DTM.



l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell or

GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).l License


l Other Prerequisites– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be

configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode.For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 142 Configuring BSSPaging Coordination.

– Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS canautomatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possibleafter the immediate assignment.

NOTEECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC.

– The MSC and MS support DTM.– The MSC must support the COMMON ID message.

ContextDTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can sendphotos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services areprocessed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the servicessimilar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the3G network in terms of coverage.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 150 Configuring DTM


472


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to make a CS call.2. Initiate the single-user CS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing CS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.3. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.4. Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.

Expected result: PS downloading services are performed successfully while the CScall is not affected.

NOTE

One of the following messages is traced: DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, orPacket Assignment.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and SUPPORT DTM toUNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating DTMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT;//Deactivating DTMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 150 Configuring DTM


473

151 Configuring Class11 DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403Class11 DTM.




– Features GBFD-114151 DTM and GBFD-119401 EDA have been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License



– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must beconfigured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode.For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 142 Configuring BSSPaging Coordination.


NOTEECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC.

– DTM should be supported by the MSC. Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.

ContextBased on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth for the uplink PS services ofthe MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channelassignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and onedownlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 151 Configuring Class11 DTM


474


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Make a CS call.2. Initiate the single-user CS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing CS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.3. Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.4. Use the MS to perform PS data uploading services.5. Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.6. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result.

Expected result:PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.

NOTE

One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request,DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.

Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that two uplink PDCHs are occupied by servicemessages.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating Class11 DTMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=SUPPORT;//Deactivating Class11 DTMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 151 Configuring Class11 DTM


475

152 Configuring HMC DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404HMC DTM.



l Dependencies on Other Features– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This

feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-119401 EDA,GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes.



l Other Prerequisites– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be

configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmissionmode.


– DTM should be supported by the MSC. DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.

ContextBased on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PSservices of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHsrespectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech +3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink.

The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31–33,36-38, and 41–44. The class 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot class32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires morethan or equal to three channels in the uplink.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 152 Configuring HMC DTM


476


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Make a CS call.2. Initiate the single-user CS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing CS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.3. Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.4. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.5. Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.6. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result.

Expected result:PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.

NOTE

One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request,DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.

Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that three PDCHs are occupied by servicemessages.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=SUPPORT;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 152 Configuring HMC DTM


477

153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s CircuitSwitched Data

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/sCircuit Switched Data.


– BTS3012/AE/3006C/3002E does not support this feature when using non optimisedDTRU.

– The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data of single-timeslot mode should be supported by the

MSC.

ContextHuawei GSM BSS supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with ahigh rate of 14.4 kbit/s for transparent data services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, selectNT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to check the value of

Data service allowed.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data


478

Expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data serviceallowed parameter are USED.

2. Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace thesignaling on the A interface.Expected result: The service has been initiated. After the signaling on the A interfaceis parsed, the value of Channel Type in the Assignment Request message is asfollows:– non-transparent data service

Figure 153-1 Non-transparent data service

– transparent data service

Figure 153-2 Transparent data service

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, deselect

NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data


479

154 Configuring High Speed CircuitSwitched Data

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119406High Speed Circuit Switched Data.


– BTS3900E supports this feature.– The following TRX modules support this feature: GRFU V2, MRFU V2, GRFU V2a,

MRFU V2a, MRFUd, MRFUe, RRU3008 V2, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3929,RRU3942, and RRU3926.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature is incompatible with the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA,

GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.l License

– The license of this feature has been activated.l Other Prerequisites

– The MS and the CN must support this feature.– The feature works in a BM/TC combined mode.– Dual-timeslot extension cells do not support multislot HSCSD. CS domain data services

can only use a single timeslot.

ContextWith this feature, a maximum of four TCHs can be combined to form a channel group. The datarate of such a channel group reaches up to 57.6 kbps, improving user experience.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, setECSC to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set DataService Allowed to Choose All, and set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data


480

and HSCSD Channel Scanning Period to appropriate values based on the networkplan.HSCSD Channel Scanning Period can be set to the default value.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set HSCSDTraffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate value based on the network plan or thedefault value.


5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step,set the following reserved parameters to appropriate values:– Bit 13 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to change the primary channel

when a single channel is upgraded to multiple channels or multiple channels aredegraded to a single channel after the MS initiates HSCSD user rate speedup orslowdown. If bit 13 is set to 1, the primary channel is not changed. If bit 13 is setto 0, the primary channel is changed.

– Bit 14 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to allow a call to preempt thesecondary channel for HSCSD services. If bit 14 is set to 1, the call can preemptthe secondary channel. If bit 14 is set to 0, the call cannot preempt the secondarychannel.

– Bit 1 of Reserved parameter 10: Specifies whether to allow HSCSD channelintegration. If bit 1 is set to 1, HSCSD channel integration is not allowed. If bit 1is set to 0, HSCSD channel integration is allowed.

l Verification ProcedureNOTE

The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has at least 2 consecutive idle TCHF channels.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setMaximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).

2. Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.3. Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on

the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.CS-based data services fail to be established. The Assignment Failure message istraced on the A interface.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setMaximum Number of HSCSD Channels to TWO_CHANNELS(TwoChannels).

5. Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.6. Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on

the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.CS-based data services are established.

7. Monitor the channel state in the cell. The services occupy two consecutive channels.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setMaximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating High Speed Circuit Switched Data



481

//Enabling ECSCSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, ECSC=YES;

//Setting the data service, the maximum number of channels allowed for an MS and the channel dynamic adjustment periodSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, DATATRAFFSET=NT14_5K-1&NT12K-1&NT6K-1&T14_4K-1&T9_6K-1&T4_8K-1&T2_4K-1&T1_2K-1&T600_BITS-1&T1200_75-1, HSCSDTRAFFSET=TWO_CHANNELS, HSCSDSCANPER=4500;

//Setting HSCSD traffic busy thresholdSET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDBUSYTHRES=80;

//Setting interface tagSET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;

//Setting that the primary channel is changed:SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=57343;

//Setting that a call cannot preempt the secondary channel for HSCSD services:SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=49151;

//Setting that HSCSD channel integration is allowed:SET GCELLOPTREV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CELLOPTRSVPARA10=65533;

//Deactivating High Speed Circuit Switched Data

SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDTRAFFSET=NOT_SUPPORT;



482

155 Configuring Resource Reservation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001Resource Reservation.



– This feature does not depend on other features.l Dependency on License

– The license for this feature is activated.

ContextWith the resource reservation feature, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for high-priority users to ensure their QoS.l Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, therefore ensuring the QoS of the

VIP users and improving user experience.l Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function,

operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In thisway, the operation revenue is increased.

This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi LevelPrecedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve theuser satisfaction.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setGrade Access Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved ChannelNumber to proper values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set

Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 155 Configuring Resource Reservation


483

2. Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH.3. Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT.4. Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the

CN in the assignment request.

Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call canbe established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.

5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered bythe CN in the assignment request.

Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call canbe established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set

Grade Access Allow to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value

of Grade Access Allow.

Expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7, REVCHANNUM=1;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7, REVCHANNUM=1;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=NO;LST GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 155 Configuring Resource Reservation


484

156 Configuring Enhanced Multi LevelPrecedence and Preemption (eMLPP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).






– The MSC, HLR, and MS support eMLPP.

Context

The eMLPP service offers a segmentation function. Using this feature, operators can providedifferentiated services for subscribers of different priorities. The eMLPP function ensures thespeech quality of high-priority MSs when the network traffic is heavy.

The MS needs to support eMLPP so that it can initiate calls of different priorities. This featureensures the service quality of high-priority calls by using methods such as preemption, queuing,direct retry, and forced handovers.

eMLPP involves two mechanisms: preemption and queuing.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCBASIC to query the value of AInterface Tag.


156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence andPreemption (eMLPP)


485

NOTE

If the value of A Interface Tag is not GSM_PHASE_2Plus, run the BSC6900 MML commandSET BSCBASIC to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, setPreemption Allowed to YES(Yes) to allow high-priority MSs to preempt resourcesfor low-priority MSs when there is no resource available for high-priority MSs.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set AllowEMLPP as required.


NOTEService preemption is used as an example to describe the verification procedure. Assume that in Step 3,Allow EMLPP is set to YES(Yes).

1. Prepare three test MSs (MS1, MS2, and MS3), and assign the highest priority for MS1and the lowest priority for MS3 on the HLR side.

2. Configure data on the MSC side. Ensure that the resources for low-priority MSs canbe preempted by high-priority MSs.

3. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set Trace Object SymbolType to IMSI and enter the IMSI of the MS to be traced.

4. Use MS2 and MS3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block

remaining idle TCHs in the cell.6. Check the measurement reports sent by MSs on TCHs and determine the numbers of

the TCHs occupied by MS2 and MS3, as shown in Figure 156-1.

Figure 156-1 Single User CS Trace dialog box

7. Use MS1 to make a PSTN call in the cell.8. If no neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports

sent by MS1 and check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3.




486

The call of MS3 is released. MS1 and MS2 continue their calls properly. Check themeasurement reports sent by MS1. The number of the TCH occupied by MS1 is thesame as that of the TCH occupied by MS3 in step 6. This indicates that MS1 occupiesthe TCH of MS3.

9. If neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports sentby MS1 to check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3 andcheck whether the preempted MS has been handed over to a neighboring cell tocontinue the call properly.MS1, MS2, and MS3 make calls properly. MS1 preempts the TCH of MS3, and MS3has been handed over to a neighboring cell. Check the measurement reports sent byMS3. The number of the TCH occupied by MS3 is a TCH number of the neighboringcell.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set

Preemption Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface

Tag to its original value in the activation procedure.

----End




487

157 Configuring Flow Control Based onCell Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.




– The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this featureis activated.

The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow ControlBased on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. Theformer one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.



Context

This feature is enabled when the BSC is congested to ensure the calls in VIP cells and the pagingto VIP MSs. This feature has no impact on the BSC operation or the high-priority call continuitysuccess rate.

This feature is applied to scenarios where traffic intensity becomes extremely great in case ofnatural disasters. When the GSM network is congested due to an unexpected traffic peak, VIPcells are created by splitting up existing cells or adding base stations. Special Location AreaCodes (LACs) are assigned to the VIP cells, and roaming areas are specified for the specialLACs at the CN. Only VIP MSs are allowed to camp on VIP cells, which avoids that a largenumber of common MSs camp on VIP cells and then VIP cells become congested again. TheCN does not impose roaming area limitation on a common cell. In this case, a large number ofusers may camp on a common cell. Then, congestion may occur to this common cell. As a result,services provided by the cell are affected.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority


488


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL or MOD GCELL. In this step, setVIP Cell to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set SupportPriority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIPAccess CPU Rate, and VIP Priority.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value of VIP Cell.

Expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCFCPARA to query the values of

Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPURate, and VIP Priority.

Expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES(Yes).The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIPPriority are set to some values.

3. When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rateof a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected.

Expected result: Ongoing services in the VIP cell and ongoing VIP services arenormal. In addition, call setup success rates of new services in the VIP cell and newVIP services increase.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set Support

Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set VIP Cell to NO

(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Setting a VIP cellADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="188", LAC=10, CI=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF, VIPCELL=YES;//Enabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority functionSET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPSHAREINCPURATE=50, VIPACCESSCPURATE=80, VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority functionSET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO;//Changing a cell from VIP to non-VIPMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VIPCELL=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority


489

158 Configuring Flow Control Based onUser Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115003Flow Control Based on User Priority.




– The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this featureis activated.

The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow ControlBased on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. Theformer one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.

l License



– The paging messages sent by the core network carries eMLPP information.

Context

With this feature, user signaling is differentiated based on user priority to ensure that servicesof high-priority users are not affected while signaling of low-priority users may be discarded.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set SupportPriority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes) and VIP Priority to an appropriate valuebased on the flow control imposed on calls of different priorities.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority


490

NOTE

Flow control is not performed on users whose priority is higher than VIP Priority.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate a large number of calls to make the traffic volume exceeds the system

specification.2. Deliver short message paging to high-priority users and speech paging to other users

at the core network side.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of

discarded paging messages.

Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are not discarded andthose for speech services are discarded.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA with Support PriorityBased Flow Control set to NO(No).

5. Repeat Step 2.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of

discarded paging messages.

Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are discarded and thosefor speech services are not discarded.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA with Support Priority

Based Flow Control set to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Activating Flow Control Based on User PrioritySET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Deactivating Flow Control Based on User PrioritySET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority


491

159 Configuring PS Service in Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907PS Service in Priority.






l Other Prerequisites– The MS and SGSN support this feature.

ContextUsing different resource scheduling policies on the Um interface, this feature makes it possibleto provide differentiated services for PS users of different priorities. This ensures betterexperience for high-priority users.


1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set SupportPS Service in Priority to SUPPORT(Support), MAC Scheduling Type toPFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling), and Downlink MinimumGuaranteed Rate and Rate Filter Time Window to appropriate values based on thesite requirements.


Assume that in the registration information, Traffic class is set to the same value:INTERACT for MS1 and MS2, and all other information is the same for both MSs exceptthe values of Traffic handling priority and Allocation/Retention priority.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 159 Configuring PS Service in Priority


492

1. When the Um interface quality is the same for MS1 and MS2, use the two MSs toperform EDGE download services with the same coding scheme and either of themoccupies four PDCHs. Observe the download rate.Expected result: The ratio of MS1 download rate to MS2 download rate is consistentwith the ratio of MS1 THP-ARP priority weight to MS2 THP-ARP priority weight.

NOTETHP-ARP priority weight can be configured in the MML command SET GCELLPSCHM.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support

PS Service in Priority to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating PS Service in PrioritySET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=SUPPORT, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=10, RATEFILTERTIMEWIN=50;//Deactivating PS Service in PrioritySET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=NOTSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 159 Configuring PS Service in Priority


493

160 Configuring Network Support SAIC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103Network Support SAIC.





l License



– The MS supports Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC).

Context

SAIC is a technique that restraints both intra-frequency and inter-frequency interference whenthe MS receives signals through a single antenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact ofinterference on the receive quality of downlink signals through signaling processing.

The SAIC-capable MS has a greater capability of bearing interference than the SAIC-incapableMS. Therefore, the power control policy can be adjusted for the SAIC-capable MS to reduce thetransmit power of the BTS, reducing interference in the entire network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set SAICAllowed to YES(Yes).

2. Set power control adjustment.

– When Huawei II power control algorithm is used:

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Network Support SAIC


494

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, setPower Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, setSwitch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On).

– When Huawei III power control algorithm is used:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, setPower Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing

Messages on the A Interface. Use the MS to make a CS voice call. Check the valueof Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance in the information element (IE)classmark-information-type3 of the Classmark Update message. This value indicatesthe SAIC capability of the MS.Expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance is SupportSAIC.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate Abis interface RSL message tracing by referring toTracing CS Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface. Check the value of the user-defined IE MS Capability in the channel activation command sent from theBSC6900 to the BTS during the assignment request process.Expected result: The value of SAIC support capability is 1. This indicates that the MSsupports SAIC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set SAIC

Allowed to NO(No).2. When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, Run the BSC6900 MML

command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAICPC Adjust to OFF(Off).

----End

Example//Activating Network Support SAICSET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=YES;SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICTHREDAPDTVALUE=1;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=ON;//Deactivating Network Support SAICSET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=NO;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Network Support SAIC


495

161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID+ TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).





l License



– This feature requires support from the CN.

– The MSC supports the LCS.

– The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context

The LCS is used to provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. Forexample, the LCS can locate the MS that initiates an emergency call or provide the informationon the MS location for other value added services (VAS). LCS can be categorized into threetypes: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS(cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA ofan MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cellID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sendsthe location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculatesthe MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information tothe MS through single user trace messages.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


496

Procedurel Activation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA. In this step, set Add TAto A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open).

l Activation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC, In this setp, set SMLC

Mode to INNER(Inner).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA. In this step, set Add TA

to A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open).l Verification Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))

1. Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the AInterface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.

2. Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.3. Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced

on the A interface.The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.

l Verification Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))1. Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A

Interface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.2. Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.3. Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced

on the A interface.The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.

l Deactivation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA. In this step, set Add TA

to A Interface EST IND to CLOSE(Close).l Deactivation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA. In this step, set Add TAto A Interface EST IND to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example//Activating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA)SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN;//Activating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA)ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="0", SMLCMode=INNER;SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN;//Deactivating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA)SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;//Deactivating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA)SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


497

162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID+ TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).





l License



– The CN must support this feature.

– The MSC supports the LCS.

– The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context

LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specificservices based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates anemergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services(VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-basedLCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID +TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculatesthe MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS locationbased on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In thesimple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID andTA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


498


1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).

NOTE

Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.

2. Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell.l Verification Procedure

1. Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the testcell.

2. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.3. Check that the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location

Response message are traced over the A interface after the MSC is triggered on theMSC side to request location information query. Check that the correct MS locationcan be displayed on the MSC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.

In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NSLATI=North_latitude;//Deactivation ProcedureMOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


499

163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (CellID + TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA).





l Other Prerequisites– The MSC supports the LCS.– The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

ContextThe LCS is used to provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. Forexample, the LCS can locate the MS that initiates an emergency call or provide the informationon the MS location for other value added services (VAS). LCS can be categorized into threetypes: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS(cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA ofan MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cellID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sendsthe location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculatesthe MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information tothe MS through single user trace messages.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)


500

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add SMLC configurationsto the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).

NOTE

To obtain the operator of a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL. OperatorName in the returned result specifies the operator.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLLCS to configure the LCSparameters of the test cell.

3. After the preceding configurations are complete, log out of the LMT and then log into it again.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages of a Single Subscriber. In this step, select the Location Flag check box.2. Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.3. Check the traced messages.

Verify that the MS location information sent to the MS is correct.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC to modify the SMLCconfigurations for the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode toNOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, NSLATI=North_latitude;//Deactivating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)


501

164 Configuring Lb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404Lb Interface.





l Other Prerequisites– The MSC supports the location service.– The MS supports the assisted GPS (AGPS) location service when the AGPS positioning

method is used.– The operator is configured. Assume that the operator name is op1.

ContextThe BSC6900 supports four types of location services:l NSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)l BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)l Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)l LCS based on an external Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) which is connected to

the BSC6900 through the Lb interface

The first three types of LCS adopt a built-in SMLC, that is, positioning is performed by the BSSinternal algorithm. The last type of LCS adopts an external SMLC, that is, positioning isperformed by a third-party network element. LCS based on a built-in SMLC and that based onan external SMLC cannot be used together. This feature is the last type of LCS.

The Lb interface is a standard interface between BSC and SMLC. The main function of theSMLC is to locate an MS based on the measurement results reported by the MS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 164 Configuring Lb Interface


502

Huawei BSS equipment supports the standard Lb interface, and therefore can be interconnectedwith the SMLC of other vendors. Figure 164-1 shows the position of the SMLC in the network.

Figure 164-1 Position of the SMLC in the network

Generally, one BSC is connected to only one SMLC. When the BSS Sharing feature is enabled,one BSC can be interconnected with four SMLCs of four different operators.

A BSC can be connected to an SMLC in the following ways:l By adding an Lb interface board

TDM or IP transport can be used over the Lb interface.l Without adding an Lb interface board

– In BM/TC separated configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lb interface,the Lb interface must be configured on the Ater interface board of the BM subrack oron the A interface board of the TC subrack.

– In BM/TC combined configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lbinterface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A interface board.

– If IP transport is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on theA or Abis interface board of the BM subrack.

To connect the BSC6900 to an SMLC, data needs to be negotiated and planned for the Lbinterface. Table 164-1 and Table 164-2 provide Lb interface configuration examples.

Table 164-1 Lb interface configuration example (TDM transport)

Parameters Configuration Data Source

OSP Code 1 Negotiated with the peer end

DSP Code 2 Negotiated with the peer end

Network ID NATB(NATB) Negotiated with the peer end

OSP code bits BIT14 Negotiated with the peer end

SS7 protocol type ITUT(ITUT) Negotiated with the peer end

Signalling link code 0 Negotiated with the peer end

Link rate type 64K(64Kbit/s) Negotiated with the peer end



503

Parameters Configuration Data Source

Link timeslot (A interfacetimeslot mask or A interfacetimeslot mask)

TS16(Timeslot 16) Negotiated with the peer end

Test Code Length 10 Negotiated with the peer end

Test Code 170 Negotiated with the peer end

Table 164-2 Lb interface configuration example (IP transport)

Parameter Configuration Data Source

OSP Code 1 Negotiated with the peer end

DSP Code 2 Negotiated with the peer end

Network ID NATB(NATB) Negotiated with the peer end

OSP code bits BIT14 Negotiated with the peer end

SS7 protocol type ITUT(ITUT) Negotiated with the peer end

Local entity type M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end

Destination Entity Type M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end

Traffic mode M3UA_OVERRIDE_MOD(Active/Standby Mode)

Negotiated with the peer end

Work mode M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end

In multiple local signaling points scenarios, configure the Lb interface according to the followingoperations. Specifically, establish the relationship between the signaling points and the SMLCsand configure related link and route information for the signaling points and the SMLCs.

Procedurel Activation Procedure (Adding an Lb interface board)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an interface board. In this step,set Board Class to INT, and set Subrack No., Slot No., Board Type, and otherparameters to appropriate values.

2. Select one of the following activation procedures based on the transport technologyadopted over the Lb interface:

l Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated Configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb InterfaceConfigured on an Ater Interface Board of the BM Subrack)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP

name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation, set DSP code tothe signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toMTP3(MTP3).



504

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step,set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLCMode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC Mode for thetarget SMLC.

If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC.In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name, and set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 to add an E1/T1 over the Aterinterface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connectionpath index to a value that is not in use; set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port Noaccording to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signallinglink set index to a value that is not in use.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.In this step, set Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4, TC mode toSEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface), Ater connection path index tothe index added in Step 3, Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to values thatare not in use, and Ater Mask to the negotiated value.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link setindex to the index added in Step 4.

l Activation Procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb Interface Configured on A Interface Board)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP

name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code tothe signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toMTP3(MTP3).


NOTE



3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link to the targetport on the A interface board. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port No tothe port that the link is connected. Then, set other parameters to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signallinglink set index to a value that is not in use.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC) orTOGETHER(BSC/TC Together). Then set other parameters based on thenegotiation or the transmission configuration.



505

NOTE

l In BM/TC separated configuration mode, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC); set Ater connection path index to the value that is in use; set Signalling linkcode and MTP2 link No. to values that are not in use; set A interface subrack No., A interfaceslot No., and A interface port No. according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface;set Ater Mask and A interface timeslot mask to the values negotiated with the SMLC.

l In BM/TC combined configuration mode, set TC mode to TOGETHER(BSC/TCTogether); set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to the values that are not in use; set Ainterface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No. based on the actual cableconnection over the Lb interface; set A interface timeslot mask to the negotiated value.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link setindex to the index added in Step 4.

l Activation Procedure (Lb over IP)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP

name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code tothe signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toM3UA(M3UA).


NOTE



3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity. In thisstep, set Local entity No. to a value that is not in use; set OSP index and Local entitytype based on the network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity.In this step, set Destination entity No. to a value that is not in use; set Local entityNo. and DSP index to the values specified in Step 3 and Step 1 respectively; setDestination entity type to an appropriate value.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. In thisstep, set Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and Logic Port Flag based on thenetwork plan; set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) andApplication type to M3UA(M3UA); set First local IP address, First destinationIP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to the values negotiated with theengineers of the SMLC.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set. In thisstep, set Signalling link set index to a value that is not in use. In this step:– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP) in Step 3, set Work

mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) in Step 3 and

Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA SP) in Step 4, set Workmode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). Otherwise, set Workmode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).



506

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step,set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the values specified inStep 4 and Step 6 respectively.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this step,set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 6; set SCTP link No. tothe value specified in Step 5; set Signaling link ID, Subrack No., Slot No., andM3UA Signaling link name according to the actual situation.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC

Mode.

Expected result: The value of SMLC Mode is OUTER(Outer).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC. In this step, set DSP index to DSP

index of the SMLC.

Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible. The value of MTP3DSP state is Available or the value of M3UA DSP state is Available.

3. Initiate a location service on the LCS client side, as shown in Figure 164-1.

Expected result: The target MS is located.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command. In this step, set SMLC Mode toNOTSUPPORT.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure (BM/TC separated configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb interface configured on an Ater interface board)*///Adding a DPCADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=MTP3;//Adding an SMLCADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2;//Adding an E1/T1 link over the Ater InterfaceADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=0, SRN=0, SN=10, PN=12;//Adding an MTP3 signaling link setADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=2, NAME="MTP3LKS";//Adding an MTP3 signaling linkADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=10, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-1&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, MTP2LNKN=2, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";//Adding an MTP3 signaling routeADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT";

/*Activation procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb interface configured on an A interface board)*///Adding a DPCADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=MTP3;//Adding an SMLCADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2;//Configuring the A interface E1/T1



507

ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=10, PN=14, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLNULL, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC;//Adding an MTP3 signaling link setADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=2, NAME="MTP3LKS";//Adding an MTP3 signaling linkADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=0, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=10, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=14, ATSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-1&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";//Adding an MTP3 signaling routeADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT";

/*Activation procedure (Lb over IP)*///Adding a DPCADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=M3UA;//Adding an SMLCADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2;//Adding an M3UA local entityADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_ASP, NAME="m3ualocal";//Adding an M3UA destination entityADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=0, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_SGP, NAME="m3uaaim";//Adding an SCTP linkADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=10, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="10.20.30.40", PEERIP1="10.20.30.50", PEERPN=1024, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an M3UA link setADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=1, NAME="m3uaidx";//Adding an M3UA routeADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="m3uarot";//Adding an M3UA linkADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=0, SN=10, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="m3ua";

/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling the SMLC modeMOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;



508

165 Configuring Abis over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601Abis over IP.


The BSC configured with the built-in PCU, that means the DPUd or DPUg board isconfigured.The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position.The BTS supports IP transmission.

l Dependencies on Other FeaturesThis feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML onAbis Interface, MRFD-210206 Tree Topology, MRFD-210205 Chain Topology,GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking and GBFD-119301 Voice FaultDiagnosis together.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the BTS is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.When IP fault detection based on BFD is configured, the device connected to the BSCsupports BFD.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 165 Configuring Abis over IP


509

ContextNOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS automatically performs theBidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on links. In this case, the BTS is not allowed to use the deviceIP address in communication.

With this feature, the BSC is connected to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on thelocation of the BSC and the BTS. This feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports theIPv4 protocol.

BFD applies to the following scenarios:When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as aBTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When theBSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detectswhether the peer device is available.With BFD, IP route reselection is triggered when thegateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,GOUc, or GOUd board.

2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the EquipmentData.


4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring theTransmission Data.

5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock.6. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS

Configuration.7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set the

parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detectlocal ip based on the actual networking.

NOTE

l BFD requires support from both the local and peer devices and takes effect only when BFDis enabled for both the local and peer devices. Otherwise, services may fail.

l If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode toCHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, setCheck mode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT.

l If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IPaddress to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address.

l If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hopBFD detect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IPaddress to an IP address that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.

l Verification Procedure1. Verifying data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slotnumber, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the



510

BTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command executionresult.The expected result: The value of Port state is Activated and Link AvailabilityStatus is Available.

2. Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of anadjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidthby checking related parameters, for example, Operation state.The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the relatedbandwidth is greater than 0.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPDlink is functional.The expected result: The value of Usage status is Normal.

3. Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP pathis available.The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the availablebandwidth is greater than 0.

4. Optional: Verifying the BFD

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query the value of Checkstate.The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.


----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring TransmissionData of Chapter Configuring GSM BTS and Cell Data in the BSC6900 GSM InitialConfiguration.



511

166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611Abis IP over E1/T1.


– The PEUa/POUc board is in position.– The BTS supports IP transmission.

l Dependencies on Other FeaturesThis feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface andGBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis together.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

ContextNOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

A license is required to implement Abis over IP.

When TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be usedto carry traffic and signaling data.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a PEUa/POUc board.2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment

Data.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1


512


4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring theTransmission Data.

5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring toConfiguring the BTS Clock.

6. Activate the base station configuration by referring toActivating the BTSConfiguration.


1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

a. Run the MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.

b. If the PPP link is used, run the MML command DSP PPPLNK to query LinkState, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address. If the link state is normal andthe values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with dataconfigurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission linkis faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

c. If the MLPPP link is used, run the MML command DSP MPGRP to query LinkState, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and run the DSP MPLNKcommand to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. If the link state isnormal, the value of LCP Negotiation State is Connect available, and thevalues of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with dataconfigurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission linkis faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

d. If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with SourceIP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNKcommand and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets canbe received, the PPP link is normal.

e. If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP withSource IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSPMPGRP command and Destination IP address et to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can bereceived, the MLPPP link is normal.

2. Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface

a. Run the MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link isnormal. If Usage status is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), the LAPD link isfunctional.

b. Run the MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node,the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checkingrelated parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state isAvailable and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node isnormal.

3. Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface

a. Run the MML command DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available.If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0,the IP path is functional.




513


----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring theTransmission Data of Chapter Configuring the BTS in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.



514

167 Configuring Abis MUX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604Abis MUX.


The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The BTSsupports UDP multiplexing.


This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 AbisIP over E1/T1.


ContextAbis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serveas transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmittingend multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing requirements. Multiple UDPpackets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexedat the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmissionefficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX with IP MUX Type set toABISMUX and Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH set to appropriatevalues. Exectution of this command aims to add an IP MUX pipe to enable themultiplexing of IP packets.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 167 Configuring Abis MUX


515

NOTE

The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to anappropriate value according to the actual situation.

When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(YES), you can specify the PHB type of the IPMUX to beenabled by setting PHB.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW with ServiceType set to an appropriate value if required to add the ABIS-MUX flow on the BTS.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of Abix

MUX.The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable Abis MUX.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW to disable Abis

MUX on the BTS.

----End

Example//Activating Abis MUXADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO,IPMUXINDEX=0;ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;//Deactivating Abis MUXRMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0;RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 167 Configuring Abis MUX


516

168 Configuring Abis IPHC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118612Abis IPHC.


– BTS3012 series are configured with the DPTU board.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 has been configured before this featureis activated.



ContextIn IP over E1/T1 mode, typical small packets (for example, speech data) of standard IP packetsover the Abis interface only account for 50% to 60% of the payload, which indicates lowtransmission efficiency. This feature can compress IP or UDP headers to increase the payloadand save IP transmission resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the specified base station.In this step, set BTS Index and BTS Name to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step,set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUcand set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 168 Configuring Abis IPHC


517

NOTE

If the BSC works in IP over FE/GE mode:l Enable IPHC first on the routers, then on the BTSs, but not on the BSC.l Configure the routers to support only the compression of non-TCP packet headers (that is, UDP

packet headers).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK or MOD BTSMPGRP. Inthis step, set IP Header Compression to ENABLE(ENABLE).

CAUTIONWhen you set IP Header Compression in this step, the BTS reinitiates a negotiationwith the BSC or router on establishing a PPP link or an MP group. The negotiationmay cause no audio or interrupt data transmission for less than 3s.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the specified base station.In this step, set BTS Index and BTS Name to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the MML command DSP BTSPPPLNK or DSP BTSMPGRP.

Expected result: The value of IPHC Negotiation Result reported by the BTS isENABLE.

2. Observe the traffic during a call.Expected result: The traffic is heavier when IP Header Compression is set toDISABLE(DISABLE) than when it is set to ENABLE(ENABLE).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the specified base station.

In this step, set BTS Index and BTS Name to appropriate values.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step,

set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUcand set Head compress to No_HC(No_HC).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK or MOD BTSMPGRP. Inthis step, set IP Header Compression to DISABLE(DISABLE).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the specified base station.In this step, set BTS Index and BTS Name to appropriate values.

----End

Example/*Activating Abis IPHC*/

//Deactivating a BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=601;

//Activating Abis IPHC by configuring a PPP linkMOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC;MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;

//Activating Abis IPHC by configuring an MP groupMOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC;MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;



518

//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=601;

/*Deactivating Abis IPHC*/

//Deactivating a BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=601;

//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the PPP linkMOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=No_HC;MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;

//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the MP linkMOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=No_HC;MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;

//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=601;



519

169 Configuring A over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602A over IP.


The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position.l Dependencies on Other Features

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115701 TFO,GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, and GBFD-115711EVAD.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is configured. For details, seeConfiguring a Board.The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Other PrerequisitesThe MSC/MGW suports the A over IP.When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.When IP fault detection based on BFD is configured, the device connected to the BSCsupports BFD.

Context

A over IP supports only the IPv4 protocol.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 169 Configuring A over IP


520

When A over IP is enabled, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSCdoes not perform transcoding. The A interface uses IP over FE/GE transmission.




2. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data LinkLayer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd Board.

3. Configure the user plane over the A interface (over IP) by referring to Configuringthe Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

4. Configure the user plane over the A interface (over IP) by referring to Configuringthe Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the AdjacentNode.

5. Configure the user plane over the A interface (over IP) by referring to Configuringthe User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set theparameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detectlocal ip based on the actual networking.

NOTE





l Verification Procedure1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slotnumber, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to theBTS.The expected result: Port state is Activated, and Link Availability Status isAvailable. That is, the links carried on the port are normal.

b. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to display thesetting of Status of ETHTRK.The expected result: Status of ETHTRK is UP, which indicates that the linkaggregation group is normal.

c. Optional: Run the MML command DSP ETHTRKLNK to display the settingof Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port.



521

The expected result: Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is UP, which indicatesthat the sub-port for the link aggregation group is normal.

2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCPDSP state.The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that theSCCP DSP is normal.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings ofOperation status and Activated status.The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status isActivated. That is, the link set is normal.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whetherOperation state is Normal.The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTPlink is normal.

3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operationstate of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and availablebandwidth.The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth isgreater than 0.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting ofOperation state.The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidthis greater than 0.




----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring the A Interface(over IP) in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.



522

170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.


The PEUa/POUc board is in position.l Dependencies on Other Features

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.The PEUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.

ContextWhen this feature is enabled, the traffic and signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IPtransmission over the A interface. The port of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag, UmInterface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1


523

2. In the MPS/EPS, configure the physical layer and data link layer for the PEUa boardby referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUaBoard or configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board byreferring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

3. Configure the control plane of the A interface.4. Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the

adjacent node.5. Configure the user plane of the A interface.

l Verification Procedure1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of PortState..The expected result: Port State. is normal.

b. Check the state of the link.

– The link is a PPP link.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settingsof Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP addressset to the value of Local IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step,and Destination IP address set to the value of Peer IP address obtainedin the preceding sub-step.The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

– The link is an MLPPP link.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settingsof Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settingsof Link state and LCP negotiated state.The expected result: Both Link state and LCP negotiated state areavailable.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP addressset to the value of Local IP address, and Destination IP address set tothe value of Peer IP address.The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCPDSP state.The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that theSCCP DSP is normal.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings ofOperation status and Activated status.The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status isActivated. That is, the link set is normal.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whetherOperation state is Normal.



524

The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTPlink is normal.

3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operationstate of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and availablebandwidth.The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth isgreater than 0.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting ofOperation state.The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the available bandwidthis greater than 0.


----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring A over IP inthe BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.



525

171 Configuring UDP MUX for ATransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610UDP MUX for A Transmission.


The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The CoreNetwork (CN) supports UDP multiplexing.


This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IPover E1/T1.


l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.Enable RTCP has been set to ON(Open) by running the MOD GCNNODE command.

ContextWhen this feature is enabled, multiple Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets aremultiplexed onto one UDP packet. In this way, the proportion of the packet header to the totalpacket decreases, and therefore the A interface transmission efficiency is improved.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX with IP MUX Type toUDPMUX and Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, IS QOSPATH, Sender UDP MUXMode, and Receive UDP MUX Mode to appropriate values. Repeat this step if thisfeature is to be enabled on the A interfaces between the BSC and multiple CN devices.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission


526

NOTE

Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time[ms] must be set as required.

The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to anappropriate value according to the actual situation.

When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(Yes), you can specify the PHB type of the UDP MUX tobe enabled by setting PHB.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of UDP

MUX for A Transmission.The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE to set the

subracks to ineffective mode.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable IP MUX.

----End

Example//Activating UDP MUX for A transmissionADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=UDPMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, UDPMUXMODSEND=NORTPCOMP, UDPMUXMODRECV=RTPCOMP, IPMUXINDEX=0;//Deactivating UDP MUX for A transmissionSET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE: SRN=1;RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission


527

172 Configuring TDM/IP DualTransmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.


– The DPUc or DPUf board is in position.– The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board is in position.– The MSC or MGW supports this feature. In addition, the configuration of this feature

is complete.l Dependency on Other Features

– This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IPover E1/T1.



l Initial Data Preparation– The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. A over TDM transmission is used.

ContextThis feature enables TDM transmission and IP transmission to be used simultaneously over theA interface on the BSC side. This feature is applicable to the scenario where GSM is upgradedfrom the TDM network to the IP network.

Whether the user plane on the A interface uses TDM transmission or IP transmission isdetermined by the MSC in the assignment procedure or in the incoming BSC handoverprocedure.



172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over AInterface


528

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a DPUc or DPUf board.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCTYPE. In this step, set Subrack No. and

Slot No. to those of the DPU board which configured in step 1. In addition, set Thetype of TC resource to ITC(Packet Conversion).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board.

4. Configure A over IP transmission.– When IP over FE/GE transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations

by referring to 169 Configuring A over IP.– When IP over E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations

by referring to 170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type

to MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA). In addition, specify Net PRI as required.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for

A Interface User Plane to TDM_IP, and set Report BSS TransmissionCapability to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the settings of MTP3

DSP state and M3UA DSP state.The expected result: MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state are both Available.

2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Make a call in the cell. The call is successfullyestablished.

3. Observe the speech codec list Information Element (IE) is correctly carried in the CmService Request message on the A interface.The expected result, "full-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both1.

NOTE

When "codec-type" is cs-data, "pcm-over-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IEare both 1.

4. View the assignment request message.The expected result:– The circuit-identity-code IE is carried when the Core Network (CN) instructs the

user plane to use TDM transmission, as shown in Figure 172-1.

Figure 172-1 Assignment request message in TDM transmission

– The aoip-transport-layer-address-mgw and speech codeclist-msc-preferred IEs arecarried when the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, as shown inFigure 172-2.




529

Figure 172-2 Assignment request message in IP transmission

5. Check whether the assignment complete message carries the related IEs.The expected result:– When the CN instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, the assignment

complete message does not carry the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.– When the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, the assignment

complete message carries the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Change the TDM/IP dual transmission mode over A interface to TDM transmission.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for

A Interface User Plane to TDM, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability toNO(No).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear typeto MTP3.

----End

Example/*Activating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface*

//Configure the DPUc/DPUf

ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=DPU, BRDTYPE=DPUc, SN=10, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the TC type of the DPUc/DPUf

SET TCTYPE: SRN=0, SN=10, TCTYPE=ITC;

//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over FE/GE

ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=GOUa, SN=26, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over E1/T1

ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=24, RED=YES, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over FE/GE

ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0;ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123";ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.23", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over E1/T1




530

SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, WORKMODE=E1, PTTXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME, PTRXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME;SET OPT: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, OPTM=SDH;ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123";ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=24, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=10, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=YES, DEVIP="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="10.171.35.100", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;ADD MPLNK:SRN=0, SN=24, PPPLNKN=0, MPGRPN=10, DS1=191, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&30-1&TS31-1, BRDTYPE=POUc, RESTARTTMR=3, FCSTYPE=16bit, KEEPALIVE=2;

//Configure the control plane of the A interface

ADD SCTPLNK:SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, APP=M3UA, PEERPN=3055, LOCIP1="10.171.35.123", PEERIP1="10.171.30.100", LOCPN=3055, SWITCHBACKHBNUM=10, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, MODE=CLIENT, DSCP=48, RTOMIN=150, RTOMAX=3000, RTOINIT=1000, RTOALPHA=12, RTOBETA=25, HBINTER=1000, MAXASSOCRETR=4, MAXPATHRETR=2, CHKSUMTX=NO, CHKSUMRX=NO, CHKSUMTYPE=CRC32, MTU=800, CROSSIPFLAG=UNAVAILABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES, BUNDLINGFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=ENABLE, VLANID1=3900, VLANFLAG2=DISABLE;ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="TEST";ADD M3LNK:SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, PRIORITY=0, LNKREDFLAG=M3UA_MASTER_MOD, NAME="TEST";

//Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the adjacent node

ADD ADJNODE:ANI=0, NAME="MSC_2G", NODET=A;

//Configure the user plane of the A interface

ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", PEERIPADDR="10.171.35.100", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

//Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC

MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM_IP, CodecRptFlg=YES;MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3_M3UA, NETPRI=M3UA_FIRST;

/*Deactivating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface*

//Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC

MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM, CodecRptFlg=NO;MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3;




531

173 Configuring Gb over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603Gb over IP.


– The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is in position.– The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured.


feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The SGSN supports Gb over IP.– The BSC and its peer device must support BFD.

ContextGb over IP enables operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) betweenthe BSC and the SGSN.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 173 Configuring Gb over IP


532

2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd Board.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE with Operator Name andSGSN Node ID set to appropriate values to add an SGSN node.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE with NSE Identifier, Subrack No.,Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name, SGSN Node ID, and SubnetworkConfigure Mode set to appropriate values to add an NSE.

5. Configure the NSVL.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL with Local NSVLID, NSE Identifier, Local IP Address, Local UDP Port No., Subrack No.,and Slot No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the BSC side.

NOTE

When port IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to theport IP address of the interface board in Step 2. When device IP addresses are used forthe communication, Local IP Address is set to the device IP address of the interfaceboard in Step 2.

b. Optional: When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE withRemote NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDPPort No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the SGSN side.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC with PTP BVC Identifier set toan appropriate value, Cell Name set to the name of the GPRS cell that needs to bebound, and NSE Identifier set to that of the NSE added in Step 4. Execution of thiscommand aims to add a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC).

7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set theparameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detectlocal ip based on the actual networking.

NOTE






1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Subrack No., Slot No., Source IPaddress, and Destination IP address set to appropriate values.

NOTE

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is DYNAMIC(Dynamic), you need to setSource IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL andDestination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE.

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), you need to set SourceIP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and DestinationIP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE.



533

The expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicatesthat the IP link on the Gb interface is functional.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GBIPROUTE with NSE Identifier, LocalNSVL ID, or Remote NSVL ID set to an appropriate value.The expected result: IP Path State is Normal, which indicates that the IP path at theservice layer on the Gb interface is functional.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC with NSE Identifier set to anappropriate value to check whether SIG BVC State is Normal.The expected result: SIG BVC State is Normal, which indicates that the SIG PVCon the signaling plane of the Gb interface is normal.



l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

ExampleFor configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring Gb over IPin the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.



534

174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118607IP Performance Monitor.


– The Abis interface is configured with an FG2a, GOUa, FG2c, GOUc, FG2d, or GOUdboard.

– The BTS version supports this feature.


– The feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License


Context

IP performance monitoring (IP PM) is a solution for quick QoS supervision on the IP transportnetwork.

CAUTIONl This feature cannot be used together with link aggregation and load sharing.

l IP PM complies Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from both the BSC andthe BTS.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor


535

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. In this step, setInterface Type to ABIS(Abis Interface) and specify Adjacent node ID, IP pathID, IP path type, Forward Bandwidth, and Backward Bandwidth.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT IPPM to activate IP PM for the target IPpath. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH.

NOTE

l If IP path type is set to QoS(QoS) in Step 1, set IS QOSPATH to YES(YES) in Step 2.

l If IP path type is not set to QoS(QoS) in Step 1, set IS QOSPATH to NO(NO) in Step 2.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPPM to query the configured IP PM

sessions.

Expected result: All configured IP PM sessions are displayed.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPM to query the IP PM status of the target

IP path. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID and IP path ID.

Expected result: The value of IPPM State is UP and all measured values are validfor IP paths that carry services.

3. Start Monitoring the IPPM Traffic on the LMT. Set Subrack No. to the number ofthe subrack where the local IP address of the IP path is located. If the IP path is a QoSpath, set Trace Type to QOS. If the IP path is not a QoS path, set Trace Type toOther.

Expected result: The value of Task Status is Normal and all measured values arevalid for IP paths that carry services.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM to deactivate the IP PM session for

the target IP path. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID and IP path ID.

----End

Example//Activating IP PM//Adding an IP pathADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Activating IP PM for a QoS path when PHB is set to BE and EFACT IPPM: ANI=3, PATHID=17, ISQOSPATH=YES, PHB=BE-1&AF11-0&AF12-0&AF13-0&AF21-0&AF22-0&AF23-0&AF31-0&AF32-0&AF33-0&AF41-0&AF42-0&AF43-0&EF-1, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=OFF;

//Deactivating IP PM//Deactivating IP PM for the target IP pathDEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor


536

175 Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630Ethernet OAM.


– The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Abis or Ainterface, or the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Gbinterface.

– The interconnected transmission equipment must comply with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah standard protocols.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

l License



– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support the feature.

– The BBU is configured with a GTMUb board.

Context

As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM reports the network status at the data link layer. Therefore,the network is monitored and managed more effectively.

The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah)and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).


– Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 175 Configuring Ethernet OAM


537

– BSC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the EFM OAMfunction.

– BTS

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT. In this step, set 3ahSwitch to OPEN(Open).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHOAMAH to activate theBTS EFM OAM function.

– Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM– BSC

NOTEThe values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must beconsistent on the two ends.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add a maintenancedomain (MD) for the Ethernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MDIndex, MD Level, and MD Name to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add an Ethernet OAMmaintenance association (MA). In this step, set MD Index to the value specifiedin 1, and set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MA Name to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add a maintenanceentity group end point (MEP) for Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step,set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep),Port Type to ETHER, and MA Index to the value specified in 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add an MEP forEthernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriatevalue, MEP Type to RemoteMep(RemoteMep), and MA Index to the valuespecified in 2.

NOTEMEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate theconnectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity betweenthe local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the valuespecified in 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in 3.

– BTS

NOTEThe values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must beconsistent on the two ends.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMD to add a MD for BTSEthernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MD Level and MD Name toappropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMA to add a BTS EthernetOAM MA. In this step, set MD Name to the value specified in 1, and set VLANID and MA Name to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHLCMEP to add an MEPfor BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step, set MEP ID to anappropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to thevalue specified in 2.



538

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHRMMEP to add an MEPfor BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to anappropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to thevalue specified in 2.

NOTEMEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHCC to activate theconnectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity betweenthe local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MD Name to the valuespecified in 1, MA Name to the value specified in 2, and MEP ID to the valuespecified in 3.


– Verifying point-to-point Ethernet OAM

1. After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarm ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AHDiscovery Failure is reported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end doesnot support the EFM OAM function.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR EFMLOOPTST to start EFM OAMremote loopback test. After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarmALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported if the loopback issuccessful because the loopback operation blocks the ongoing services.

– Verifying end-to-end Ethernet OAM

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING MAC. In this step, set MA Index andMEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to theMEP ID of the peer device.

Expected result: The number of received packets equals the number of sent packets.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command TRC MAC. In this step, set MA Index andMEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to theMEP ID of the peer device.

Expected result: The returned result contains "Succeed in tracing the destinationaddress".


– Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM

– BSC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the EFM OAMfunction.

– BTS

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT. In this step, set 3ahSwitch to CLOSE(Close).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHOAMAH to deactivate theBTS EFM OAM function.

– Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM

– BSC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate theconnectivity test of Ethernet OAM.



539

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to remove the MEPs forEthernet OAM at the two ends.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to remove an EthernetOAM MA.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to remove an EthernetOAM MD.

– BTS

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHCC to deactivate theconnectivity test of BTS Ethernet OAM.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHRMMEP to remove anMEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHLCMEP to remove anMEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMA to remove a BTSEthernet OAM MA.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMD to remove a BTSEthernet OAM MD.

----End

Example//Activating Ethernet OAM

Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM//BSCACT EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0;//BTSSET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=OPEN;ACT BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0;

Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM//BSCADD CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, LEVEL=0, MDNAME="md0";ADD CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, VLANID=2, MAIDX=0, MANAME="ma0";ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=LocalMep, MEPID=1, PORTTYPE=ETHER, SN=18, PN=0;ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=RemoteMep, MEPID=2, SN=18;ACT CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;//BTSADD BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MDLEVEL=0;ADD BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", VLANID=2;ADD BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2, PN=0;ADD BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=1;ACT BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2;//Deactivating Ethernet OAM

Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM//BSCDEA EFMAH: SRN=0,SN=18,PN=0;//BTSSET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE;DEA BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0;



540

Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM//BSCDEA CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=2;RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=1;RMV CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0;RMV CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0;//BTSDEA BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2;RMV BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=1;RMV BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2;RMV BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0";RMV BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0";



541

176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTSAutomatic Configuration and Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E.


– None

l License



– The initial parameters required for BTS automatic planning algorithm are set in onlinemode through the M2000 client.

Contextl The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a

maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configuredin O2 mode.

l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.

l After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can connect with theBSC automatically with the network automatic detection feature. Operators do not need toconfigure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based onfrequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surroundingfrequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration andplanning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployedor swapped sites. By using this feature, site deployment duration is decreased and operatorintervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced.


176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning


542

l Before the automatic planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithmmust be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTSadjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress andresult of the BTS GSM automatic planning and perform data analysis and fault location onthe M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

l If the version of the BSC is V900R012 or later vesions, the BSC supports the automaticconfiguration and automatic planning of 128 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode,and the M2000 supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 512BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode.


1. Run the MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to establish the BTS in automaticplanning mode. The established BTS is enabled with the automatic planning featureby default. The automatic planning algorithm switch and automatic optimizationalgorithm switch are set to ON.

NOTE

l The established BTS that is in automatic planning mode enables the automatic planning featureautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first automatic planning scansucceeds, the BTS does not enable the automatic planning feature automatically after the BTSis powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run theBSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO.

l For the BTS3900E, set BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM(BTS3900E GSM), and set Freq.and BSIC Plan Switch and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switchand to ON(ON). Then, runthe BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site dataautomatically.

l For the BTS3900B, set BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM(BTS3900B GSM), and set Freq.and BSIC Plan Switch,CGI and RAC Plan Switch,and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch toON(ON). Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to planthe site data automatically.

2. If setIs Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support),run the BSC6900 MMLcommandSET BTSIPCLKPARA,and then set Clock Protocol Type to PTP(PTPProtocol). Or else, go toStep 3.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.l Verification procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check thestatus of the related switches are set to ON(ON).

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Index

type to BYNAME(By Name), set BTS Name to MICRO, set BTS ConfigurationMode to NORMAL(NORMAL).




543

CAUTION1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), all the automatic

planning and automatic optimization switches are deactivated.2. The deactivation of the feature during the automatic planning will result in the reset of

the BTS.

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP,BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18", MAINDEVTAB="11112222223333334444",SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="micro_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="111", LAC=1214, CI=1000, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254";SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CLKPRTTYPE=PTP, DN=1, CLKTOPOMODE=PTPOVERUDP, SYNMODE=CONSYN, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT,MASTERIPADDR="10.10.20.1";ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="Micro";//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="Micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;




544

177 Configuring PICO Synchronization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602PICO Synchronization.


– Neighboring cells of the BTS3900B are available and the neighboring relations areconfigured.

– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.



l License

– The license of this feature is activated.

Contextl The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.

l In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multipleBTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clocksynchronization function of the BTS3900B implements the Um frequency synchronizationwith the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is13 MHz.

l After the feature is activated, you do not need to configure a clock server for the BTS3900B.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type toUM_CLK(Um Clock).

l Verification procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK, and then check that ClockType is set to UM_CLK(Um Clock).

l Deactivation procedure

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 177 Configuring PICO Synchronization


545

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type toINT_CLK(Internal Clock).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=UM_CLK;//Verification procedureLST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 177 Configuring PICO Synchronization


546

178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.


– None

l License



– The M2000 supports the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature.

Contextl The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is license-controlled.

l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. Pico auto-planning indicates that the BTS3900Bscans the uplink and downlink frequencies of operators according to the frequency bandcapability of the BTS3900B. The M2000 evaluates the interference condition of eachfrequency according to the scanning result. In addition, considering the neighboringrelationship of the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimuminterference as the frequency of the BTS3900B. PICO Dual-band Auto-planning supportsthe 900 MHz/1800 MHz and 850 MHz/1900 MHz dual-band scenarios on the basis of theoriginal single-band auto-planning function. PICO auto-planning helps operators toimplement fast network deployment and flexible network adjustment and reduce theworkload of manual configuration.

l Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm shouldbe set in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS neighboring relations,BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900B

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning


547

GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. Fordetails, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

l The auto-planning function is mostly used in the site setup scenario. During the executionof the auto-planning function, the services within the network coverage of the BTS3900Bare disrupted.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the auto-planningBTS3900B, and set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support). Theadded BTS3900B is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition,the auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set toON, and the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is set to NO(NO) bydefault.

NOTE

l The added BTS3900B that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning functionautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scansucceeds, the BTS3900B does not enable the auto-planning function automatically duringthe subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needsto be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch,auto-optimization algorithm switch and Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switchaccording to the actual conditions. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RSTAUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. The Frequency BandAdaptationAllowed switch has impacts on the auto-planning result. Operators can determine whetherto enable the switch according to the actual conditions. For details, see the following note.

l Operators can select appropriate planning modes to perform auto-planning according tothe actual conditions. The BTS3900B supports the following planning modes:

l If the BTS3900B is configured with one or two TRXs in band A, the Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switch is invalid. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 orO2 site in band A according to the number of configured TRXs.

l If the BTS3900B is configured with two TRXs and the two TRXs are in band A andband B respectively, the BTS3900B will scan the frequencies of band A and band B.The frequency bands and site types of the frequencies planned by the BTS3900B,however, vary with the status of the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch.

a. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to YES(YES):

The M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the workingfrequency according to the reported scanning results of the two frequencies. Thefrequency band where the frequency exists is the working frequency band of theBTS3900B. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 site in corresponding frequencybands

b. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to NO(NO):

The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O2 site in dual-band. The M2000 selects theBCCH frequencies in low frequency bands (such as 900 MHz or 850 MHz) and selectsthe TCH frequencies in low frequency bands or high frequency bands.

2. Run BSC6900 MML commandSET BTSIPCLKPARA,and then set Clock ProtocolType to PTP(PTP Protocol).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.

l Verification procedure



548

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG aand check thatBTS Configuration Mode is set to AUTO(AUTOPLAN).

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS

Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

CAUTIONThe deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will resultin the reset of the BTS3900B.

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="18.18.18.150", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18", MAINDEVTAB="2102311045AB09000005", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="gsm", TYPE=GSM900_DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=2, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254";SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FREQSELFADAPT=YES;SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CLKPRTTYPE=PTP, DN=1, CLKTOPOMODE=PTPOVERUDP, SYNMODE=CONSYN, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT,MASTERIPADDR="10.10.20.1";ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico";//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;



549

179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604PICO USB Encryption.


– Only BTS3900B supports this feature.


– None

l License



– The M2000 version supports the USB security protection tool.

Context

l A PICO BTS is also named BTS3900B.

l When a newly deployed BTS3900B is locally commissioned by using a USB flash drive,the configuration file is stored in the USB flash drive as plain text. This file containsimportant configuration information, such as the IP addresses of network elements. If theinformation is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or disclosed.

l When the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encryptedby using an encryption software on the M2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side,ensuring information security.


1. Copy the configuration file DataCfg.xml to the PC where the M2000 client is installedand save the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config\DataCfg.xmldirectory.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption


550

NOTEThe USB security protection tool does not support file decryption. Therefore, the file must bebacked up before being encrypted.

2. Choose Start > All Programs > iManager M2000 Client > Start USB ProtectorTool. The USB Protector Tool dialog box is displayed.

3. Choose Setting > Set USB Root Directory, select D:\USB, and click OK.4. Choose Setting > Set Security Policies. The Set Security Policies dialog box is

displayed.

a. Set Save Path to D:\USB\GBTS3900B.b. Set Encryption Algorithm and Integrity Algorithm based on your individual

needs.c. Click OK.

5. Choose File > Open, and select the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config directory.

6. Select IsEncrypted:Index.

NOTEIn the file list area, if IsEncrypted:Index before a file is selected, the file is encrypted.Otherwise, only integrity protection is performed on the file.

7. Click Execute Protect.8. Delete the source file in the USB flash drive and copy the GBTS3900B folder to the

root directory of the USB flash drive.l Verification Procedure

1. Open the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config directory.If garbled characters are displayed, the file is encrypted successfully.

2. Connect the USB flash drive to the BTS3900B.The BTS3900B sets up links properly.


N/A

----End

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption


551

180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606PICO Sleeping Mode.


– Currently, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support the sleeping mode feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



Contextl The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. The PICO Sleeping Mode feature helps to save the site

energy by enabling or disabling the cells in a period. When the BTS3900B is used at nightwhen the traffic is unavailable in the scenarios, such as offices, warehouses, and exhibitionhalls, users can specify the period for enabling or disabling the PICO cells, such as, 00:00to 6:00 am. In this period, the power amplifiers of all the carriers (including BCCH carriers)in the cells are shut down.

l When the PICO Sleeping Mode feature takes effect, the PICO cells do not provide radionetwork services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then setEnable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING(Sleeping) and set Dyn. Turning Off CellStart Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode


552

NOTE

When Enable Turning Off Cell is set to SLEEPING(Sleeping), the BSC6900 disables thecell within the disabling period unconditionally and enables the cell within the enabling periodunconditionally. Currently, the Enable Turning Off Cell parameter of only the BTS3900Band BTS3900E can be set to SLEEPING(Sleeping).

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell

Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell toSLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn.Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is within the periodspecified by the two parameters.

2. Wait for about five minutes and run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) tocheck the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is setto Yes, it indicates that the PICO Sleeping Mode feature is effective.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell toSLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn.Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the periodspecified by the two parameters.

4. Wait for about one minute and run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) tocheck the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is setto No, it indicates that the cell is enabled.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set

Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=SLEEPING, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=10&00, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=12&00;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode


553

181 Configuring PICO AutomaticOptimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607PICO Automatic Optimization.


– This feature does not depend on the hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The M2000 supports the PICO Automatic Optimization feature.

Contextl The PICO Automatic Optimization feature is license-controlled.l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. During the operation of the BTS3900B, the

automatic optimization task is created on the M2000 and the BTS3900Bs to be optimizedand the counter thresholds are specified. When the working frequencies are severelyinterfered, the M2000 triggers the BTS3900B to restart the uplink and downlink frequencyscan. In addition, the M2000 selects the working frequency with the minimum interferencefor the BTS3900B through the automatic optimization algorithm. Through automaticoptimization of working frequencies, the BTS3900B can shield itself from the frequenciesthat are severely interfered. In this case, the communication quality within the coverage ofthe BTS3900B and the KPIs are improved significantly. In addition, the handover successrate of the MS in the coverage of the BTS3900B is increased and the call drop rate isreduced.

l The progress and result of the PICO Automatic Optimization feature can be viewed on theM2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 OperatorGuide.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization


554


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM(BTS3900BGSM), and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, set therelated auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switchaccording to the actual conditions.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that Freq.

and BSIC Optimize Switch is set to ON.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Freq.and BSIC Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON;//Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization


555

182 Configuring PICO TransceiverRedundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510608PICO Transceiver Redundancy.


– Two radio frequency (RF) cards for transceiver redundancy must be work on the samefrequency band.

– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.l Dependencies on Other Features




– The BTS3900B configured with two TRXs does not support this feature.

– TRX switchovers are not allowed within five minutes after a BTS3900B is startedsuccessfully.

– When a BTS3900B is interconnected to a Distributed Antenna System (DAS), theantenna of the DAS must be connected to the transmitting port of another antenna systemfor the BTS3900B before a TRX switchover is triggered.

Contextl The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.l This feature enables the standby RF card of a BTS3900B configured with a single TRX to

take over the services of the active RF card when the active RF card is faulty, preventingservice disruption.

l PICO Transceiver Redundancy can be applied in the following scenarios:

– No traffic is available on a BTS3900B for a long time.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy


556

– MSs fail to access the network.– Voice quality is poor.– The RF Unit TX Channel Gain Out of Range alarm (alarm ID: 26520) and RF Unit

Clock Problem alarm (alarm ID: 26538) are generated on a BTS3900B.– RF cards are faulty.Users can switch over TRXs to the standby RF card to restore services or improve servicequality.

CAUTIONA TRX switchover will lead to service interruption for less than three minutes.


1. Run the BSC6900 SET BTSTRXBACKUP command, and then set TRX BackupSwitch to ON.

NOTEThis feature is disabled by default for a BTS3900B before delivery.

CAUTIONAfter PICO Transceiver Redundancy is enabled, adding TRXs dynamically is notallowed.

l Verification procedure– Verify TRX backup switch status.1. Click Trace on the LMT interface, and then double-click Abis Interface CS Trace.

In the displayed Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, set Trace Mode to OML. Then,click Submit. The TRX backup status is displayed in Set Site Extend Attribute2Ack.

– Verify TRX switchover status.

NOTEAssume that TRX 0 is switched over from RF card 0 to RF card 1.

1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialogbox is displayed.

2. Click BSC under Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS.Then, observe the TRX status before the switchover on the right of BTS DevicePanel. TRX 0 is configured on RF card 0, as shown in Figure 182-1.



557

Figure 182-1 TRX switchover status before switchover

3. Run the BSC6900 SWP GTRX command to switch over TRX.4. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialog

box is displayed.5. Click BSC in Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS. Then,

observe the TRX status after the switchover on the right of BTS Device Panel. TRX0 is switched over to RF card 1, as shown in Figure 182-2.

Figure 182-2 TRX switchover status after switchover

NOTEIf another switchover is performed, the TRX switchover status is restored to the status shown inFigure 182-1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 SET BTSTRXBACKUP command, and then set TRX Backup

Switch to OFF.



558

CAUTIONIf a TRX switchover is performed on a BTS3900B, the BTS3900B will resetautomatically when TRX Backup Switch is set to OFF.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=ON;//Verification procedureSWP GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=OFF;



559

183 Configuring Compact BTSAutomatic Capacity Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.


– This feature is supported by only the Compact BTS.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


l Other Prerequisites– The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode

through the M2000 client.– Before this feature is configured, the BTS has performed automatic configuration and

planning.– The automatic optimization task of the GSM BTS is created on the M2000 client before

the feature is activated. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

Contextl The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled.l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.l According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time

to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initiallyconfigured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, anotherTRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.

NOTEAfter the feature is activated, the M2000 measures the traffic volume of the BTS within 24 hours, and thencompares the measurement result with the threshold of the actual traffic volume. If the traffic volume of theBTS exceeds the threshold, the BTS adds a TRX automatically for expansion.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning


560


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity andCoverage Optimize Switch to ON.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that

Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then setCapacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF.

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=ON;// Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning


561

184 Configuring Compact BTSAutomatic Neighbor Cell Planning and

Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The scanning frequency set and neighbor cell list are configured on the M2000 in

advance.– The parameters related to automatic optimization are set on the M2000 in advance.

Contextl The Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature is license-

controlled.l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.l Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning

– The automatic neighboring cell planning feature is mostly applied in the site deploymentscenario.

– The automatic neighboring cell planning feature indicates that the M2000 triggers theBTS3900E to perform downlink frequency scan. The BTS3900E reports theinformation about the neighboring cells to the M2000. Then, the M2000 configures thescanned cells as the neighboring cells of the BTS3900E. In addition, the M2000 adds


184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor CellPlanning and Optimization


562

the cells of the BTS3900E in the scanned cells to the neighboring cell list to set up thebidirectional neighboring relation. If the scanned cells are beyond the serving area ofthe M2000, the M2000 can set up only the unidirectional neighboring relation andprompt users to manually configure neighboring cells.

l Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization

– The automatic neighbor cell optimization feature is used during the operation of theBTS.

– During the operation of the BTS3900E, the automatic optimization task is created onthe M2000. With this feature, the M2000 determines that redundant neighboring cellsexist in the BTS3900E or certain neighboring cells are missed according to the analysisof the measurement reports. Then, the M2000 triggers the neighbor cell optimizationprocess automatically and updates the neighboring relation.

l The Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature can improve networkquality, increase handover success rate, and reduce call drop rate automatically, reducingthe workload of manual configuration and improving OM efficiency.

l The progress and result of the automatic planning and optimization can be viewed on theM2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 OperatorGuide.

Procedurel Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS3900E inauto-planning mode. The added BTS3900E is enabled with the auto-planning functionby default. In addition, the related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch supported by the BTS3900E are set to ON. You canrun the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the statusof the switches.

NOTE

l The added BTS3900E that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning functionautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scansucceeds, the BTS3900E does not enable the auto-planning function automatically duringthe subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needsto be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO. Then, set Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the RSTAUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.

2. If set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support), run the BSC6900 MMLcommandSET BTSIPCLKPARA, and then set Clock Protocol Type to PTP(PTPProtocol). Or else, go toStep 3.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.l Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set NeighborCell Optimize Switch to ON.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that

Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch are set to ON.




563

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Index

type to BYNAME(By Name), set BTS Name to MICRO, set BTS ConfigurationMode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18", MAINDEVTAB="11112222223333334444", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="micro_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="111", LAC=1214, CI=1000, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254";ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CELLNAMELIST="micro_cell0", SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLOPTSWITCH=ON;//Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro";//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;




564

185 Configuring Compact BTS TimingPower Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705Compact BTS Timing Power Off.


– The solar controller is connected to the BTS.

– Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature.l Dependencies on Other Features




– The version the solar controller should not be earlier than POWER2000 V1R1C04.

– The time of the solar controller is consistent with that of the BTS3900E.

Contextl The compact BTS is the BTS3900E. Within the coverage of the BTS3900E, if the

BTS3900E uses solar boards to supply power, users can set the enabling and disabling timeof the BTS3900E on the BSC when the traffic is unavailable or is light. By using the solarcontroller, the BTS3900E can enable or disable automatically in the specified periods,reducing the power consumption of the site, the number of solar boards, and constructioncost.

l The BTS3900E does not provide services when the Compact BTS Timing Power Offfeature takes effect.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off


565

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BoardParameter Configuration Enabled toYES and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, andset Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the actualconditions.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the power information about theBTS.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BTS Index to

the index of the BTS to be verified, Board Parameter Configuration Enabled toYES, and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the verification time at the site to ensure that theverification time is within the period specified by Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time.

2. On the main interface of the LMT, click Alarm. The Alarm tab page is displayed.3. Double-click OML Fault on the Fault tab page under Browse Alarm. The Alarm

Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.4. Check Alarm Cause of Location Info, if Alarm Cause is displayed as Green Base

Station Power-off, it indicates that the BTS3900E is powered off.

NOTEThe OML Fault alarm is generated after the BTS is powered off. Thus, check the alarm after Power-offStart Time.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO or set Board Parameter ConfigurationEnabled to YES and BTS Power-off Enabled to OFF.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=ON, SHUTDNST=16&15&19, SHUTDNET=18&15&34;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=OFF;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off


566

186 Configuring Local User Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706Local User Management.


– The BTS3900E is in IP over FE transmission mode.



l License



– The PC installed with the Local User Management software is in normal communicationwith the BTS3900E.

Contextl The Local User Management feature is license-controlled.

l Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Local User Management feature.

l This feature can be used to deploy a special commercial mode. When the BTS3900E isused in rural areas, operators can contract the BTS3900E to entrepreneurs. Theentrepreneurs manage the local users through a PC and provide the registration andderegistration services, local services, public network services, and local services in single-site mode.

– The entrepreneurs gain profits by increasing the number of local users. Theentrepreneurs are responsible for registration and communication charging (includingcharging strategies) of local users.

– The transmission in rural areas is unstable. This feature ensures that the local usermanagement can be performed even if the transmission is disrupted. In addition, thecommunication and charging between local users are supported.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 186 Configuring Local User Management


567

– The BTS3900E contracted to the entrepreneurs can also provide services for publicnetwork users of operators. In this case, the communication requirements of publicnetwork users can be ensured when the BSC transmission is disrupted.

l The calls between local users support only full rate.l When the transmission on the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the single-

site mode. The handover procedure lasts for six minutes, during which services aredisrupted.

l During the communication between local users, only the reporting of the originalmeasurement report is supported.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local callsupport flag to YES(YES).

l Verification procedure– Local services and public network services1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local

call support flag is set to YES(YES).2. Use MSs to perform the service dialing test.

Expected result: The call services between local services, between public networkusers, and between local users and public network users are normal.

NOTEThe local signaling process of call services between local users is different from the common callprocess. You can observe the signaling information through message tracing on the Web LMT.

– Local services in single-site mode1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local

call support flag is set to YES(YES).2. Disconnect the BTS3900E from the BSC and wait for six minutes. Then, perform the

local service dialing test.Expected result: The call services between local users are normal.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call

support flag to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=YES;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 186 Configuring Local User Management


568

187 Configuring VGCS and VBS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS)and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).


– The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC.

– Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC.

– VGCS and VBS are enabled for the IMSIs used in this test at the HLR.

– Two test MSs, MS1 and MS2, that support VGCS and VBS are available.



l License



– The test cell has idle TCHs.

– Channel status monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring ChannelStatus.

Context

Compared with GSM, GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. GSM-R can provide diversified voicedispatch services required in the private network.

A cell does not support VGCS or VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH OccupyBlock Number is 0. Configure VGCS and VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number andNCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC informs the MS ofthe NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call afterreceiving the message indicating that the system supports VGCS/VBS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 187 Configuring VGCS and VBS


569


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number and NCH Start Block to appropriate values.

NOTE

l NCH Occupy Block Number must be set to a value other than 0. The sum of NCH OccupyBlock Number and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCHBlocks Reserved for AGCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command LSTGCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for theAGCH.

l Verification Procedure– Verifying VGCS

1. Use MS1 to perform VGCS in the test cell.2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.

Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface.

3. Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH forVGCS, another TCH is occupied and this TCH is released 5 seconds later.

NOTE

A calling session lasts for 5 seconds after pressing the push-to-talk (PTT) key. To prolong thecalling session, press and hold down the PTT key for as long as necessary.

4. Use MS2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS1 in the test cell.Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VGCS already exists. After adding MS2to the ongoing VGCS, you can view the current VGCS ID from the screen of MS2.

5. Press the PTT key on MS2 to occupy the uplink resources. Then check the tracedmessages displayed in the A Interface Trace window and on the MS1.Expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, UplinkRequest Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on theA interface. You can use MS1 to view the MS2 phone number and hear the voicefrom MS2.

6. Press the PTT key on MS2 and then on MS1 to occupy the uplink resources. Theoccupation attempt of MS1 is rejected.

– Verifying VBS

1. Use MS1 to perform VBS in the test cell.2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.

Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result aretraced on the A interface.

3. Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH forVBS, another TCH is occupied.

4. Use MS1 to perform VBS with the same VBS ID as MS1 in the test cell.Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VBS already exists. After adding MS2 tothe ongoing VBS, you can view the current VBS ID from the screen of MS2.




570

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number to 0.

----End

Example/*Activating VGCS and VBS*///Enabling VGCS and VBS SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1, NCHSTARTBLOCK=1;/*Deactivating VGCS and VBS*///Disabling VGCS and VBS SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=0;



571

188 Configuring GSM-T Relay

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310GSM-T Relay.


– The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature.

– The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services. The earliestversion that supports trunking services on a pulic network is BTS3000V300R009C01.The recommended version is GBSS13.0.

– The MS supports trunking services.



l License


Context

If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunkingMSC. By routing trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking oftrunking services and point-to-point call services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a signaling point of thetrunking MSC. In this step, set DSP index according to the network planning, and setDSP type to A(A) and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this step,set CN Node Index, DPC Group Index, and Operator Name according to thenetwork planning; set MSC ID to a value that identifies a trunking MSC; set DSPindex to the value specified in Step 1; set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC),

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 188 Configuring GSM-T Relay


572

Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from TrunkingMSC to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link

set. In this step, set Signalling link set index according to the network planning.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.

In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 4 and set TCmode based on the subrack combination mode.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link setindex to the index of the signaling link set added in Step 4.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number of the target cell to a value that is not less than 1.

l Verification Procedure1. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing BSSAP

Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DPC of the trunking MSC.

2. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the target cellspecified in Step 7. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window isdisplayed.

3. Initiate a successful VGCS call. Then, check the messages traced on the A interface.

Expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiating MS is displayed inthe A interface tracing window.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Default

DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), and Trunking MSC to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Configuring a DPCADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=1111, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3;//Configuring a CN node of a trunking MSCADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=1, DPCGIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", CNID=0, DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=YES, SptPaging=YES, ATransMode=TDM;//Configuring an E1/T1 over the A InterfaceADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=10, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0;//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link setADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=0, NAME="MTP3LKS";//Configuring an MTP3 signaling linkADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=0, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, MTP2LNKN=0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";//Configuring an MTP3 routeADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MTP3RT";//Setting GSM-R parameters of a cell



573

SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Modifying parameters of a CN nodeMOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=NO;



574

189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501HUAWEI II Handover.





l License


Context

Huawei II handover algorithm will traverse all the handover types in the handover decision-making phase. In the process of traversing the handover types, Huawei II handover algorithmdoes not execute a handover immediately but creates a candidate target cell list when thetriggering conditions of the handover are met, compared with the common handover algorithm.After all the handover types are traversed, the intersection of the candidate cell lists that meetthe handover triggering conditions is selected as the final target cell list. Compared with thecommon handover algorithm, Huawei II handover algorithm considers comprehensively allhandover decision-making results so that the final handover decision-making result is moreaccurate.

Huawei II handover algorithm is classified into emergency handover, intra-cell handover, andinter-cell handover.

l The emergency handover is classified into directed retry, quick handover, bad qualityhandover, TA handover, and edge handover.

l The intra-cell handover is classified into interference handover, concentric circleshandover, BCCH dense frequency multiplexing handover, and handover between TCHFand TCHH.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover


575

l The inter-cell handover is classified into no downlink measurement report handover,enhanced dual-band network handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, better cellhandover, and 2G/3G handover.

CAUTIONl After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is

applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to theold cell.

l In Huawei II handover algorithm, the serving cell must not be selected as the target cell ofbad quality handover.

l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equalto the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.

l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cellhandover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specifiedduration. In Huawei II handover algorithm, only the serving cell can be selected as the targetcell of interference handover.

l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the sameunderlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and LoadHO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handoverof a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell on the network.

l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered betweenthe enhanced dual-band network cells.

l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all theneighboring micro cells.

l Load handover is not treated as an independent handover type for handover decision-making.The load handover decision is made in the network adjustment phase. The selection of atarget cell should be processed by the better cell handover. That is, the load handover istriggered when the triggering conditions of load handover and better cell handover are metsimultaneously.

l Better cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover inHuawei I handover algorithm. It is specific to Huawei II handover algorithm.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithmII).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithmII).



576

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MAXConsecutive HO Times as required.


7. Activatin directed retry.

8. Activating the quick handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, and set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set ChainNeighbour Cell Type as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setQuick Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, setQuick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, QuickHandover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick HandoverPunish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MRNumber, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore MeasurementReport Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast StatisticTimes, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency ShiftHandover Duration as required.

NOTE

If external neighboring cells are configured, set Quick Handover Offset, QuickHandover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value by running theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setUL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and ULFrequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reportedby the base station.

9. Activating the TA handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setTA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TAThreshold as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set TA HO Watch Time and TA HO Valid Time according tothe actual situation.

10. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm



577

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setBQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b. Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.Threshold as required.

c. Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMRFR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DLQual. Limit for AMR HR as required.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set TA HO Watch Time and BQ HO Watch Time accordingto the actual situation.

11. Activating interference handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInterference HO Allowed to YES(Yes), set Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes). and set Interfere HO Valid Time, Inter-layer HO Threshold andInterfere HO Static Timeto appropriate values.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HOValid Time according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, setInterfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, andInterfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.

12. Activating the concentric cell algorithm, refer to 48 Configuring Concentric Cell.

13. Activating the BCCH dense frequency multiplexing algorithm, refer to 60Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.

14. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set NoDl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR,UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr.HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time as required.



578

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setFilter Length for TCH Qual. and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. as required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set UL BQ HO Static Time and UL BQ HO Last Time asrequired.

15. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUOType to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/ExtraProperty and Same Group Cell Index Type to appropriate values, and set SameGroup Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of SameGroup Cell Index Type.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step,set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner CellSerious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious OverloadThreshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN ofUL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL SubcellLower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, OutgoingOL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, StepLength of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.

16. Activating the edge handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setLoad Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HOThreshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm II EdgeHO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Valid Time.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set Inter-cell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell WatchTime, and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time as required.

c. Optional: Run the following commands when the edge handover thresholds needto be different for neighboring cells.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC withEnhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after settingEnhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset as required.

17. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setLayer of The Cell as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setMS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MSFast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-



579

moving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MSFast Moving HO as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Penalty Time on Fast MovingHO and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInter-layer HO Threshold as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO WatchTime, and HCS HO Valid Time as required.

18. Activating the better cell handover algorithm

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setBetter Cell Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and then set Pathloss Ho. Enableas required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring CellType as actual, set Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO ValidTime as required.

c. Optional: Run the following commands when the better cell handover thresholdsneed to be different for neighboring cells.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC withEnhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setIndex Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, andNeighboring Cell Type as actual, set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switchto YES(Yes), and set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset, PenaltyStop Level Threshold, Penalty Timer Length, and Level Penalty Valueon Neighboring Cell as required.

19. Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH

a. Run BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMRF-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow Non-AMR H-FQuality-based HO to YES(Yes). Then, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, AMRF-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, F-H PathlossOffset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H ATCB OffsetOverlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H Ho LastTime, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho ATCBThreshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold,H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, H-F Ho Stat.Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold,Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold,



580

Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho PathlossThreshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold as required.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH RateAdjust Allow to YES(Yes).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER1, FULL_RATE_VER3 andHALF_RATE_VER3.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET BSCBASIC. In this step, set UmInterface Tag, Abis Interface Tag and A Interface Tag toGSM_PHASE_2Plus.

20. Activating the 2G/3G handover algorithm, refer to 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMAService Based Handover and 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load BasedHandover.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of

Current HO Control Algorithm.Expected result: The value of the Current HO Control Algorithm isHOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

2. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to TracingMessages on the A Interface. Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover performed message to the MSC.– In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.– In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or

downlink-quality.– In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-

quality or downlink-quality.– In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause

value is uplink-quality.– In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value

is better-cell or traffic.– In the case of the load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.– In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or

downlink-strength.– In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is

better-cell.– In the case of the better cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of the handover between TCHF and TCHH, the handover cause value

is downlink-quality.– In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,

distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, ordownlink-strength.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

----End



581

Example//Activating HUAWEI II handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;//Activating the quick handover algorithmMOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES, CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QUICKHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=36671;//Activating the TA handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TAHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TALIMIT=125;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, TASTATTIME=1, TALASTTIME=1;//Activating the bad quality handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BQHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, BQSTATTIME=1, BQLASTTIME=1;//Activating the interference handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25, INTERFERESTATTIME=3, INTERFERELASTTIME=2;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60, RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55, RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;//Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithmSET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8, NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ULBQSTATTIME=1, ULBQLASTTIME=1;//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithmMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;



582

///Activating the edge handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithmSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2, QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTELEVHOHYST=67, HCSSTATTIME=3, HCSLASTTIME=2;//Activating the better cell handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLHOEN=YES, PATHLOSSHOEN=YES;MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLSTATTIME=6, BETTERCELLLASTTIME=4;//Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHHSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75, FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5, FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100, FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20, FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20, AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6, FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4, AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5, AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4, HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20, AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108, HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3, HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6, HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithmSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25, INHOH2FTH=12;SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;



583

190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502Handover Re-establishment.





l License



– An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. The TRX of the test cellsupports handover re-establishment.

Context

If receiving an Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attempts tore-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop.

Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:

l Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2Re-establishment to YES(Yes).


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment


584

1. Configure two cells: cell0 and cell1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cellson the same frequency band. Ensure that they operate properly.

2. Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0 on the BSC6900 LMT byreferring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Better CellHO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and PBGT HO Thresholdto 64.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set UseLAPDm N200 to ON(On), T200 FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, N200 ofFACCH/Half Rate to 30, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34.

6. Use a test MS to make a call in cell0.7. Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell0 to initiate a handover for better cell

to cell1.8. After issuing the handover command, the BSC receives an Error Indication message

from cell0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmitpower in cell0.

9. Check the result of RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0.

Expected result: The test MS continues with the call in cell0. The following messagescan be traced on the Abis interface for cell0: Handover Command, Error Indication,Establish Request, and Establish Confirm.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2

Re-establishment to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating Handover Re-establishment*///Enabling handover re-establishmentSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=YES;/*Deactivating Handover Re-establishment*///Disabling handover re-establishment SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment


585

191 Configuring BSS Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701BSS Sharing.





l License



– The MSC is configured with two PLMNs (PLMN A and PLMN B). PLMN A belongsto operator A, and PLMN B belongs to operator B.

– BTS A is configured with two cells (cell1 and cell2), which belong to the primaryoperator A. The two cells are functional and have idle channels.

Context

The BSS sharing function allows multiple operators with independent core networks to shareGBSS network resources, such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission devices. A single cellunder a site provides services for only one operator, and different cells under a site provideservices for multiple operators.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RANSharing set to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, setOperator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that PLMN B belongs to the

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 191 Configuring BSS Sharing


586

secondary operator). Set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC basedon PLMN B information, and set other parameters to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE. In this step, set OperatorName to the name of the operator B and set other parameters to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING for a specific target BTS.In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES).

5. Optional: For 3900 series base stations, run the BSC6900 MML command SETBTSRXUBP. In this step, set RanSharing Support to YES(YES) for thecorresponding RXU.

6. Optional: If a PTP BVC has been configured, run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV PTPBVC to remove the PTP BVC of cell2.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set OperatorName of cell2 to the name of the operator B.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSPCode of cell2 to the DSP allocated to BSC6900 by the operator B.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE. In this step, set ServiceProvider Name to the name of operator B and other parameters to appropriate values.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE. In this step, set NSE Identifier,Subrack No., Slot No., and Protocol Type to appropriate values, Service ProviderName to the name of operator B, and SGSN Node ID to the value set in Step 9.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC to add a PTP BVC for cell2.l Verification Procedure

1. Get two test MSs ready: MS1 and MS2. MS1 belongs to operator A, and MS2 belongsto operator B.

2. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set toRSL. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3. Initiate A-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set toBSSAP. For details, see Tracing Messages on the A Interface.

4. Enable MS1 to camp on cell1 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Checkthe tracing results of cell1.

Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS1 is displayed.5. Enable MS2 to camp on cell2 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Check

the tracing results of cell2.

Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS2 is displayed.6. Initiate Um-interface PS message tracing on the LMT for cell1 and cell2. For details,

see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.7. Enable MS1 to perform PS services in cell1, and check Um-interface PS message trace

results in cell1.

Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS1 is displayed.8. Enable MS2 to perform PS services in cell2, and check Um-interface PS message trace

results in cell2.

Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS2 is displayed.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC to remove the PTP BVC for cell2.



587

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSE to remove the network service entityof operator B.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SGSNNODE. In this step, set ServiceProvider Name to the name of operator B and remove the SGSN node for operatorB.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Service ProviderName for cell2 to the name of operator A.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSPCode for cell2 to the DSP that operator A has assigned to BSC6900.

6. Optional: For 3900 series base stations, run the BSC6900 MML command SETBTSRXUBP. In this step, set RanSharing Support to NO(NO) for the correspondingRXU.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING for a specific target BTS.In this step, set Sharing Allow to NO(NO).

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node foroperator B.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNOPERATOR to remove operator B.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RAN

Sharing to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating BSS Sharing*///Enabling RAN sharingSET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=YES;//Configuring operator BADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, OPINDEX=1, OPNAME="B", MCC="460", MNC="138", MSCPOOLALLOW=NO, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;//Configuring a CN nodeADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=1, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="B", CNID=2, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;//Setting BTS sharing parametersSET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES;//(Optional) Enabling RAN Sharing for a 3900 series base stationSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=10, RXUTYPE=BTS3900E, SPTSHARING=YES;//(Optional) Removing the PTP BVC for cell2RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10;//Modifying cell parameters of an operatorMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="B";//Modifying the mapping between a cell and an OSPMOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000A12;//Adding an SGSN node for operator BADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="B", CNID=1;//Adding the network service entity for operator BADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=0, SN=8, PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=STATIC, OPNAME="B", CNID=1;//Adding a PTP BVC for cell2ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2;

/*Deactivating BSS Sharing*///(Optional) Removing the PTP BVC for cell2RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10;//Removing the network service entity for operator B



588

RMV NSE: NSEI=1;//Removing the SGSN node for operator BRMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="B", CNID=1;//Modifying cell parameters of an operatorMOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="A";//Modifying the mapping between a cell and an OSPMOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000B00;//(Optional) Disabling RAN Sharing for a 3900 series base stationSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=10, RXUTYPE=BTS3900E, SPTSHARING=NO;//Disabling BTS sharingSET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=NO;//Removing the CN nodeRMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1;//Removing operator BRMV GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1;//Disabling RAN sharingSET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=NO;



589

192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702MOCN Shared Cell.



– The features GBFD-117401 MSC Pool and GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool have beenconfigured before this feature is activated.



l Other Prerequisites– If MS routing is determined by the CN, the list of VLRs in which an MS is allowed to

roam needs to be configured on the HLR, or the list of LAIs in which an MS is allowedto roam needs to be configured on the MSC server.

– Operators A and B are configured. Both operator A and operator B have enabled thefeatures MSC Pool and SGSN Pool in their networks.

– MSCs or SGSNs that belong to different operators are configured with differentNetwork Resource Indication (NRI) values with the same length.

ContextThe BSS sharing function enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basiswhile using their respective core network (CN) equipment. With this feature, different operatorscannot share the same cell.

The MOCN shared cell function, however, enables multiple operators to share BSS equipmenton a per cell basis while using their respective CN equipment.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell


590

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA to turn on the MOCNcontrol switch. In this step, set MOCN Switch to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select) and set Re-Routing Occasion, Filter CS Based on OperatorNeighboring Cell List, and Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List toappropriate values.

NOTEIt is recommended that MOCN Switch be set to CNSEL(CN Select).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRA to add a shared routing area. In thisstep, set Routing Sharing Area Code and Routing Sharing Area Description toappropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LAOPMAP to add the mapping between alocation area and operators. In this step, set Location Area Record Index, MCC,MNC, Cell LAC, Operator Name 1, Operator Name 2, and Operator Name 3 toappropriate values. Assume that cell 1 is the selected location area, Operator Name1 is the name of operator A, and Operator Name 2 is the name of operator B.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRALAMAP to add the mapping betweena shared routing area and a location area. Based on the settings specified in Step 2,set Routing Sharing Area Record Index, Routing Sharing Area Code, MCC,MNC, and LAC of cell 1 to appropriate values.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell named cell 1. In thisstep, set MOCN Sharing Cell to YES(Yes).

6. (Optional) If MOCN Switch is set to BSCSEL(BSC Select):

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI numberrange. In this step, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSIsegment, Start IMSI value, and End IMSI value to appropriate values. Assumethat the IMSI of MS1 is between Start IMSI value and End IMSI value.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT to add an MS routingcategory. In this step, set Subscriber Category Index, Operator Name 1, Rateof Operator 1, Operator Name 2, Rate of Operator 2, Operator Name 3, andRate of Operator 3 to appropriate values.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISRAMAP to add a routingcategory of an IMSI number range. In this step, set IMSI Category Index to anappropriate value; based on the settings specified in Step 2, 6.1, 6.2, set RoutingSharing Area Code, IMSI Segment Index, and Subscriber Category Indexto appropriate values.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set BSCReserved Parameter 5 to an appropriate value based on site conditions.

NOTE

BSC Reserved Parameter 5 in the MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA indicates thesequence number N(U) contained in the ATTACH REQUEST message when the message isrerouted to another SGSN. The N(U) value depends on the interconnected SGSN. When theSGSN does not request to change the N(U) value, this parameter is set to 512, indicating thatthe N(U) value does not need to be changed.

l Verification Procedure (CS Services)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCNSwitch to CNSEL(CN Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(NotRedirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), andFilter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).



591

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the nameof operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.

3. On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messageson the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. On the BSSAP tabpage, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of cell1, and click Submit. The AInterface Trace window is displayed.

Start A-interface message tracing twice by setting DPC(HEX) to the destinationsignaling points (DSPs) of operator A and operator B respectively.

4. Initiate a location update procedure for MS1 to view messages traced on the Ainterface.

Expected result:

– If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is smaller than 30,the signaling related to location update is found in the tracing messages of operatorA on the A interface.

– If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is greater than orequal to 30, the signaling related to location update is found in the tracing messagesof operator B on the A interface.

l Verification Procedure (PS Services)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCN

Switch to CNSEL(CN Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(NotRedirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), andFilter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the nameof operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.

3. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 in the activation procedure to add the mapping betweenthe route sharing area and the location area of cell 1 or cell 2.

NOTE

The route sharing area of cell2 must be different from that of cell1.

4. Enable MS1 to camp on cell2 and to process PS services.5. On the LMT, initiate the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing

PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLADMSTAT. In this step, set cell2

to the Lock state so that MS1 camps on cell1.7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.

Expected result:

– If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is smaller than 30,the signaling related to MS1 access to the network of operator A is found in thePS tracing messages of MS1.

– If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is greater than orequal to 30, the signaling related to MS1 access to the network of operator B isfound in the PS tracing messages of MS1.




592

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCNSwitch to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example/*Activating MOCN Shared Cell*///Turning on the MOCN control switchSET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CNSEL, ReDirectOpt=ALL, CSScnIdHoFilter=YES, PSScnIdHoFilter=YES;//Adding a shared routing areaADD SRA: Srac=1, SracDscrpt="***";//Configuring the mapping between a location area and operatorsADD LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234, OPNAME1="op1", OPNAME2="op2";//Configuring the mapping between a shared routing area and a location areaADD SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=1, Srac=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234;//Adding a cell named cell 1 and enabling MOCN Shared CellADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="cell1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234, CI=H'111, EXTTP=Normal_cell, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF, MocnCmCell=YES;//Adding an MS IMSI rangeADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="IMSI", ImsiMin="460000000000000", ImsiMax="460100000000000";//Adding an MS routing categoryADD USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=0, OPNAME1="op1", OpShare1=30, OPNAME2="op2", OpShare2=70;//Adding a routing category of an IMSI rangeADD IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=0, Srac=1, ImsiGrpIndex=0, UsrCatIndex=0;//Setting PS software parameters on the BSCSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: BSCPSReservePara5=512;

/*Deactivating MOCN Shared Cell*///Turning off the MOCN control switchSET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CLOSE;



593

193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703IMSI-Based Handover.


– A test MS (MS1) is available and its IMSI is recorded.


– None

l License


l Others

– The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC need to carry IMSI.

– A BTS is configured with two test cells (CELL1 and CELL2) of the same operator.These cells are in the normal state and support the GPRS function.

– Idle channels are available in CELL1. CELL1 and CELL2 are neighboring cells of eachother. The two cells are in different location areas.

Context

According to the network planning and service requirements, an operator can divide the networkinto multiple areas (called handover shared areas) and restrict the service area of an MS byconfiguring the mapping between the IMSI range and the handover shared area.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSIHandover Switch to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI segment. In thisstep, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSI

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover


594

value, and End IMSI value according to the actual situation (assume that IMSI ofMS1 is within the configured IMSI segment).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHA to add a handover shared area. In thisstep, set Handover Sharing Area, Operator Name, and Handover Sharing AreaDescription according to the actual situation (assume that Operator Name is thename of the operator of CELL1).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHALAMAP to configure the mappingbetween a handover shared area and a location area. In this step, set HandoverSharing Area Record Index, Handover Sharing Area, MCC, MNC, and CellLAC according to the actual situation (assume that MCC, MNC, and Cell LAC arethose of CELL2).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISHAMAP to add an IMSI-supportedhandover area. In this step, set IMSI Index of Handover Sharing Area Record,Handover Sharing Area, and IMSI Segment Index according to the settingsspecified in Step 2 and Step 3.

l Verification Procedure (CS Services)

1. MS1 camps on CELL1 to call a fixed-line phone. The call is set up successfully.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index or CellName to the index or name of CELL1.

4. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to TracingCS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Select RSL in the Trace Type area.

5. On the RSL tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to those of CELL1 and CELL2.Then, click Submit. The Abis Interface CS Trace message interface is displayed.


– If idle channels are unavailable in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abisinterface of CELL1 indicate that handover cannot be performed and measurementreports are reported continuously.

– If an idle channel is available in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abisinterface of CELL2 indicate that the incoming internal inter-cell handoverprocedure for MS1 is performed properly and measurement reports are reportednormally.

l Verification Procedure (PS Services)

1. MS1 camps on CELL1 and processes PS services.

2. On the LMT, start the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing PSDomain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Network Control Mode toNC2(NC2).



595

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Cell Urgent ReselectionAllowed to PERMIT(Permit) and MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold to 2.

7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.

The expected result: The signaling for the handover of MS1 from CELL1 to CELL2is found in the PS tracing messages of MS1 when the transmission quality in CELL1deteriorates.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSI

Handover Switch to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Turning on the IMSI-based handover switchSET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=YES;//Adding a subscriber IMSI segmentADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="IMSI", ImsiMin="460000000000000", ImsiMax="460100000000000";//Adding a handover sharing areaADD SHA: SHAC=1, OPNAME="OP1", SHACDscrpt="Share1";//Configuring mapping between a handover sharing area and a location areaADD SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=0, SHAC=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234;//Adding an IMSI-supported handover areaADD IMSISHAMAP: ImsiShaMapIndex=0, SHAC=1, ImsiGrpIndex=0;

/*Deactivation procedure*///Turning off the IMSI-based handover switchSET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=NO;



596

194 Configuring Abis IndependentTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118704Abis Independent Transmission.



– The feature GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing has been configured before this feature isactivated.



ContextIn a BSS sharing network, multiple telecom operators share a base station and associatedauxiliary devices. Cells of different telecom operators can reside under one base station, but eachcell can only belong to one telecom operator.

The transmission resources under the base station can be shared among telecom operators orexclusively used by their respective telecom operators. In Abis over TDM mode, transmissionresources can be configured independently based on only the level of an E1 port. In Abis overIP mode, transmission resources can be configured independently based on only the level oflogical resources.

Procedurel Activation Procedure (TDM Transmission)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable independent

transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow toYES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission


597

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connectionbetween the BTS and the BSC. In this step, set Dest Node Type to BSC, set OperatorName to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set other parameters toappropriate values.

NOTE

If multiple operators share one BTS or if there are multiple BTSs, run Step 3 repeatedly to add theconnection between each BTS and the BSC for each operator.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS. In this step, set Index Typeto BYID(By Index), set BTS Index and Cabinet Group No. to appropriate values,set Operator Name to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set IdleTS Count to the number of idle timeslots for the operator.

NOTE

If multiple operators share the idle timeslots on an E1 cable, run Step 4 repeatedly to set the numberof idle timeslots for each operator.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.l Activation Procedure (IP Transmission)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable independent

transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow toYES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO. In this step, set Index ofSeparate Information for Operators and the Count of the Operators Selected, setTransport Type to IP(IP), and set The type of operator to GSM(GSM). Then, basedon the field configuration and number of operators, set Index of 1st Operator,Bandwidth Ratio of 1st Operator, Load Threshold of 1st Operator, Index of 2ndOperator, Bandwidth Ratio of 2nd Operator, Load Threshold of 2nd Operator,Index of 3rd Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 3rd Operator, Load Threshold of 3rdOperator, Index of 4th Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 4th Operator, and LoadThreshold of 4th Operator.

NOTE

The sum of bandwidth ratio of all the operators must be 100%.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Resourcemanagement mode to SHARE, Operator Separated Flag to ON(ON), andOperator Separated Index to the value set in Step 3. In addition, set the parameterrelated to an IP logical port in this step.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPLOGICPORT to query OperatorSeparated Index.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPSEPINFO to query the number ofoperators and operator index. In this step, set Index of Separate Information forOperators to the value displayed in Step 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtimebandwidth of an IP logical port. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and LogicPort No. to appropriate values.

Expected result: The realtime bandwidth of the IP logical port is displayed. Assumethat the realtime bandwidth is A.



598

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtimebandwidth of an IP logical port of a specified operator. In this step, set SubrackNo., Slot No., Logic Port No., The type of operator, and CN Operator index toappropriate values.

Expected result: Assume that two operators share an IP logical port for independenttransmission over the Abis interface. The realtime bandwidth of operators 1 and 2 isX1 and X2 respectively. Then, X1 + X2 ≤ A.


6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable transmission overthe Abis interface for a BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) andTransmission Sharing Support to YES(Yes).


8. Repeat Step 4.

Expected result: A message is displayed, indicating that the information fails to bequeried.

l Deactivation Procedure (TDM Transmission)


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to disable transmissionsharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and TransmissionSharing Support to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT. In this step, set OperatorName to the name of the primary operator and set other parameters to appropriatevalues.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to set the number of idletimeslots for the secondary operator to 0. In this step, set Idle TS Count to 0 andOperator Name to the name of the secondary operator.

NOTE

If there are multiple secondary operators, run Step 4 repeatedly to release the idle timeslots for allsecondary operators.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to return all idle timeslots tothe primary operator. In this step, set Idle TS Count to the number of idle timeslotsthat the primary operator have and Operator Name to the name of the primaryoperator.


l Deactivation Procedure (IP Transmission)


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to disable transmissionsharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and TransmissionSharing Support to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, setOperator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF).


----End



599

Example/*Activation procedure (TDM transmission)*///Deactivating a BTS//DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO;//Adding a connection between BTS and BSC//ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1, SN=14, PN=0, OPNAME="op1";//Setting idle timeslots of the BTS//SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20, OPNAME="op1";//Activating the BTS//ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

/*Activation procedure (IP transmission)*///Deactivating a BTS//DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO;//Configuring operator separation parameters//ADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=IP, OPTYPE=GSM, OPINDEX1=1, BWRATIO1=30, OPINDEX2=2, BWRATIO2=70;//Configuring an IP logical port//ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=ON, OPSEPINDEX=0;//Activating the BTS//ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

/*Deactivation procedure (TDM transmission)*///Deactivating the BTS//DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=YES;//Modifying the connection of the BTS to the primary operatorMOD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1, SN=14, PN=0, OPNAME="OP1";//Setting the number of idle timeslots for the secondary operator to 0//SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=0, OPNAME="op2";//Returning all idle timeslots to the primary operator//SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20, OPNAME="op1";//Activating the BTS//ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

/*Deactivation procedure (IP transmission)*///Deactivating the BTS//DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=YES;//Turing off the operator separation switch//MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;//Activating the BTS//ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;



600

195 Configuring MSRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).




feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS.– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in

Downlink.l License


l Other Prerequisites– This feature should be supported by the MS.

ContextThe MSRD improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. Two antennas are used toeliminate interference, therefore achieving enhanced channel diversity capability.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MSRDPDCH Multiplex Threshold to 10 and MSRD MCS Threshold to MCS9(MCS9).

l Verification Procedure1. Assume that the interference is the same and dual carrier in the downlink is not

supported. Use the MS that supports MSRD to perform packet services. Check thatthe rate of this MS is more stable than the MS that does not support MSRD.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 195 Configuring MSRD


601


----End

Example//Activating MSRDSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSRDPDCHLEV=10, MSRDMCSLEV=MCS9;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 195 Configuring MSRD


602

196 Configuring Dual Carriers inDownlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).





– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510801 MSRD.

l License



– The cell has sufficient resources and the cell is configured with more than two carriers.

– This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context

The network supports the feature of allocating downlink channel resources on the two carriersat the same time. This improves the rate of the downlink packet data.

The dual carriers in downlink function can improve the rate of the downlink packet data of asingle MS (100% at the most). A single MS may take up more resources, and therefore thenumber of MSs supported by the network is reduced.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink


603

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and SupportDownlink Dual-Carrier to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform streaming services.2. Refer to Monitoring Channel Status to check the usage of occupied channels.

Expected result:


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Downlink Dual-Carrier to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), EDGE to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating DLDCSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, DLDCSPT=SUPPORT;//Deactivating DLDCSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO, DLDCSPT=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink


604

197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.



– This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa /POUc boards are neededas Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS /GEPS subrack.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP orGBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimizationor GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l License



– The Abis interface of the cell works in HDLC or IP mode.

– Only DBS3900(RRU3008) supports this feature.

– The TRXs configured for the BTS should support this feature.

– MS should support this feature.

Contextl After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary

Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell.

l Impact on the performance: The UL/DL packet rate of a single MS is improved. The uplinkdata rate over the air interface can be increased to 76.8 kbit/TS and the downlink to 98.4kbit/TS.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A


605


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, Uplink

EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type and Downlink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type to thecoding types required by the test.

2. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on theUm Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. In this step, The uplink/downlink EGRPS2-Acoding schemes set in Step 1 can be viewed.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

4. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on theUm Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. The output result shows that only the codingschemes from MCS1 to MCS9 are used.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPE2AFIXMCS=MCS2, DNE2AFIXMCS=MCS2;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A


606

198 Configuring Latency Reduction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805Latency Reduction.


– BSC6900 built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface boardis required.

– This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IPover E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization or GBFD-114201EGPRS.

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-114151 DTM.

l License



– The BTS and MS support the latency reduction.

Context

Latency reduction is introduced in the HDLC/IP transmission mode over the Abis interface toreduce the transmission latency, enhance user experience on the conversational service, andimprove user satisfaction.

NOTEBTS3006C/BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3900B/E do not support this feature.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Latency Reduction


607

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and SupportReduced Latency Capability to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform conversational services in the PS domain.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to query the status of the PDCH.

Expected Result: In the displayed result, the number of RTTI TBFs on the PDCH isnot zero.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Reduced LatencyCapability to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport).

----End

Example//Activating Latency ReductionSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=SUPPORT;//Deactivating Latency ReductionSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Latency Reduction


608

199 Configuring Access Control Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002Access Control Class (ACC).





l Other Prerequisites– The MS and its SIM card meet the ACC-related requirements specified by the protocols.

ContextThis feature enables special users and some common users to access the network preferentiallywhen the network traffic is excessively high.

When the ACC feature is enabled, the MS checks the access control class set in the SIM cardbased on the access control class included in the cell broadcast message. If the access controlclass is an allowed one, the MS can preempt the RACH to access the network. If the accesscontrol class is a forbidden one, the MS cannot access the network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCACCCTRLP with Access ControlPolicy Index, ACC Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access ControlWindow, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window set as required.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 199 Configuring Access Control Class


609

NOTE

A maximum of 32 access control policies can be set. You can run the command in Step 1 formultiple times to set multiple access control policies.

When the Access Control Policy is enabled and the system message is sent by the BSC, theaccess of the MSs of classes 10 to 15 is not affected regardless of the Access Control Policyconfiguration.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Access ControlAllowed set to YES(Yes) and ACC Control Policy to the value of Access ControlPolicy Index specified in Step 1.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC.

Expected result: Access Control Allowed is set to YES(Yes), and Access ControlPolicy is specified.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCACCCTRLP.Expected result: The values of Access Control Window Size, Starting Point of theAccess Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window arethose specified during configuration.

3. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS DomainMessages on the Abis Interface.

NOTE

The access-control-class in the RACH Control Parameters IE is called the ACC field. The ACCfield contains two octets and is 16 bits in length. Each bit indicates a level of the SIM usersand its value is 0 or 1. When a bit is 0, the SIM users of a certain level are allowed to accessthe network. When a bit is 1, the SIM users of a certain level are forbidden to access the network.

Expected result: The Information Element (IE) RACH Control Parameters is includedin the system message, and within the sliding window range the value of the bits inthe ACC field of the RACH Control Parameters is 1 from the starting point onwards.

4. When an MS is used to make a call in the period specified in Step 1, the MS cannotaccess the network if the level of the SIM card of the MS belongs to the forbiddenlevels. If the level of the SIM card does not belong to the forbidden levels, the MScan access the network normally.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Access Control

Allowed to NO(No) so that the ACC feature in a cell is deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating ACCADD BSCACCCTRLP: ACCINDEX=0;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=YES, ACCCTRLPY=0;//Deactivating ACCSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 199 Configuring Access Control Class


610

200 Configuring GSM/WCDMAInteroperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.


– The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectionalcell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA.

– The BSS and NSS support the GSM/WCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection,and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision,and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.




l Initial Data PreparationThe basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

ContextThe GSM/WCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect aGSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA network or in an areawith weak WCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMAnetwork again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the WCDMA cell is higher than thatin the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a WCDMA cell if the handoveror cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided bythe WCDMA network.

The feature GSM/WCDMA Interoperability is applied to scenarios such as cell reselection andhandovers between GSM and WCDMA. This feature has no impact on services. The networkelements involved are the BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability


611


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell.In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A InterfaceTag and Um Interface Tagto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and ClassmarkEnquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set QueryClassmark after In-BSC HO Enabled to YES(Yes).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call controlparameters of a cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRANsystem information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch Ito 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utrancell type.Expected result: The value of Utran cell type is FDD.

2. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiatednormally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based. On the CN side, set ServiceHandover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

3. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with thehandover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

4. Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No andReceived Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) arenormal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If thefollowing conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cellreselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset or CPICHEc/No > FDD Qmin.

5. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates thatthe MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequencyinformation of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring3G cell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G externalcell.

----End



612

Example//Activating GSM/WCDMA InteroperabilityADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD, RA=1;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA InteroperabilityRMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048";RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;



613

201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA ServiceBased Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.



– The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and locationupdate. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handoversignaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.


This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.l License


l Other Prerequisites– The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.– On the MSC, the BSC is set to support service handovers, and the service handover

attribute of the IMSI for the MS is set to support handovers for 2G CS services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toYES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step,set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD to set the UTRANFDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover


614

YES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell),RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3GCell HO to 0.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set FDD 3GBetter Cell HO Watch Time, FDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, RSCPOffset, and Ec/No Offset according to the actual requirements.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set ServiceBased Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated

normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. On the CN side,set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should beperformed.

2. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with thehandover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover

parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toNO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, setBetter 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference toPre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

Example//Activating GSM/WCDMA Service Based HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=CnService-based;SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell;SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES;

//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Service Based HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO;SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_Cell;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover


615

202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA LoadBased Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.



– The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and locationupdate. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handoversignaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.


– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

l License


l Initial Data Preparation

The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context

The MSC transparently transmits the load information of the WCDMA network to the BSC.Then, the BSC makes a decision on the inter-RAT handover based on its own load and the loadin the WCDMA network. In addition, the BSC sends a handover request carrying its own loadinformation to the WCDMA network for reference in the decision on the inter-RAT handover.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover


616

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable andInter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS 2G3G Load Balance Delta Threshold according to the actual requirements.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set inter-RAT handover parameters.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set HandoverLoad Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements.

l Verification Procedure1. On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should

be performed.2. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated

normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals.3. Enhancedthe load of the GSM cell to start the handover.4. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.

Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with thehandover cause value of "reduce load in serving cell".


parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toNO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, setBetter 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference toPre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

Example//Activating GSM/WCDMA Load Based HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based;SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=0, TRIGTHRES=50, LoadAccThres=40;//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Load Based HandoverSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO;SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_Cell;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover


617

203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell ReselectionBased on MS State

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1143232G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.



– The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and locationupdate. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handoversignaling procedures during inter-RAT handovers.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116201 Network-

Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).l License


l Initial Data PreparationThe basic data has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRANsystem information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch Ito 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).

3. Optional: If Utran Cell Type is set to TDD(TDD), run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to modify the UTRAN system information parameters

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State


618

for call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information OptimizedAllowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and

Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) arenormal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If thefollowing conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cellreselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset andCPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin.

2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates thatthe MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequencyinformation of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.


parameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;

//Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State


619

204 Configuring the Fast WCDMAReselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-114325Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.





l License



– The network involves the GSM network and the WCDMA network

– The UE supports the GSM and WCDMA frequency bands at the same time.

Context

When an UE terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on the WCDMA network accordingto the cell selection indicator after release information in the Channel Release message.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a WCDMA FDDor TDD cell 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure the WCDMAcell 1 as the neighboring cell of the GSM cell 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELLto add a GSM cell 0 on theWCDMA side.


204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS CallRelease


620

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to configure the GSM cell 0as the neighboring cell of the WCDMA cell 1.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag, UmInterface Tag , and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

6. configure the fast WCDMA reselection at 2G CS call release.

– When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to YES(Yes)

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G CellAfter Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).

– When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to NO(No)

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA withBSCRESERVEDPARA20 of Cell 0, set to 512.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G CellAfter Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. On the Um Interface Trace window, it shows that the UE camps on Cell 0 and initiates

a call successfully. In addition, the call is still being maintained.2. After the call is released, on the screen of the UE, it shows that the UE has camped

on a GSM cell.

NOTE

If the GSM and WCDMA networks use the same indicator, the UE must be equipped with afunction through which a user can query that the currently camped cell is a GSM or WCDMAcell.

3. On the Um Tracing window, the signaling procedure of the cell shows that thedownlink Channel Release message carries an information element (IE) "cell-selection-indicator-after-release".

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G Cell After

Call Release of Cell 0, the GSM cell, set to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating the feature Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=7572, EXT3GCELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=50, SCRAMBLE=200, DIVERSITY=NO,OPNAME="main";;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="Cell0", NBR3GNCELLNAME="Cell1";ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=1, GSMCellIndex=0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="Cell0", CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES;//Deactivating the feature Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseSET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=NO;


204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS CallRelease


621

205 Configuring Load Based HandoverEnhancement on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is the BSC6900.– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.– The IP interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.

l Dependencies on Other Features– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.– This feature depends on features WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS

Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g and GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA LoadBased Handover.



l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the

neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can

refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

ContextThis feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing loadinformation over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP




622

specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficientcoverage can be more accurate, thus reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers betweenthe GSM network and WCDMA network.


1. Configuration on the RNC side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable the non-coverage-based handover. In this step, set Non-coverage handover based on2G load Indication to ON, Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1andLoad-base handover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to ON.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-downlist box.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enableUL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface. In this step, selectUL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_LDR(DownlinkUU LDR Algorithm) in the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to configure LDRactions. In this step, set DL LDR first action and UL LDR first action toCSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be loadhandover); set DL LDR second action and UL LDR second action toPSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be loadhandover); set DL LDR third action and UL LDR third action toCSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should not be loadhandover); set DL LDR fourth action and UL LDR fourth action toPSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should not be loadhandover).

NOTE

You need to configure UL and DL LDR actions according to the actual situation.

2. Configuration on the BSC side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable andInter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) .

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set2G Load Adjustment Coefficient. Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to10 is recommended.


NOTE

l If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise,the configuration fails.

1. 3G-to-2G Load Based Handover Enhancement




623

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.

a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Trace signalingon the Iu interface on the LMT. RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIREDmessage is reported. The RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED messagecontains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. Trace signaling on the A interface on theLMT. Handover Request message is reported. The Handover Requestmessage contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell.

NOTE

After the verification, set the value of system to the value before the verification.

2. 2G-to-3G Load Based Handover Enhancement

a. Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell, and the call is successfullyestablished.

b. When the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state, the MS hand over to 3Gneighbor cell. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check that AssignmentRequest, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages arereported and cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Configuration on the RNC side

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSCHandover based on Load Enhancement on the UMTS side. In this step, set Non-coverage handover based on 2G load Indication to OFF(OFF) and Load-basehandover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to OFF(OFF).

2. Configuration on the BSC side– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to

deactivate MBSC Handover based on Load Enhancement on the GSM side. In thisstep, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Connect State to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Handover based on Load Enhancement //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the non-coverage-based handover*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=ON, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface*/ MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1; /*Configuring LDR actions*/ MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, DlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, UlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO,




624

UlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;//Deactivating Handover based on Load Enhancement//Configuration on the RNC side SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=OFF;//Configuration on the BSC sideSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=NO;




625

206 Configuring NACC(NetworkAssisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization

Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.


– The BSC model is the BSC6900.

– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.

– The IP interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.


– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.

– This feature depends on feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Basedon Iur-g.

l License


l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.

l The MS supports NACC.

l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as theneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you canrefer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.


206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and

WCDMA


626

ContextThis feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol stackcomplies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS services froma GSM cell to a WCDMA cell does not require the information transfer via the CN.



a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe NACC function. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in theHandOver switch drop-down list box.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable directGERAN system information exchange. In this step, set GERAN SystemInformation Exchange Switch to ON.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-downlist box.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure. In this step, set Inter-RATcell support RIM indicator to TRUE. If multiple neighboring cells are planned,repeat this step to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM forall the neighboring cells.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GNRNC to allow NACC-relatedinformation exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow InfoExchange at Iur-g to YES(Support) and Info Exchange Content toNACCRELATED(NACC Info).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set basic GPRSattributes of the GSM cell. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Supportas built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Trace Iur-g and Um interfaces on the LMT.2. Use a dual-mode MS to download data in the UMTS cell and then switch the MS to

the GSM cell.3. Check that INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ and INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP

messages are reported on the Iur-g interface. The value of informationTypeItem inthe INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ message is nACC-Related-Data(8) and theINFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP message contains nACC-Related-Data.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH on theRNC to deactivate NACC Procedure Optimization. In this step, deselect



WCDMA


627

HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in theHandOver switch drop-down list box.

----End

Example//Activating NACC Procedure Optimization //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the NACC function*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling direct GERAN system information exchange*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscReqGeranInfoSwitch=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure*/MOD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=0, SuppRIMFlag=TRUE; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Allowing NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface*/MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1; /*Setting basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell*/SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;//Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization//Configuration on the RNC side SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-0;



WCDMA


628

207 Configuring GSM and WCDMALoad Balancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is BSC6900.– The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.– The IP interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.

l Dependencies on Other Features– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.– This feature depends on features GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

or WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.l License


l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT

REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should beperformed.

l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sentfrom the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as aneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.


NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.


207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Basedon Iur-g


629

ContextThis feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange ofHuawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on thebasis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA networkwhen an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between the GSMnetwork and WCDMA network.



a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable loadbalancing and set load difference thresholds. In this step, set ServiceDistribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOAD-BASED), Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of CS Service to10, PS Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of Ps Service to 30,and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableinter-RAT handover. In this step, select theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver switch.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In thisstep, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based), 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-RAT incoming BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC HandoverEnable and Intra-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). If multipleneighboring cells are planned, repeat this step to enable inter-RAT incoming BSChandover for all neighboring cells.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to 110.


NOTE

If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, theconfiguration fails.

1. 3G-to-2G Load Balancing


a. The verification procedure consists of the RRC setup phase and the RABconnection phase. The verification in the latter phase involves CS speech servicesand PS data services.




630

a. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSMcell2 at the RRC setup phase

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call issuccessfully established. Initiate Uu-interface signaling tracing on theLMT. The RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ andRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported, and theRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSM-TargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell2 is contained,indicating that the MS accesses cell2.

b. Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GPRScell3 at the RAB connection phase

1) Use the MS to browse the Internet.2) Initiate Uu-interface message tracing on the LMT. You can find that

the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,RRC_MEAS_CTRL, andRRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN are reported, andthat the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL messageis event3c.

3) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CNto the RNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP messageis sent from the RNC to the CN.

4) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND andRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from theCN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETEmessage is sent from the RNC to the CN.

5) When the MS attempts to reselect cell3, Internet browsing is slightlyaffected. After the MS reselects cell3, Internet browsing returns tonormal.

c. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSMcell2 at the RAB connection phase

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call issuccessfully established.

2) Initiate Uu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that themessages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSMare reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in theRRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from theRNC to the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMANDand RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent fromthe CN to the RNC.

4) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from theRNC to the CN.

2. 2G-to-3G Load Balancing




631

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.

a. Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure istriggered so that the MS accesses the neighboring UMTS cell. The call issuccessfully established. Initiate A-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. Youcan find that the Assignment Request, Handover Required, and HandoverCommand messages are reported and that the value of cause in the HandoverRequired message is directed-retry(13).


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSCload balancing. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load BalancingSwitch to OFF(OFF).


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB todeactivate 2G-to-3G load balancing. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT LoadHO in Access State to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g//Configuration on the RNC side/*Enabling load balancing and setting load difference thresholds*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcCsDeltaThrd=10, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcPsDeltaThrd=30;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;//Configuration on the BSC side/*Enabling load balancing*/SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="0", INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;/*Setting load difference thresholds*/SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;//Deactivating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g//Configuration on the RNC sideSET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;//Configuration on the BSC sideSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;




632

208 Configuring GSM and WCDMATraffic Steering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is BSC6900.

– The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.

– The IP interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.


– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.

– This feature depends on features GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service BasedHandover and WRFD-070007 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

l License


l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.

l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.

l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENTREQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should beperformed.

l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sentfrom the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed orHandover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should not be performed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as aneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.



208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Basedon Iur-g


633

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.

Context

This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services aresteered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and theload of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.



a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable trafficsteering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch toSERVICE-BASED(SERVICE-BASED) and Adjustment Coefficient of 2GLoad Value to 1.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableinter-RAT handover. In this step, select theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver switch.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handover. In this step, set both Inter-RAT CS HandoverSwitch and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON. Run the ADDUCELLHOCOMM command to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handover foreach cell.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB toenable traffic steering. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in AccessState to Service-based(Service-based).


1. The verification procedure of 3G-to-2G Traffic Steering


a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Initiate Iu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported and the handovercause value in the message is resource-optimisation-relocation. Initiate Ainterface tracing. You can find that the Handover Request message is reportedand the handover cause value in the message is traffic.




634

CAUTIONEnsure that the GSM cell is not in the congestion state.

2. The verification procedure of 2G-to-3G Traffic Steering

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.

a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the GSM cell. Initiate CSDomain Messages of a Single Subscriber tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe call is in GSM cell, and don't hand over to UMTS cell.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate trafficsteering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch toOFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating 3G-to-2G traffic steering//Configuration on the RNC side/*Enabling traffic steering*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=SERVICE-BASED;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;/*Enabling inter-RAT CS and PS handover*/ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;//Configuration on the BSC side/*Enabling inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;//Deactivating 3G-to-2G traffic steering//Configuration on the RNC sideSET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;




635

209 Configuring Cell ReselectionBetween GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.


– This feature requires support from the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, andHLR.





– The MS supports both GSM and LTE and supports bidirectional cell reselection betweenGSM and LTE.

– The BSS and the NSS support bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and LTE.

Context

Cell reselection between GSM and LTE enables an MS in an LTE network to reselect the GSMnetwork when the MS is in a blind area of the LTE network or in an area with weak LTE coverage.When the MS reenters the LTE network coverage or when the MS detects that an LTE cellprovides strong coverage, the MS can reselect the LTE network when the cell reselectionconditions are met.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add an external LTEcell. In this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE


636

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set MSFast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Set the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, setGERAN Priority smaller than EUTRAN Priority.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL to add a neighboring LTEcell. In this step, set Source Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, NeighborCell Index to the index of the added LTE cell, and Support Cell Reselection toSUPPORT(SUPPORT).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of

LTE Cell Reselection Allowed.

Expected result: The value of LTE Cell Reselection Allowed is Yes.2. Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell. Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis

interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on theAbis Interface. On the RSL tab page, set Filter Flag to Cell and Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the index of the cell to be verified. Then click Submit and anAbis Interface CS Trace dialog box is displayed.

Expected result: The MS reselects the LTE cell successfully. The result of RSLmessage tracing on the Abis interface shows that BCCH Information is traced and itsmessage type is System Information 2Quater.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to disable

cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cells. In this step, set LTECell Reselection Allowed to NO(No).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to disable cellreselection from a GSM cell to a specific LTE cell. In this step, set Support CellReselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).

----End

Example/*Activating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*///Adding an external LTE cellADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="cell", MCC="460", MNC="188", ENODEBTYPE=HOME, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=2, PCID=3, EUTRANTYPE=FDD;//Enabling LTE cell reselectionSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=YES;//Setting the cell priority and the parameters about EUTRAN system informationSET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GERANPRI=1, EUTRANPRI=7, THREUTRANHIGH=2, EUTRANQRXLEVMIN=10;//Enabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE cellADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048, SPTRESEL=SUPPORT;//Enabling System Information 2Quater sendingSET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES;

/*Deactivating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*/



637

//Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cellsSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=NO;//Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE cellMOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048, SPTRESEL=UNSUPPORT;



638

210 Configuring PS Handover BetweenGSM and LTE Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.




– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

l License


l The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l The SGSN support the PFC procedure.

l The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cellssupport the cell reselection.

NOTEYou can run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add a neighboring LTE cell,in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLHOBASIC to configure the neighboring LTE cells to support the cellreselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).

l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supportsthe feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

Contextl When an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells under the NSE support

the PS handover.


210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Basedon Coverage


639

l The BSC supports the PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN. In this way, theaccess time of the MS to the target cell is reduced.


– Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.

– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set

Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA.

– Set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).

– Set Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period as required, for example, 10.

– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.

– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.

– Set Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold as required, forexample, 1.

– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.

– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.

– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.

– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.

– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step,set EUTRAN Priority to 7.

– Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cellPS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).


– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellUrgent Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), Cell Load ReselectionAllowed to FORBID(Forbid), and Cell Service Reselection Allowed toFORBID(Forbid).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PSmessages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on theLMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that thelevel of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.




640

4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the followingmessages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage isenabled.

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSNto BSC.

– Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.

– Verifying the PS Handover from LTE to GSM

1. Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Tracethe PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interfaceon the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so thatthe level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled.

– Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC toSGSN

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN

NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set SupportIn LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set SupportOut LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set SupportIn LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10, RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, RESELINTERVAL=2;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;




641

//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;




642

211 Configuring PS Handover BetweenGSM and LTE Based on Quality

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.





l License







l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supportsthe feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.


the PS handover.


211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Basedon Quality


643




1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.

– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set

Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA.

– Set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).

– Set MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold as required, for example, 200.

– Set Cell Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold as required, for example, 30.

– Set EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 7.

– Set EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 16.

– Set GPRS Quality Threshold as required, for example, 5.

– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.

– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.

– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.

– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.

– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.

– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.

– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.





– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load ReselectionAllowed to FORBID(Forbid).





644

3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that thelevel of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the followingmessages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on quality isenabled.






2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so thatthe level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on quality is enabled.

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC



NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover toUNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After theverification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, MSRXQUALSTATTHRSH=200, CELLRXQUALWORSENRATIOTHRSH=30, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, EGPRSBEPLIMITGMSK=7, EGPRSBEPLIMIT8PSK=16, GPRSRXQUALLIMIT=5;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;




645

//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;




646

212 Configuring PS Handover BetweenGSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.





l License







l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supportsthe feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.


the PS handover.


212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Basedon Cell Load


647




1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA.– Set Cell Load Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).– Set Load Reselection Start Threshold as required, for example, 85.– Set Load Reselection Receive Threshold as required, for example, 6.– Set Load Reselect Level Threshold as required, for example, 40.– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.




l Verification Procedure– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Urgent ReselectionAllowed to FORBID(Forbid).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace thePS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface onthe LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following

messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on cell load isenabled.




648






2. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on cell load is enabled.

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC



NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover toUNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After theverification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), and Support In LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85, LOADRESELRXTHRSH=6, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;




649

213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service BasedPS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511306GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.






l Other Prerequisites– The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.– The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.– The SGSN carries the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE.– The SGSN support the PFC procedure.– The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells

support the cell reselection.

NOTEYou can run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add a neighboring LTEcell, in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and run theBSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to configure the neighboring LTE cells tosupport the cell reselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).

– The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cellsupports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover


650


the PS handover.l The BSC supports the PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN. In this way, the

access time of the MS to the target cell is reduced.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA, set Cell ServiceReselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).



l Verification Procedure– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), set Cell Urgent ReselectionAllowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).


3. Inform an engineer at the NSE to configure the subscription information of thisMS to ensure that the LTE network is preferentially selected.

NOTEThe following message from the SGSN to the BSC can be traced over the Gb interface: the DL-UNITDATA message with the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE setting to Network initiated cellchange order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure should beperformed.

4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the followingmessages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage isenabled.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN

to BSC.– Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.



651



2. Inform an engineer at the LTE to trigger the handover of this service from LTE toGSM.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled.– Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to

SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN

NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set SupportIn LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support

Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set SupportIn LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TrafficReselAllow=PERMIT;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;



652

214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSMand LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.


– The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301 CellReselection Between GSM and LTE.

l License


l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) andConfiguring the Gb Interface (over IP).



Contextl This feature can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection from

GSM to LTE for an MS.

l With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal levelcan reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level.Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE


653

considers factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, andsignal level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkControl Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed, Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed, Cell LoadReselection Allowed, and Cell Service Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).Set the related parameters as required according to network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, setEUTRAN Priority to 7.

l Verification Procedure1. Make the MS camp on the serving GSM cell. Then, use the MS to perform GPRS

services, and trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PSDomain Messages on the Um Interface.

2. Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cellis higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the servingcell.

3. Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced,the eNC2 between GSM and LTE is enabled.– The Packet Measurement Report message from MS to BSC.– The Packet Cell Change Order message from BSC to MS.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating eNC2 Between GSM and LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, TRAFFICRESELALLOW=PERMIT;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Deactivating eNC2 Between GSM and LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE


654

215 Configuring eNACC Between GSMand LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted CellChange.


– The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.


– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

l License


l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) andConfiguring the Gb Interface (over IP).



Contextl The eNACC between E-UTRAN and GERAN supports only the relocation of MSs from

E-UTRAN to GERAN.

l The eNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten theperiod of service disruption caused by cell reselection.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE


655

NOTEThe verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise, somemessages may not be traced.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support toYES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation whenthe traffic volume is low.

l Verification Procedure1. Trace SIG messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing SIG

Messages on the Gb Interface.2. Check the messages traced over the Gb interface. If the following messages are traced,

the eNACC between GSM and LTE is enabled.– The RAN INFORMATION REQ message from SGSN to BSC.– The RAN INFORMATION message from BSC to SGSN.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to NO

(No Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation whenthe traffic volume is low.

----End

Example//Activating eNACC Between GSM and LTEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Deactivating eNACC Between GSM and LTEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=NO;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE


656

216 Configuring SRVCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).





Contextl The SRVCC feature enables the speech services that are carried on the IP Multimedia

Subsystem (IMS) to be handed over to the GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN).An MS accesses the IMS to maintain the speech service through the CS domain in theGERAN or the PS domain in the Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN).

l The SRVCC feature supports only handover of speech services from E-UTRAN toGERAN. It is available only when the E-UTRAN and the GERAN cover the same area.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SRVCCHandover Allowed to YES(Yes), and according to SAI settings on the GSM side, setthe following parameter value:– LTE SAI MCC– LTE SAI MNC– LTE SAI LAC– LTE SAI SAC

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 216 Configuring SRVCC


657

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query SRVCC

Handover Allowed.

Expected result: The value of SRVCC Handover Allowed is Yes.2. Tracing the A interface signaling on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on

the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell for the DPC(Hex) in the DPC Configuration. Click BSSAP tab in the Trace Type. On theBSSAP tab page, specify the ID of the test cell for the Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16)in the Cell. Then click Submit.

3. After the A interface signaling tracing window is displayed, use a GSM/LTE dual-mode MS to camp on the LTE cell and then make a call.

Expected result: The Handover Request and Handover Complete messages aretraced over the A interface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SRVCC

Handover Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating SRVCCSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=YES, LTESAIMCC=538, LTESAIMNC=735, LTESAILAC=2497, LTESAISAC=3685;//Deactivating SRVCCSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=NO;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 216 Configuring SRVCC


658

217 Configuring Multi TechnologyNeighbour Cell Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511310Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.


– None


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

l License



– The MS and SGSN support the PS handover.

– GSM neighboring cells, UMTS neighboring cells, and LTE neighboring cells areconfigured.

Context

This feature allows the users to configure priorities to GSM, UMTS, and LTE neighboring cellsof a GSM cell on the BSC. If handover conditions (for example, level) are met, the MS is handedover to a neighboring cell with a higher priority.

NOTEAssume that the serving GSM cell and two LTE external cells are configured as neighboring cells.



217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell BasedHandover


659

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to set Index Type to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the serving GSM cell, Neighbor CellIndex to the index of LTE neighboring cell 1, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 4.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to set Index Type to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor CellIndex to the index of LTE neighboring cell 2, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 5.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell.2. On the LMT, On the MT, trace PTP messages on the Gb interface and PS domain

messages on the UM interface by referring to Tracing PTP Messages On the GbInterface and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

3. Relocate the MS to trigger the PS handover.4. Check the messages traced over the Gb and Um interfaces. If the following messages

exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 2 to perform thePS service.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this

message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 2.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC.– Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.


6. Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell. Relocate the MS totrigger the PS handover.

7. Check the message process over the Gb interface and Um interface. If the followingmessages exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 1 toperform the PS service.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this

message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 1.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC.– Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to set Index Type to BYID

(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor CellIndex to the index of LTE neighboring cell 1, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 255.


----End

Example//Activation ProcedureMOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9001, NCELLPRI=4; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=5;//Deactivation ProcedureMOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9001,




660

NCELLPRI=255; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=255;




661

218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511312Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.





l License



– The network is covered by both a 2G network and an LTE network.

– The UE supports both 2G and LTE frequency bands.

Context

When the 2G network and the LTE network cover the same area and this feature is activated, aUE can process services in the LTE network immediately after the UE releases a 2G call. Thisaccelerates cell reselection.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add an LTE externalcell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL to configure the LTE cell 1as a neighboring cell of the 2G cell 0, and in this step, set Support RapidReselection to SUPPORT(SUPPORT).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release


662

NOTE

The cell 0 must be configured as a neighboring cell of the LTE cell 1 on the LTE side.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC to set basic attributes of theBSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tagto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, setEUTRAN Priority to a value greater than UTRAN Priority.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Um interface message tracing. Enable the UE to camp on cell 0, initiate a call

in cell 0 successfully, and maintain the call.2. Hang up the call and check the network indicator displayed on the UE. The network

indicator indicates that the UE is camping on the LTE cell.

NOTE

If the 2G network and LTE network use the same network indicator, the UE must be capableof identifying which cell the UE is camping on, a 2G cell or an LTE cell.

3. Trace the Um interface message by referring to Tracing CS Domain messages on theUm interface. An information element (IE) "cell-selection-indicator-after-release" iscontained in the downlink Channel Release message transmitted over the Uminterface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL. In this step, set Support

Rapid Reselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).

----End

Example//Activating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460", MNC="10", ENODEBTYPE=MACRO, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=100, PCID=0, EUTRANTYPE=FDD;ADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110", NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=SUPPORT;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME=Ce110, UTRANPRI=0, EUTRANPRI=1;//Deactivating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseMOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110", NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release


663

219 Configuring CSFB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511313CSFB.





l Others

– A SGs interface is configured between the MSC server and the Mobile ManagementEntity (MME).

– The MS is a GL dual-mode MS and supports CSFB.

– It is recommended that the CSFB be used together with the GBFD-511301 CellReselection Between GSM and LTE and the GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at2G CS Call Release.

Context

Circuit Switch FallBack (CSFB) is a function based on which the MS camping on the E-UTRANnetwork moves to the GERNAN or UTRAN network by using PS handover or PS cell reselectionand processes CS services on the GERNAN or UTRAN network.

This feature can be enabled only when the E-UTRAN network covers the same area as theGERAN or UTRAN network.


– when the MSC Pool function is disabled

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 219 Configuring CSFB


664

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, specify a targetcell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support).

– when the MSC Pool function is enabledRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, specify a targetcell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support), set Unknown Paging ResponseSupport to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. In this step, enter the IMSI or TMSI of the

test MS and click OK. For instructions on how to start CS single user tracing on theLMT, see Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

2. Enable CSFB for LTE NEs on the E-UTRAN side and for the MSC on the GERANside.

NOTE

For instructions on how to enable CSFB for LTE NEs and for the MSC, see the related featureconfiguration guide.

3. Trigger a CS paging to the MS after the MS operates services normally on the E-UTRAN network.

4. Query the result of CS single user tracing.

Expected result: The MS sets up a call successfully at the BSC. Both signaling andspeech services are normal.

l Deactivation Procedure– when the MSC Pool function is disabled

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, specify a targetcell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– when the MSC Pool function is enabledRun the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, specify a targetcell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), set Unknown PagingResponse Support to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabledSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT, CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=YES;//Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabledSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT;/*Deactivation procedure*///Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabledSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT, CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=NO;//Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabledSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 219 Configuring CSFB


665

220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMAInteroperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.


– The MS supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA networks. It also supportsbidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

– The BSS and NSS support the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cellreselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control,handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.




l Initial Data PreparationThe basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

ContextThe GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselecta GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the TD-SCDMA network or in thearea with weak TD-SCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the TD-SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the TD-SCDMA cell ishigher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a TD-SCDMAcell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the variousservices provided by the TD-SCDMA network.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability


666

– Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G externalcell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3Gcell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A InterfaceTag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), andClassmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic callcontrol parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).

– Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basichandover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell ReselectionEnable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set theUTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, setQsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always), .and set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed, TDD CellReselect Diversity, Best TDD Cell Number, TDD Reporting Offset, TDDReporting Threshold, TDD MI System INFO Broadcasting Prohibit, and TDDMI System Information Optimized according to the actual requirements.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step,set Select 3G Cell If No TD Cell Is Contained In MR according to the actualrequirements.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA.In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed and Neighboring 3G CellsFiltering Mode according to the actual requirements.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set Network Operation Mode according to the actual requirements.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA. In this step, set Cell Reselection MR Period inPacket Transfer Mode according to the actual requirements.


– Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value ofUtran cell type.Expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD.

– Verifying 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or TD-SCDMA cell, and ensure that theReceived Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) isnormal during the neighboring cell measurement of the TD-SCDMA cell (TDD).If the measurement result meets the following conditions within five seconds, theMS initiates the cell reselection from GSM to TD-SCDMA: CPICH RSCP>RLA_C + TDD Cell Reselect Diversity.



667

2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicatesthat the MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell, thefrequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring3G cell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3Gexternal cell.

– Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basichandover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell ReselectionEnable to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA InteroperabilityADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES;

//Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;

//Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA InteroperabilityRMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048";RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

//Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;



668

221 Configuring Iur-g Interface BetweenGSM and TD-SCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.


– The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is installed.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes.– The UE supports full-rate AMR.– The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA are

negotiated.

ContextThe Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC.Through the information exchange and common measurement procedures, the BSC and TD-RNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP type toIUR_G(IUR_G) and DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE command to add an M3UA localentity.




669

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE command to add an M3UAdestination entity.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an IP interface board.

5. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.

– The FG2a, GOUa, FG2c, GOUc, FG2d and GOUd boards adopt IP over FE/GEtransmission.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes ofthe Ethernet port.

b. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT to addactive and standby Ethernet ports if required.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address for theEthernet port. In this step, set Local IP address based on the network plan.When multiple VLAN gateways are planned, run this command for each IPaddress you want to add.

d. (Optional) When device IP is used in communication, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address for the interface board. Inthis step, set Device IP Address Type and IP address to appropriate values.

– The PEUa/POUc board adopts IP over E1/T1 transmission.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add the device IP addressof the interface board. In this step, set Device IP Address Type and IPaddress to appropriate values.

b. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MP linkgroup) and perform the corresponding step.

If the E1/T1 link carries a/an... Then...

PPP link Go to step c.

MP link group Go to step d.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK to add a PPP link. In thisstep, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more PPP links, run thiscommand for each PPP link you want to add.

d. Add MP link group data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP linkgroup. In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link.In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more MP links,run this command for each MP link you want to add.

6. Configure the control plane data (over IP).

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. Inthis step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) andApplication type to M3UA(M3UA). To add multiple SCTP links, run thiscommand for each SCTP link you want to add.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set.




670

NOTE

l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP), set Work mode of theM3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).

l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) and Destination entitytype is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA_SP), set Work mode of the M3UA link set toM3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). In other cases, set Work mode of the M3UA link setto M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route.d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. To add

multiple M3UA links, run this command for each M3UA link you want to add.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the SCCP DSP state. Inthis step, set DSP index to the index of the adjacent TD RNC. The result shows thatthe SCCP DSP is in the accessible state.


----End




671

222 Configuring Radio ResourceReserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA

Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.




– The feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.

l License



– The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes.

– The UE supports full-rate AMR.

– The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA arenegotiated.

– The neighboring cell relationship is properly configured on the TD-RNC. Iur-gInterface Existence Symbol is set to YES(Yes) and Iur-g Interface SupportingInter-RAT CS Handover is set to YES(Yes).

Context

In this feature, radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handoverprocedure through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and theTD-RNC. In this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without CN forwarding.


222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved HandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g


672


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index), specify the cell ID, and set Inter-RAT In BSC HandoverEnable to YES(Yes) and Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g to YES(Yes).

NOTE

Carry Speech Data at Iur-g can be set to YES(Yes) to enable the Iur-g interface to carry theuser plane data.

2. Set the local BSC as the neighboring BSC of the TD RNC and set Handover TypeSupported by the Iur-g Interface to Carrying Signaling Plane Handover on theTD-RNC side.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. The returned result

shows that Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g is set to Yes.2. Use a UE to initiate a call in the TD-SCDMA network. The call is established.

Attenuate the signal of the TD-SCDMA cell or add path loss between the UE and theTD-SCDMA cell until the UE is handed over from the 3G cell to a 2G cell.

3. Trace the messages transmitted on the interface between BSCs by referring to TracingMessages on the Inter-BSC Interface. You can view additional handover signaling inthe tracing window. Figure 222-1 shows the messages traced on the interface betweenBSCs.

Figure 222-1 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Index

Type to BYID(By Index) and specify the cell index. In addition, set Allow IncomingBSC Handover at Iur-g to NO(No). If the user plane transmission over the Iur-ginterface also needs to be deactivated, set Carry Speech Data at Iur-g to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-gSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES, InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=YES;//Deactivating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-gSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO, InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=NO;


222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved HandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g


673

223 Configuring Extended BCCH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511403Extended BCCH.





l Other Prerequisites– The MS supports this feature.

ContextSI2Quater and SI13 messages are sent on the same normal BCCH as other system informationmessages. Only one message is sent in a scheduling period, leading to a long delay. If SI2Quaterand SI13 messages are specified to be broadcast on an extended BCCH, only these two types ofmessages are broadcast on the extended BCCH. In addition, one SIQuater or SI13 message isbroadcast in each scheduling period. This speeds up the scheduling and broadcasting ofSI2Quater and SI13 messages. As a result, MSs quickly obtain system information messagesfor inter-RAT cell reselection, and the delay in cell reselection decreases.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, setCCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to a value greater than 0.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCH_Ext(BCCHExt).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Channelof Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Ext(BCCH Ext).

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 223 Configuring Extended BCCH


674

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system

information messages. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to TracingCS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL totrace RSL messages on the Abis interface. If the value of si2-quater-position in SIType 3 is 1, SI2quater is sent on the extended BCCH, as shown in Figure 223-1.

Figure 223-1 BCCH message

2. If the value of si13-position in SI Type 3 is 1, SI13 is sent on the extended BCCH,and this feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set

CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 0.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set

2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCHNorm(BCCH).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Channel

of Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Norm(BCCH Norm).

----End

Example//Activating Extended BCCHSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=1;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHExt;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Ext;

//Verifying Extended BCCHSND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

//Deactivating Extended BCCHSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=0;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHNorm;SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Norm;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 223 Configuring Extended BCCH


675

224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501Multiple CCCHs.





l License


Context

Based on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the feature ofMultiple CCCHs allows one to configure timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as BCCH physical channels. Thisincreases the number of CCCHs in a cell and therefore improves the paging and random accesscapabilities of the cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID and ChannelNo. set to appropriate values and Channel Type set to BCH(BCH).

NOTE

The main BCCH can be configured in only channel 0, and the extension BCCH can beconfigured in channel 2, 4, or 6.

If an extension BCCH is configured, the CCCH parameter in the system message needs to beconfigured accordingly. For example, if an extension BCCH is configured in timeslot 2, theCCCH parameter in the system message needs to be configured as two uncombined CCCHs.


GBSSFeature Activation Guide 224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs


676

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to anappropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to TCHFR(TCHFull Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

2. Make a call.3. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.Expected result: The value of channel-no. in all paging messages is 0.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to anappropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to BCH(BCH).

5. Make a call.6. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.Expected result: In some paging messages, the value of channel-no. is 2.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID and Channel

No. set to appropriate values, and Channel Type set to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) orTCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

----End

Example//Activating Multiple CCCHsSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=BCH;//Deactivating Multiple CCCHsSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs


677

225 Configuring Layered Paging

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511502Layered Paging.


– None



l License



– GSM, UMTS, or LTE neighboring cells are configured.

– The value of the Ready timer configured on the SGSN side is obtained.

Context

The CCCHs will be overloaded when the number of PS paging messages exceeds that of CSpaging messages and increases continuously, which affects the access CS users. Layered pagingenables the first paging to be sent only to the last cell on which the MS camps and to its configuredneighboring cells, reducing the CCCHs for PS paging.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and then set PS Paging Control toFIRSTPRECISEPAGING(First precise paging) orALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging) according to the networkplanning.

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 225 Configuring Layered Paging


678

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA, set Ready Timer.Note that the value of the Ready timer must be the same as that of the Ready timerconfigured on the SGSN side.

l Verification Procedure1. Connect an MS to a laptop and initiate PS services. Then, record the IP address of the

MS and stop PS services.2. On the LMT, trace SIG messages on the Gb interface by referring to Tracing SIG

Messages on the Gb Interface and trace CS messages on the Um interface by referringto Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

3. Wait for a period longer than the value of the Ready timer, and then ping the IP addressof the MS on the FTP server to trigger the paging procedure.Expected result:– The PS PAGING message can be viewed in the SIG messages traced on the Gb

interface.– In the CS messages traced on the Um interface, the Packet Ccch Command or

Paging Request message can be viewed only in the cell where the MS camps whenprocessing PS services and the configured neighboring cells.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and then set PS Paging Control toALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, PSPagingCtrl=FIRSTPRECISEPAGING;SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: ReadyTimer=44;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, PSPagingCtrl=ALWAYSNORMALPAGING;

GBSSFeature Activation Guide 225 Configuring Layered Paging


679

226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmissionby TDM Switching

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-5112012G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching.


– The timeslot cross connection device closest to the BSC/RNC is used to multiplex anddemultiplex 2G and 3G timeslots, and this device connects to the BSC and RNCseparately over two E1 cables.

– Multi-mode base stations are correctly installed and connected to other devices.

– A POUc board is configured.


– In GSM mode, if IP over E1/T1 transmission is used over the Abis interface, the featureGBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 has been configured before this feature is activated.

– In UMTS mode, the features WRFD-05030101 ATM over E1T1 on Iub Interface andWRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface have been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License



– The initial configurations on the BSC, BTS, and NodeB are complete.

– The BTS3600, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU), and BTS3012AE(DTRU/QTRU) do not support this feature.

Context

With this feature, the Iub and Abis interfaces share the transport network and the BSC6900provides E1/T1-based or timeslot-based 2G/3G co-transmission. In this way, the number of portson the transport network device is reduced and the transmission cost is saved.


226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDMSwitching


680

Currently, the BTSs that support the feature 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching arethe BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TSCROSS to add a timeslot crossconnection on the POUc board.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP TSCROSS to query the status of the timeslot

cross connection.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

Example//Activating 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM SwitchingADD TSCROSS: SRN=0, SN=14, SRCPORTNO=0, SRCTSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1&, DSTPORTNO=63, DSTTSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1&;


226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDMSwitching


681

227 Configuring Radio MeasurementData Interface for Navigation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511701Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation.


– The BSC6900 is configured with an OMU board running the Linux operating system.l Dependencies on Other Features



l Other Prerequisites– The port 6200 and the port 8200 used to communicate with the VNP have been enabled

on the OMU.– The ciphering function has been enabled on the CN side.– The Vendor Network Probe (VNP) has subscribed to events Cipher Mode Complete,

Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement ReportSmall, and MS Identity Established.

ContextRadio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation enables the BSC to send measured MS-relatedradio data to the VNP, which then sends the data to a thirty-party Collection Unit (CU). The CUprocesses the data and then sends it to GPS users to instruct the users to avoid congestion.

Assume that the active workspace of the OMU is version_a.

Procedurel Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the external virtual IP address of the

OMU for communicating with the VNP)


227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation


682

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GVNPADDR. In this step, set VNP IPAddress and Category Version to appropriate values based on the network plan. Notethat Category Version must be the same as that on the peer VNP.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Event ReportSwitch to ON(On), BSC Protocol Version No., BSC Application Version No., andAccess Cause to appropriate values based on the network plan. Note that BSCProtocol Version No. and BSC Application Version No. must be the same as thoseon the peer VNP.

NOTE

If a Huawei VNP is used, set BSC Application Version No. to 13.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set IDTYPE,CELLID, and CELLNAME to appropriate values, and Event Report Switch to ON(On).

l Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC forcommunicating with the VNP)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GVNPADDR. In this step, set VNP IP

Address and Category Version to appropriate values based on the network plan. Notethat Category Version must be the same as that on the peer VNP.


NOTE



4. Use the debugging IP address to log in to the target OMU at the local end. For details,see Logging In to the OMU.

5. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enter to stop the omud process.6. Run the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to enter the

directory under which the omutool is located.7. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for

interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.8. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for

interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan.

NOTEThe VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the samevalue.

9. Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutoolvnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of theBSC.

10. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.11. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from

Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the samevalue.




683

12. Store related configuration information in Records of OMU Software InstallationInformation.

l Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC forcommunicating with the VNP. The VLAN remains unchanged.)



NOTE




5. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enter to stop the omud process.

6. Run the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to enter thedirectory under which the omutool is located.

7. Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutoolvnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of theBSC.

8. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.

9. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps fromStep 4 to Step 8 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same value.


l Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC forcommunicating with the VNP. The VLAN has changed.)



NOTE






684



directory under which the omutool is located.7. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for

interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.8. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for

interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan.

NOTEThe VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the samevalue.

9. Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutoolvnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to modify the local IP address and mask ofthe BSC.

10. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.11. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from

Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the samevalue.


l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to process call services and trace IP packets at the BSS.2. Check the IP packet information.

Expected result: The IP packets contain complete information collected at the BSSand the reported events comply with protocols.

NOTE

The IP packet information consists of the events reported by the MS, including Cipher ModeComplete, Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement ResultSmall, and MS Identity Established. Where, events Cipher Mode Complete, Clear Command,and Measurement Result Small are always reported for an ordinary call. When inter-BSC callhandover occurs, events Handover Command, Handover Complete, and MS IdentityEstablished will also be reported besides the preceding events.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GVNPLOCALIP to query on the OMU theIP addresses used for connecting to the VNP.

l Deactivation Procedure (Using the external virtual IP address of the OMU forcommunicating with the VNP)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Event Report

Switch to OFF(Off).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP

Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.l Deactivation Procedure (Using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with

the VNP)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Event Report

Switch to OFF(Off).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP

Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.




685



directory under which the omutool is located.6. Run the ./omutool delvnpvip command to remove the local IP address of the BSC.7. Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for

interconnecting the OMU and the M2000.8. Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for

interconnecting the OMU and the VNP.9. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.10. Store related configuration information in Records of OMU Software Installation

Information.

----End




686

228 Configuring Multi-mode DynamicPower Sharing (GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).


– Only MRRU and MRFU support it, because this feature is only used for the scenarioof GU sharing PA, this is to say, GSM and UMTS are transmitted in the same one RFchannel simultaneously, so this feature is only for test before MSR standard is released.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature can't be activated with WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO or WRFD-010693 DL

64QAM+MIMO simultaneously.l License


l Other Prerequisites– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power

Sharing(GSM) simultaneously.

ContextIn the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share onepower amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can beused more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overallnetwork quality of the GSM and the UMTS is therefore improved.


228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM)


687

NOTE

l The feature may fail to retake the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly.As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality.

l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and therefore increase the drop rate. Theproblem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell underthe same coverage as the original UMTS.

l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS siderequires no configuration.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period forenabling GU power sharing.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RXU BoardType to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU(MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power SharingSwitch to YES(YES), and set parameters Minimum Number of Non-BCCH TRXsin GSM for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Load Threshold for GU PowerSharing, Number of Checked Timeslots for Retrieving Shared Power, Num ofTimeslots Meet Requirements for Retrieving Shared Pwr, GSM Power ReserveCoefficient for Retrieving Shared Power, GSM Idle Channel Threshold for GUPower Sharing, GSM Idle Channel Hysteresis for GU Power Sharing, GSMPower Reserve in Low Load for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in HighLoad for GU Power Sharing, Maximum Accumulated Shared Power That UMTSCan Accept, Maximum Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept In Each Periodto actual conditions.

3. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag toTRUE(TRUE).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LSTBTSRXUBP and check the returned message.Exception result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled and GU DynamicPower Sharing Switch are YES.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL, and check the returned message.Exception result: GU Power Share Flag is YES.


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag toFALSE(FALSE).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set GU DynamicPower Sharing Switch to NO(NO).

NOTE

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the twosteps discussed above.

----End




688

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00, GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00, GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES, GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6, GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5, GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=TRUE;//Verification procedure LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=0;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;




689

229 Configuring GSM and UMTSDynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211802GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrumresources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their trafficload, improving frequency utilization.


– The 900 MHz MRFU and RRU3908 must support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic SpectrumSharing.

– − This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 FlexMAIO, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.



l Start Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS Management ofthe M2000 Online Help.

ContextThe dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) between GSM and UMTS increases network throughputand reduces the total cost of data services because UMTS has higher spectral efficiency thanGSM. In theory, the maximum throughput gain is about 50%. After this feature is used, the totalcost of ownership (TCO) of mobile broadband (MBB) can be reduced, and dynamic GSM/UMTS refarming can be implemented. Thus, the maintenance cost of manual refarming isreduced.


229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic SpectrumSharing(GSM)


690



a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag setto TRUE.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to set up aDSS cell, set DSS Cell Flag to TRUE, and set Maximum TX Power in SmallDSS Coverage and PCPICH TX Power in Small DSS Coverage based onnetwork conditions.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT with bothCell barred indicator for SIB3 and Cell barred indicator for SIB4 of DSScells set to BARRED.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add theneighbor 3G cells of DSS cells as inter-frequency neighboring cells, and setBlind Handover Flag to TRUE and DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE.

e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboringGSM cells for DSS cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboringDSS cells as intra-frequency neighboring cells.

g. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with bothDRD switch for single RAB andHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH set to ON.

h. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD with Load balance DRD switchfor HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set toUserNumber.

i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD with Load balanceDRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set toUserNumber.

j. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.2. Configuration on the NodeB side

– Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add local DSS cells, and setGUPOWERSHARE to FALSE.


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add 3G externalcells.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add 3G neighboringcells.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum SharingAllowed set to YES(Yes).

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum SharingShutdown Allowed set to YES(Yes).




691

CAUTIONThe parameter Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed for all TRXs to be sharedunder a base station should be set to YES(Yes) except for the BCCH TRX.

l Verification Procedure1. Start spectrum sharing on the M2000 manually by referring to GU DSS

Management of the M2000 Online Help.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UNODEB to query the DSS status of a

NodeB.

Expected result: The value of NodeB DSS state is Actived in Normal DSScoverage.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to query the DSS status of a cell.

Expected result: The value of DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.4. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check the value of GU Power

Share Flag.

Expected result: The value of GU Power Share Flag is TRUE.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to query the value of Dynamic

Spectrum Sharing. Expected result: The value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing isYes.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Stop Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS

Management of the M2000 Online Help.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag set to

FALSE.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum Sharing

Allowed set to NO(No).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum Sharing

Shutdown Allowed set to FALSE.5. Remove the neighboring cell by referring to Reconfiguration Guide.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate a cell.

----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=TRUE;ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=102, CellName="dss102", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNDownlink=412, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="102", LoCell=102, SupBmc=FALSE, DSSFlag=TRUE, DSSSmallCovMaxTxPower=431, DSSSmallCovPCPICHPower=331;MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT: CellId=102, IdleCellBarred=BARRED, IdleIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, IdleTbarred=D320, ConnCellBarred=BARRED, ConnIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, ConnTbarred=D320;ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=105, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE,




692

NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=2, CellId=102, GSMCellIndex=120, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=3, NCellId=121, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;SET UDRD: LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, LdbDRDchoice=UserNumber;ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=120, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, ReDirBandInd=DependOnNCell;ACT UCELL: CellId=102;

ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102, STN=1, SECN=0, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;

ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=120, EXT3GCELLNAME="120", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=412, SCRAMBLE=0, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=102, NBR3GNCELLID=120;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1002, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1003, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;//Deactivation procedureMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=FALSE;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=NO;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1002, DSSENABLE=NO;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1003, DSSENABLE=NO;HO UCELL: CellId=102, CellChoice=ALLCELL;DEA UCELL: CellId=102;RMV UNRELATION: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellType=IntraFreqNCell&InterFreqNCell&InterRatNCell;




693

230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-modeCo-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).

230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission onBS side (GBTS)


694

230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.– A UTRP board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE port.

– A UTRP9 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEelectrical port.

– A UTRP2 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEoptical port.

l Dependencies on Other Features– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP– GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface



ContextThe feature requires a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on theGTMU and one FE port on the WMPT together and to share transmission ports on the UMTSside and the transmission network, therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of GSM and UMTS co-transmission, it is recommended transmission resource sharing isachieved by connecting FE ports.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 230-1,Figure 230-2, and Figure 230-3.

Figure 230-1 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side




695

Figure 230-2 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

Figure 230-3 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

IP PLAN

Table 230-1 IP Planning of connecting between BTS and BSC

Parameter Example

BSC IP 17.0.0.17

IP of FE interface on BTS 199.2.2.1

IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3

IP of BSC route 17.0.0.13

Table 230-2 IP Planning of connecting between NodeB and RNC (IP over FE/GE)

Parameter Example

IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2

IP of BSC 17.0.0.17




696

Parameter Example

IP of NodeB route 70.20.3.51

communication IP of IUB interface 70.20.3.50

IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3

IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13

DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Table 230-3 IP planning of connection between NodeB and RNC (IP over E1/T1)

Parameter Example

IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2

IP of NodeB MP GROUP 70.83.26.1

IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13

IP of NodeB route 70.83.26.10

DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Procedurel Procedure for Activating the BTS Data

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to add an IP address to the FE

interconnection port on the BTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP address ofthe FE interconnection port on the BTS side.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTSto the BSC6900.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the port connected to the network

on the GBTS side.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the

BSC6900 to the GBTS.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of FE interconnection port

on the GBTS side.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the IP of BSC6900 gateway.

l Activating the NodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. Optional: If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, runthe NodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.




697

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to an IP address in the network segment of BTS.

4. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from theNodeB to BSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand LST UIUBCP to query the information about the CCP link.

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,

and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and

Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.9. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP

relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.10. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP

server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

l Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)

1. Optional: If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, runthe NodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group (This operationis performed when E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side).

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link to the MP groupwhen E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side.




698

NOTE

l When the base station uses the E1/T1 transmission mode, the upper-layer link can be configuredas a PPPLNK or in an MP group. The MP group is recommended because it provides greaterbandwidth than the PPPLNK group.

l A maximum of eight MP links can be configured for the UTRP board, and a maximum of fourMP links are configured for the WMPT board. If the transmission requirement is not met, anotherWMPT or UTRP board can be added.

5. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from theNodeB to BSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand LST UIUBCP to query the information about the CCP link.

9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,

and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and

Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.10. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP

relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.11. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP

server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

----End

Example//Activating the GBTS data//Add the ESN of the BTS ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";//Setting the BTS IP address SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the BTS side ADD BTSDEVIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, PN=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";




699

//Adding an IP route from the BTS to the BSC6900 ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.10", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.3";//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the BTS(If the IP route has been added, skip this step): ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.3", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="17.0.0.10", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;//NodeB IP over FE/GE//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.20.3.50", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="17.0.0.17", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="70.20.3.51", PREF=80;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=46, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=38, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=2, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=18, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=3, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=14, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";//Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, MPGRPN=0, AUTH=NONAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", IPMASK="255.0.0.0", PEERIP="70.83.26.10", MCPPP=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, E1T1PN=0, TSN=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="17.0.0.13", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=IF, IFT=MPGRP;




700

//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.10", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.13", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.10", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.13", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=46, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=38, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=2, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=18, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=3, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=14, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";

230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmissionon Base Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBUsupports this feature.

– A UTRP needs to be added at the eNodeB to support IP over E1/T1.l Dependencies on Other Features

– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1– MRFD-211601 2G/3G Common Reference Clock (GBTS)– MRFD-211501 IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side

(GBTS)l License





701

ContextThe feature IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side requires a GSMand LTE dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on the GTMU and one FE port on theLMPT together and to share transmission ports on the LTE side and the transmission network,therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of GSM and LTE co-transmission, transmission resource sharing is recommended beachieved by connecting FE ports together.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 230-4 andFigure 230-5 respectively.

Figure 230-4 IP-over-FE/GE GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Figure 230-5 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Procedurel Activating the GBTS data

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS. Inthis step, set BTS Index Type and BTS Interface Board Bar Code 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to set the IP address of FE

interconnection port on the GBTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP addressof FE interconnection port on the GBTS side.




702

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set Rate and DuplexMode of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTSto the BSC6900.

– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.

– Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the GBTS port connected to theIP network, that is, the IP address of the LMPT port connected to the GTMU.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from BSC6900 tothe GBTS.

– Set Destination IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on theGBTS side.

– Set Forward Route Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC.

l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the GTMU.

NOTEWhen the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP. set the IPAddress to the IP of FE interface on eNodeB.

3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to set the IP address of the maincontrol board on the eNodeB side.

– Set IP Address to the IP address of the S1 interface on the eNodeB side.

– Set Port Type to ETH(Ethernet Port).– Set Port No. based on the actual situation.

4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe MME.

– Set Destination IP to the destination IP address of the route.

– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD(Base Board).– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Next Hop IP Address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of

the eNodeB.5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to

the SGW.6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to set transmission resource group.7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between the

eNodeB and the SGW.

– Set Join Logical Port to YES.

– Set PATH Type to ANY.8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link between

the eNodeB and the MME.9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)




703

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the GTMU.

NOTEWhen the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group.3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link and then add it

to the MP group.4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP. set the IP

Address to the IP of FE interface on eNodeB.5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to

the MME.– Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD(Base Board).– Set Route Type to IF(Exit Interface).

6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe SGW.

7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to set transmission resource group.8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between the

eNodeB and the SGW.– Set Join Logical Port to YES.– Set PATH Type to ANY.

9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link betweenthe eNodeB and the MME.

10. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

----End

Example//Activating the GBTS data//Adding the ESN of the GBTS ADD BTSESN:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";//Setting the IP address of the GBTS SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.11", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side ADD BTSDEVIP:SRN=0, SN=6, IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Setting the rate and duplex mode of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side SET BTSETHPORT:PN=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, RATE=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE;//Adding an IP route from the GBTS to the BSC6900 ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.3";//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the GBTS (If the route has been added, ignore this step.) ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="17.0.0.13", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over GE/FE)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M,




704

DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the eBodeB sideADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="199.2.2.10", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP address for the eNodeB ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="138.20.5.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="70.83.26.1", PREF=80;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="138.30.20.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="70.83.26.1", PREF=80;//Set transmission resource groupADD RSCGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, BEAR=IP, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, RSCGRPID=0, RU=KBPS, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Add a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, MPGRPN=0, MCPPP=DISABLE, AUTHTYPE=NOAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0", PPPMUX=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the eBodeB sideADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=MP, PN=0, IP="199.2.2.10", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="138.20.5.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=IF, IFT=MPGRP;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="138.30.20.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=IF, IFT=MPGRP;//Set transmission resource group ADD RSCGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, BEAR=IP, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=0, RSCGRPID=0, RU=KBPS, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Adding a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;




705

231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side

(GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.

– When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is supported by aGSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS.The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.


– WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface or WRFD-050411 FractionalIP Function on Iub Interface

l License


Context

This feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through abackplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function.

Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios:

l In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1timeslots on the UMTS side are transmitted to the GTMU through the backplane TOPchannel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmissionnetwork. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS datato be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resourcesare shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 231-1.


231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionvia Backplane on BS side (GBTS)


706

Figure 231-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a

UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared bythe UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmissionresources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 231-2.

NOTE

l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Crossconnection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1No. 0 on the NodeB backplane.

l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeBside.

Figure 231-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedurel Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOPswitching parameters.




707

– Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP BoardSubrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe NodeB interface board is located.

– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house theIub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.

– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU.

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.

– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).

– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value isH'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).



7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, setPort Type to NCP(NCP Port).

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, setPort Type to CCP(CCP Port).




708

NOTEBefore a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

l Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOPswitching parameters.

– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.

– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP.

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.



5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).

– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value isH'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).






709

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, setPort Type to NCP.

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, setPort Type to CCP.

NOTEBefore a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

----End

Example//Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) //Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

//Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;//Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=0, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP




710

ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;




711

232 Configuring Multi-Mode BSCommon Reference Clock (GBTS)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).

232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM andUMTS Common Reference Clock.

232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTECommon Reference Clock.


232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock(GBTS)


712

232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common ReferenceClock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM andUMTS Common Reference Clock.


– The GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station whose GSM and UMTS modes share theBBU supports this feature.

– If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on theBBU.


– MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock

– WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet

– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

– WRFD-050501 Clock Sync on Ethernet in NodeBl License



– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-221601 Multi-mode BS CommonReference Clock (NodeB) simultaneously.

Context

The feature GSM and UMTS common reference clock enables the GSM and UMTS modes toshare the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for onemode while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.

Scenarios of this feature are as follows:l Common GPS reference clock

– Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)

– Common GPS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)l Common BITS reference clock

– Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)

– Common BITS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)l Common E1/T1 reference clock

– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)




713

– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typicalscenario)

l Common Ethernet reference clock

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)

– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typicalscenario)

l Common IP reference clock

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

– Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

NOTEFor non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.

Common GPS reference clock

When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-mode basestation, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and UMTSmodes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure232-1.

Figure 232-1 Common GPS reference clock

Common BITS reference clock

When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-modebase station, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM andUMTS modes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown inFigure 232-2.




714

Figure 232-2 Common BITS reference clock

Common E1/T1 reference clock

When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other modeis configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of commonE1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on theUMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 232-3 and Figure 232-4.

Figure 232-3 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

Figure 232-4 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common Ethernet reference clock




715

When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FEtransmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT), asshown in Figure 232-5.

Figure 232-5 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common IP reference clock

When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, the commonIP reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with anIEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connectinga FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured toshare the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clockon the UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 232-6.

Figure 232-6 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock

1. Configuration on the GBTS side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the parameters ofa USCU board.




716

– Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).– Set GPS Work Mode to GPS(GPS).– Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clockparameters based on the actual situation.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SAV BTSCLKPARA to save BTS clockparameters.

2. Configuration on the NodeB side

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).

l Common BITS reference clock1. Configuration on the GBTS side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).


a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)1. Configuration on the GBTS side

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clocksignals received from the BSC6900. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).


NOTE

Before configuring on the NodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/T1 clock link.

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clocklink.

b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)1. Configuration on the NodeB side




717

NOTE

Before configuring the LINE clock source, ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available.

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LINECLK to configure the E1/T1 clocksource. In this step, set Port Type to E1T1(E1T1).

b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to LINECLK(Line Clock).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER(PEER Clock).

l Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side1. Configuration on the NodeB side

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).

l Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side1. Configuration on the NodeB side

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).



l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command

LST BTSCLK. Check the results.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.

The configuration succeeds.

The clock source informationmismatches the configuration.

The configuration fails.




718

2. Check whether any alarm is generated.

If... Then...

The clock conflict alarm is generated. The configurations on the GSM andUMTS sides conflict with each other.Therefore, the configuration fails.

----End

Example//Common GPS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=6, CLKMOD=GPSCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;SAV BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD GPS: GN=0,SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Common BITS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD BITS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side (GTMU)//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD PEERCLK:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD LINECLK: SN=6, PT=E1T1, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128";SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;




719

232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTECommon Reference Clock.


– The GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBUsupports this feature.

– If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on theBBU.

– The 1588V2 reference clock must be configured IP Clock Server.l Dependencies on Other Features

– GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization– LOFD-00301301 Synchronization with Ethernet (ITU-T G.8261)– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP– LOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization



l Other Prerequisites– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-231601 Multi-mode BS Common

Reference Clock (eNodeB) simultaneously.

ContextThe feature GSM and LTE common reference clock enables the GSM and LTE modes to sharethe same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for one modewhile the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.

Scenarios of this feature are as follows:l Common GPS reference clock

– Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)– Common GPS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)

l Common BITS reference clock– Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)– Common BITS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)

l Common E1/T1 reference clock– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the LTE side (LTE UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

l Common Ethernet reference clock– Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)




720

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)l Common IP reference clock

– Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)– Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)

NOTEFor non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.

Common GPS reference clock

When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and LTE dual-mode basestation, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and LTEmodes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure232-7.

Figure 232-7 Common GPS reference clock

Common BITS reference clock

When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and LTE dual-mode basestation, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM and LTEmodes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure232-8.




721

Figure 232-8 Common BITS reference clock

Common E1/T1 reference clock

When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station,clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other modeis configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of commonE1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on theLTE side (LMPT), as shown in Figure 232-9.

Figure 232-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

Common Ethernet reference clock

When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station,one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FEtransmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT), as shownin Figure 232-10.




722

Figure 232-10 Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Common IP reference clock

When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station, the common IPreference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with anIEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connectinga FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured toshare the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clockon the LTE side (LMPT), as shown in Figure 232-11.

Figure 232-11 Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock


a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the parameters ofa USCU board.

– Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).

– Set GPS Work Mode to GPS(GPS).

– Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).




723

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clockparameters based on the actual situation.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SAV BTSCLKPARA to save BTS clockparameters.

2. Configuration on the eNodeB side

a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).

l Common BITS reference clock1. Configuration on the GBTS side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).


a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side1. Configuration on the GBTS side

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clocksignals received from the BSC6900. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).


NOTE

Before configuring on the eNodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/T1 clock link.

a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clocklink.

b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side1. Configuration on the eNodeB side

a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.




724

– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).



l Common IP reference clock on the LTE side1. Configuration on the eNodeB side

a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).



l Verification Procedure1. Run the eNodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command

LST BTSCLK. Check the results.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.

The configuration succeeds.

The clock source informationmismatches the configuration.

The configuration fails.

2. Check whether any alarm is generated.

If... Then...

The Inter-System BBU BoardParameter Settings Conflict alarm isreported.

The clock settings conflict between theGBTS and eNodeB sides, and thereforethe clock setting different from theconfiguration fails.

----End

Example//Common GPS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=6, CLKMOD=GPSCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;SAV BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120;//Configuration on the eNodeB side




725

ADD GPS: GN=0,SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Common BITS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD BITS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD PEERCLK:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;//Common Ethernet reference clock on the GBTS side//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common IP reference clock on the eNodeB side//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128";SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;




726

gbss feature activation guide((v900r013c00_13)(pdf)-en

Documents

huawei trademarks

huawei proprietary

documentpurposethis

license activation

huawei industrial basebantian

basic features

ran basic feature list

optional features